This is a modern-English version of Travels in the Interior of Africa — Volume 02, originally written by Park, Mungo.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
CASSELL’S NATIONAL LIBRARY
Cassell's National Library
Travel
in the
Africa's interior
BY
BY
MUNGO PARK
Mungo Park
Vol. II.
Vol. II.
CASSELL & COMPANY, Limited:
CASSELL & COMPANY, Limited:
LONDON, PARIS, NEW YORK & MELBOURNE.
LONDON, PARIS, NEW YORK & MELBOURNE.
1887.
1887.
INTRODUCTION.
The first of the two volumes which contain Mungo Park’s “Travels in the Interior of Africa” brought him through many perils to the first sight of the Niger, and left him sick and solitary, stripped of nearly all that he possessed, a half-starved white man on a half-starved horse. He was helped on by a bag of cowries from a kindly chief; but in this volume he has not advanced far before he is stripped of all.
The first of the two volumes that features Mungo Park’s “Travels in the Interior of Africa” takes him through many dangers to his first glimpse of the Niger River, leaving him sick and alone, a nearly starving white man on a half-starved horse. He received some help from a bag of cowries given by a kind chief; however, in this volume, he doesn’t get far before losing everything.
There is not in the range of English literature a more interesting traveller’s tale than was given to the world in this book which this volume completes. It took the deeper hold upon its readers, because it appeared at a time when English hearts began to be stirred by the wrongs of slavery. But at any time there would be strong human interest in the unconscious painting of the writer’s character, as he makes his way over far regions in which no white man had before been seen, with firm resolve and with good temper as well as courage and prudence, which bring him safe through many a hair-breadth escape. There was a true kindness in Mungo Park that found answering kindness and brought out the spirit of humanity in those upon whose goodwill his life depends; in the negroes often, although never in the Moors. There was no flinching in the man, who, when robbed of his horse, stripped to the shirt in a forest and left upon a lion’s track, looked down with a botanist’s eye on the beauty of a tiny moss at his feet, drew comfort from it, and laboured on with quiet faith in God. The same eye was as quick to recognise the diverse characters of men. In Mungo Park shrewd humour and right feeling went together. Whatever he had to say he said clearly and simply; and it went straight home. He had the good fortune to be born before “picturesque writing” was invented. When we return to the Gambia with Mungo Park under the same escort with a coffle of slaves on their way to be shipped for the use of Christians, from the strength of his unlaboured narrative we get clear knowledge unclouded by a rainbow mist of words. He is of one blood with the sailors in whom Hakluyt delighted.
There isn't a more fascinating travel story in English literature than what is presented in this book, which completes this volume. It captivated readers even more because it was released at a time when English people began to feel strongly about the injustices of slavery. However, there would always be a strong human interest in the writer's character, portrayed as he journeys through vast regions unseen by any white man before, demonstrating determination along with a good attitude, courage, and common sense that help him survive many close calls. Mungo Park had a genuine kindness that inspired kindness in return and brought out the spirit of humanity in those who held his fate in their hands; often from the Black people, though never from the Moors. The man didn’t shy away from challenges; when he was robbed of his horse, stripped down to his shirt in a forest, and left on a lion's trail, he looked down at a tiny moss at his feet with the appreciation of a botanist, found comfort in it, and continued on with quiet faith in God. His sharp eye could also quickly identify the different qualities in people. Mungo Park combined sharp humor with genuine emotions. Whatever he needed to say, he expressed it clearly and simply, and it resonated deeply. He was fortunate to be born before the age of "picturesque writing" was popularized. When we follow Mungo Park back to the Gambia alongside a group of slaves being taken to be shipped for Christian use, his straightforward narrative gives us clear understanding without being obscured by flowery language. He is of the same spirit as the sailors that Hakluyt admired.
CHAPTER XVI.
VILLAGES ON THE NIGER—DECIDES NOT TO GO ANY FARTHER EAST.
Being, in the manner that has been related, compelled to leave Sego, I was conducted the same evening to a village about seven miles to the eastward, with some of the inhabitants of which my guide was acquainted, and by whom we were well received. [7] He was very friendly and communicative, and spoke highly of the hospitality of his countrymen, but withal told me that if Jenné was the place of my destination, which he seemed to have hitherto doubted, I had undertaken an enterprise of greater danger than probably I was apprised of; for, although the town of Jenné was nominally a part of the king of Bambarra’s dominions, it was in fact, he said, a city of the Moors—the leading part of the inhabitants being bushreens, and even the governor himself, though appointed by Mansong, of the same sect. Thus was I in danger of falling a second time into the hands of men who would consider it not only justifiable, but meritorious, to destroy me, and this reflection was aggravated by the circumstance that the danger increased as I advanced in my journey, for I learned that the places beyond Jenné were under the Moorish influence in a still greater degree than Jenné itself, and Timbuctoo, the great object of my search, altogether in possession of that savage and merciless people, who allow no Christian to live there. But I had now advanced too far to think of returning to the westward on such vague and uncertain information, and determined to proceed; and being accompanied by the guide, I departed from the village on the morning of the 24th. About eight o’clock we passed a large town called Kabba, situated in the midst of a beautiful and highly cultivated country, bearing a greater resemblance to the centre of England than to what I should have supposed had been the middle of Africa. The people were everywhere employed in collecting the fruit of shea trees, from which they prepare the vegetable butter mentioned in former parts of this work. These trees grow in great abundance all over this part of Bambarra. They are not planted by the natives, but are found growing naturally in the woods; and in clearing woodland for cultivation every tree is cut down but the shea. The tree itself very much resembles the American oak, and the fruit—from the kernel of which, being first dried in the sun, the butter is prepared by boiling the kernel in water—has somewhat the appearance of a Spanish olive. The kernel is enveloped in a sweet pulp, under a thin green rind; and the butter produced from it, besides the advantage of its keeping the whole year without salt, is whiter, firmer, and, to my palate, of a richer flavour, than the best butter I ever tasted made from cow’s milk. The growth and preparation of this commodity seem to be among the first objects of African industry in this and the neighbouring states, and it constitutes a main article of their inland commerce.
Being, as I mentioned before, forced to leave Sego, I was taken that same evening to a village about seven miles to the east, where my guide knew some of the people, and they welcomed us warmly. [7] He was very friendly and talkative and praised the hospitality of his fellow countrymen, but he also warned me that if Jenné was my destination, which he seemed to doubt, I had taken on a riskier journey than I was aware of; for even though the town of Jenné was officially part of the king of Bambarra’s territory, he explained that it was actually a city of the Moors—the majority of the residents being bushreens, and even the governor, though appointed by Mansong, belonged to the same group. This meant I was at risk of falling again into the hands of those who would see it as not just justified but commendable to kill me, and this thought was made worse by the fact that the danger intensified as I continued my journey. I learned that the areas beyond Jenné were even more strongly under Moorish control than Jenné itself, and Timbuctoo, the main goal of my search, was entirely held by that savage and ruthless people, who allowed no Christians to live there. But I had already come too far to think about going back west based on such vague and uncertain information, so I decided to go on; and with my guide, I left the village on the morning of the 24th. Around eight o’clock, we passed through a large town called Kabba, located in the midst of a beautiful and well-cultivated land that resembled the heart of England more than what I would have expected from the middle of Africa. The people were busy harvesting the fruit of shea trees, which they use to make the vegetable butter mentioned earlier in this work. These trees grow abundantly all over this part of Bambarra. The locals don’t plant them; they naturally grow in the woods, and when clearing land for farming, every tree is cut down except for the shea. The tree itself looks a lot like the American oak, and the fruit—from which the butter is made after drying the kernels in the sun and boiling them in water—resembles a Spanish olive. The kernel is surrounded by a sweet pulp within a thin green skin; the butter derived from it not only has the advantage of lasting all year without salt but is also whiter, firmer, and, in my opinion, has a richer flavor than the best butter I've ever tasted made from cow’s milk. The growth and processing of this product seem to be among the primary focuses of African labor in this region and neighboring states, and it is a major part of their inland trade.
We passed, in the course of the day, a great many villages inhabited chiefly by fishermen, and in the evening about five o’clock arrived at Sansanding, a very large town, containing, as I was told, from eight to ten thousand inhabitants. This place is much resorted to by the Moors, who bring salt from Berroo, and beads and coral from the Mediterranean, to exchange here for gold dust and cotton cloth. This cloth they sell to great advantage in Berroo, and other Moorish countries, where, on account of the want of rain, no cotton is cultivated.
We passed by a lot of villages throughout the day, mostly populated by fishermen, and by around five in the evening, we arrived at Sansanding, a very large town with, as I was told, between eight and ten thousand residents. This place is frequently visited by the Moors, who bring salt from Berroo, along with beads and coral from the Mediterranean, to trade here for gold dust and cotton cloth. They sell this cloth at a good profit in Berroo and other Moorish countries, where, due to a lack of rain, no cotton is grown.
I desired my guide to conduct me to the house in which we were to lodge by the most private way possible. We accordingly rode along between the town and the river, passing by a creek or harbour, in which I observed twenty large canoes, most of them fully loaded, and covered with mats to prevent the rain from injuring the goods. As we proceeded, three other canoes arrived, two with passengers and one with goods. I was happy to find that all the negro inhabitants took me for a Moor, under which character I should probably have passed unmolested, had not a Moor, who was sitting by the river-side, discovered the mistake, and, setting up a loud exclamation, brought together a number of his countrymen.
I asked my guide to take me to the house where we would be staying via the most discreet route possible. We rode along the path between the town and the river, passing a creek or harbor where I noticed twenty large canoes, most of them fully loaded and covered with mats to protect the goods from the rain. As we continued, three more canoes arrived, two with passengers and one with cargo. I was pleased to see that the local Black inhabitants saw me as a Moor, a disguise that would likely have allowed me to pass without any trouble, if a Moor sitting by the river hadn’t pointed out the mistake with a loud shout, gathering a crowd of his fellow countrymen.
When I arrived at the house of Counti Mamadi, the dooty of the town, I was surrounded with hundreds of people speaking a variety of different dialects, all equally unintelligible to me. At length, by the assistance of my guide, who acted as interpreter, I understood that one of the spectators pretended to have seen me at one place, and another at some other place; and a Moorish woman absolutely swore that she had kept my house three years at Gallam, on the river Senegal. It was plain that they mistook me for some other person, and I desired two of the most confident to point towards the place where they had seen me. They pointed due south; hence I think it probable that they came from Cape Coast, where they might have seen many white men. Their language was different from any I had yet heard. The Moors now assembled in great number, with their usual arrogance, compelling the negroes to stand at a distance. They immediately began to question me concerning my religion, but finding that I was not master of Arabic, they sent for two men, whom they call Ilhuidi (Jews), in hopes that they might be able to converse with me. These Jews, in dress and appearance, very much resemble the Arabs; but though they so far conform to the religion of Mohammed as to recite in public prayers from the Koran, they are but little respected by the negroes; and even the Moors themselves allowed that, though I was a Christian, I was a better man than a Jew. They however insisted that, like the Jews, I must conform so far as to repeat the Mohammedan prayers; and when I attempted to waive the subject by telling them that I could not speak Arabic, one of them, a shereef from Tuat, in the Great Desert, started up and swore by the Prophet that if I refused to go to the mosque, he would be one that would assist in carrying me thither; and there is no doubt that this threat would have been immediately executed had not my landlord interposed on my behalf. He told them that I was the king’s stranger, and he could not see me ill-treated whilst I was under his protection. He therefore advised them to let me alone for the night, assuring them that in the morning I should be sent about my business. This somewhat appeased their clamour, but they compelled me to ascend a high seat by the door of the mosque, in order that everybody might see me, for the people had assembled in such numbers as to be quite ungovernable, climbing upon the houses, and squeezing each other, like the spectators at an execution. Upon this seat I remained until sunset, when I was conducted into a neat little hut, with a small court before it, the door of which Counti Mamadi shut, to prevent any person from disturbing me. But this precaution could not exclude the Moors. They climbed over the top of the mud wall, and came in crowds into the court, “in order,” they said, “to see me perform my evening devotions, and eat eggs.” The former of these ceremonies I did not think proper to comply with, but I told them I had no objection to eat eggs, provided they would bring me eggs to eat. My landlord immediately brought me seven hen’s eggs, and was much surprised to find that I could not eat them raw; for it seems to be a prevalent opinion among the inhabitants of the interior that Europeans subsist almost entirely on this diet. When I had succeeded in persuading my landlord that this opinion was without foundation, and that I would gladly partake of any victuals which he might think proper to send me, he ordered a sheep to be killed, and part of it to be dressed for my supper. About midnight, when the Moors had left me, he paid me a visit, and with much earnestness desired me to write him a saphie. “If a Moor’s saphie is good,” said this hospitable old man, “a white man’s must needs be better.” I readily furnished him with one, possessed of all the virtues I could concentrate, for it contained the Lord’s Prayer. The pen with which it was written was made of a reed; a little charcoal and gum-water made very tolerable ink, and a thin board answered the purpose of paper.
When I arrived at Counti Mamadi's house, the town chief, I was surrounded by hundreds of people speaking a mix of different dialects, all of which were completely unintelligible to me. Eventually, with the help of my guide who acted as an interpreter, I found out that one person claimed to have seen me in one location, while another claimed to have seen me in a different place; a Moorish woman even insisted she had kept my house for three years in Gallam, on the Senegal River. It was clear they mistook me for someone else, and I asked two of the most assertive ones to point out where they had seen me. They pointed directly south, so I figured they must have come from Cape Coast, where they might have seen many white men. Their language was different from any I had heard before. The Moors soon gathered in large numbers, showing their usual arrogance and forcing the local people to stand back. They immediately started questioning me about my religion, but when they realized I didn't speak Arabic, they called for two men they referred to as Ilhuidi (Jews), hoping they could talk with me. These Jews dressed and looked a lot like the Arabs, but even though they partially followed Mohammedanism by publicly reciting prayers from the Koran, the locals didn't respect them much; even the Moors admitted that though I was a Christian, I was a better person than a Jew. They insisted that like the Jews, I had to follow along and repeat the Mohammedan prayers, and when I tried to brush off the topic by saying I couldn't speak Arabic, one of them, a shereef from Tuat in the Great Desert, stood up and swore by the Prophet that if I refused to go to the mosque, he would be one to forcibly take me there. It’s clear this threat would have been carried out immediately had my landlord not stepped in to defend me. He explained that I was the king’s guest and he couldn't allow me to be mistreated while under his protection. He advised them to leave me alone for the night, assuring them that in the morning I would be on my way. This calmed their uproar a bit, but they still forced me to sit in a high place by the door of the mosque so that everyone could see me, as the crowd had gathered in such numbers that it was completely unruly, climbing onto rooftops and jostling each other, like spectators at an execution. I stayed on that seat until sunset, when I was taken into a nice little hut with a small courtyard in front of it. Counti Mamadi closed the door to keep anyone from bothering me. However, this didn’t stop the Moors; they climbed over the mud wall and rushed into the courtyard, claiming they wanted to watch me perform my evening devotions and eat eggs. I didn’t feel it was appropriate to comply with the first request, but I said I didn't mind eating eggs, as long as they brought me some. My landlord quickly brought me seven hen's eggs and was surprised to find I couldn't eat them raw, as many people in the interior believe Europeans mostly live on that diet. Once I convinced my landlord that this notion was unfounded and that I'd happily eat anything he thought was suitable for me, he ordered a sheep to be killed and some of it prepared for my supper. Around midnight, after the Moors had left, he visited me and earnestly asked me to write him a saphie. “If a Moor's saphie is good,” said this hospitable old man, “a white man’s must be even better.” I gladly wrote one for him, filled with all the good wishes I could think of, as it contained the Lord’s Prayer. The pen I used was made of a reed, and a little charcoal mixed with gum-water created decent ink, while a thin board served as paper.
July 25.—Early in the morning, before the Moors were assembled, I departed from Sansanding, and slept the ensuing night at a small town called Sibili, from whence on the day following I reached Nyara, a large town at some distance from the river, where I halted the 27th, to have my clothes washed, and recruit my horse. The dooty there has a very commodious house, flat-roofed, and two storeys high. He showed me some gunpowder of his own manufacturing; and pointed out, as a great curiosity, a little brown monkey that was tied to a stake by the door, telling me that it came from a far distant country called Kong.
July 25.—Early in the morning, before the Moors gathered, I left Sansanding and spent the next night in a small town called Sibili. The following day, I arrived at Nyara, a large town quite a distance from the river, where I stayed on the 27th to get my clothes washed and take care of my horse. The dooty there has a very comfortable house, with a flat roof and two stories. He showed me some gunpowder he made himself and pointed out, as an interesting sight, a little brown monkey tied to a stake by the door, telling me it came from a faraway place called Kong.
July 28.—I departed from Nyara, and reached Nyamee about noon. This town is inhabited chiefly by Foulahs from the kingdom of Masina. The dooty, I know not why, would not receive me, but civilly sent his son on horseback to conduct me to Modiboo, which he assured me was at no great distance.
July 28.—I left Nyara and arrived in Nyamee around noon. This town is mainly populated by Foulahs from the kingdom of Masina. The chief, for some reason, wouldn't meet with me but kindly sent his son on horseback to take me to Modiboo, which he assured me was not far away.
We rode nearly in a direct line through the woods, but in general went forwards with great circumspection. I observed that my guide frequently stopped and looked under the bushes. On inquiring the reason of this caution he told me that lions were very numerous in that part of the country, and frequently attacked people travelling through the woods. While he was speaking, my horse started, and looking round, I observed a large animal of the camelopard kind standing at a little distance. The neck and fore-legs were very long; the head was furnished with two short black horns, turning backwards; the tail, which reached down to the ham joint, had a tuft of hair at the end. The animal was of a mouse colour, and it trotted away from us in a very sluggish manner—moving its head from side to side, to see if we were pursuing it. Shortly after this, as we were crossing a large open plain, where there were a few scattered bushes, my guide, who was a little way before me, wheeled his horse round in a moment, calling out something in the Foulah language which I did not understand. I inquired in Mandingo what he meant; “Wara billi billi!” (“A very large lion!”) said he, and made signs for me to ride away. But my horse was too much fatigued; so we rode slowly past the bush from which the animal had given us the alarm. Not seeing anything myself, however, I thought my guide had been mistaken, when the Foulah suddenly put his hand to his mouth, exclaiming, “Soubah an allahi!” (“God preserve us!”) and, to my great surprise, I then perceived a large red lion, at a short distance from the bush, with his head couched between his forepaws. I expected he would instantly spring upon me, and instinctively pulled my feet from my stirrups to throw myself on the ground, that my horse might become the victim rather than myself. But it is probable the lion was not hungry; for he quietly suffered us to pass, though we were fairly within his reach. My eyes were so riveted upon this sovereign of the beasts that I found it impossible to remove them until we were at a considerable distance. We now took a circuitous route through some swampy ground, to avoid any more of these disagreeable encounters. At sunset we arrived at Modiboo—a delightful village on the banks of the Niger, commanding a view of the river for many miles both to the east and west. The small green islands (the peaceful retreat of some industrious Foulahs, whose cattle are here secure from the depredations of wild beasts) and the majestic breadth of the river, which is here much larger than at Sego, render the situation one of the most enchanting in the world. Here are caught great plenty of fish, by means of long cotton nets, which the natives make themselves, and use nearly in the same manner as nets are used in Europe. I observed the head of a crocodile lying upon one of the houses, which they told me had been killed by the shepherds in a swamp near the town. These animals are not uncommon in the Niger, but I believe they are not oftentimes found dangerous. They are of little account to the traveller when compared with the amazing swarms of mosquitoes, which rise from the swamps and creeks in such numbers as to harass even the most torpid of the natives; and as my clothes were now almost worn to rags, I was but ill prepared to resist their attacks. I usually passed the night without shutting my eyes, walking backwards and forwards, fanning myself with my hat; their stings raised numerous blisters on my legs and arms, which, together with the want of rest, made me very feverish and uneasy.
We rode in a mostly straight line through the woods, but generally moved forward very carefully. I noticed my guide frequently stopped and looked under the bushes. When I asked why he was being so cautious, he told me that lions were quite common in this part of the country and often attacked people traveling through the woods. While he was talking, my horse got startled, and when I looked around, I saw a large animal similar to a giraffe standing a short distance away. Its neck and front legs were very long; it had two short black horns pointing backward; and its tail, which reached down to its hind legs, had a tuft of hair at the end. The animal was a mouse color and trotted away from us slowly, moving its head from side to side to see if we were chasing it. Shortly after that, as we crossed a large open plain with a few scattered bushes, my guide, who was a little ahead of me, quickly turned his horse around and shouted something in Foulah that I didn’t understand. I asked him in Mandingo what he meant; “Wara billi billi!” (“A very large lion!”) he said, signaling for me to ride away. But my horse was too tired, so we moved slowly past the bush where the animal had alerted us. Not seeing anything myself, I thought my guide had made a mistake when the Foulah suddenly covered his mouth and exclaimed, “Soubah an allahi!” (“God preserve us!”), and to my surprise, I then noticed a large red lion, a short distance from the bush, lying with his head resting between his front paws. I expected he would leap at me immediately and instinctively pulled my feet from the stirrups to throw myself to the ground, so my horse would be the target instead of me. But it seemed the lion wasn’t hungry because he let us pass without attacking, even though we were well within reach. I was so captivated by this king of the beasts that I couldn’t look away until we were quite far away. We now took a longer route through some swampy ground to avoid any more unpleasant encounters. At sunset, we arrived at Modiboo—a lovely village on the banks of the Niger, offering a view of the river stretching many miles both east and west. The small green islands (peaceful retreats for some hardworking Foulahs, whose cattle are safe here from wild animals) and the wide expanse of the river, which is much larger here than at Sego, make this place one of the most beautiful in the world. There’s an abundance of fish caught using long cotton nets that the locals make themselves and use almost the same way nets are used in Europe. I noticed the head of a crocodile lying on one of the houses, which they told me had been killed by the shepherds in a swamp near the town. These creatures are common in the Niger, but I believe they aren’t often dangerous. They are not a big worry for travelers compared to the overwhelming swarms of mosquitoes that swarm from the swamps and creeks in such numbers that even the most lethargic locals struggle to deal with them; and since my clothes were nearly in tatters, I wasn’t well-equipped to fend them off. Most nights, I stayed awake walking back and forth, fanning myself with my hat; their bites left many blisters on my legs and arms, and combined with the lack of sleep, made me feel very feverish and restless.
July 29.—Early in the morning, my landlord, observing that I was sickly, hurried me away, sending a servant with me as a guide to Kea. But though I was little able to walk, my horse was still less able to carry me; and about six miles to the east of Modiboo, in crossing some rough clayey ground, he fell, and the united strength of the guide and myself could not place him again upon his legs. I sat down for some time beside this worn-out associate of my adventures, but finding him still unable to rise, I took off the saddle and bridle, and placed a quantity of grass before him. I surveyed the poor animal, as he lay panting on the ground, with sympathetic emotion, for I could not suppress the sad apprehension that I should myself, in a short time, lie down and perish in the same manner, of fatigue and hunger. With this foreboding I left my poor horse, and with great reluctance followed my guide on foot along the bank of the river until about noon, when we reached Kea, which I found to be nothing more than a small fishing village. The dooty, a surly old man, who was sitting by the gate, received me very coolly; and when I informed him of my situation, and begged his protection, told me with great indifference that he paid very little attention to fine speeches, and that I should not enter his house. My guide remonstrated in my favour, but to no purpose, for the dooty remained inflexible in his determination. I knew not where to rest my wearied limbs, but was happily relieved by a fishing canoe belonging to Silla, which was at that moment coming down the river. The dooty waved to the fisherman to come near, and desired him to take charge of me as far as Moorzan. The fisherman, after some hesitation, consented to carry me, and I embarked in the canoe in company with the fisherman, his wife, and a boy. The negro who had conducted me from Modiboo now left me. I requested him to look to my horse on his return, and take care of him if he was still alive, which he promised to do.
July 29.—Early in the morning, my landlord noticed I was unwell and hurried me away, sending a servant with me to guide me to Kea. But even though I could barely walk, my horse was even less able to carry me; about six miles east of Modiboo, while crossing some rough, muddy ground, he fell, and neither the guide nor I could get him back on his feet. I sat next to my exhausted companion for a while, but when he still couldn't get up, I took off his saddle and bridle and set some grass in front of him. I looked at the poor animal, panting on the ground, feeling a deep sympathy, as I couldn't shake the grim thought that I might soon be lying down and perishing from exhaustion and hunger in the same way. With that worry, I left my horse behind and reluctantly followed my guide on foot along the riverbank until around noon, when we arrived at Kea, which turned out to be just a small fishing village. The dooty, a grumpy old man sitting by the gate, greeted me very coldly. When I told him about my situation and asked for his help, he indifferentely stated that he didn’t pay much attention to fancy words and that I couldn’t enter his house. My guide tried to advocate for me, but to no avail; the dooty remained firm in his decision. With no place to rest my tired body, I was fortunately rescued by a fishing canoe belonging to Silla that was coming down the river. The dooty gestured for the fisherman to come over and asked him to take care of me as far as Moorzan. After some hesitation, the fisherman agreed to help, and I boarded the canoe with him, his wife, and a boy. The guide who had brought me from Modiboo left me then. I asked him to check on my horse on his way back and to take care of him if he was still alive, which he promised to do.
Departing from Kea, we proceeded about a mile down the river, when the fisherman paddled the canoe to the bank and desired me to jump out. Having tied the canoe to a stake, he stripped off his clothes, and dived for such a length of time that I thought he had actually drowned himself, and was surprised to see his wife behave with so much indifference upon the occasion; but my fears were over when he raised up his head astern of the canoe and called for a rope. With this rope he dived a second time, and then got into the canoe and ordered the boy to assist him in pulling. At length they brought up a large basket, about ten feet in diameter, containing two fine fish, which the fisherman—after returning the basket into the water—immediately carried ashore and hid in the grass. We then went a little farther down and took up another basket, in which was one fish. The fisherman now left us to carry his prizes to some neighbouring market, and the woman and boy proceeded with me in the canoe down the river.
Leaving Kea, we traveled about a mile down the river when the fisherman paddled the canoe to the bank and asked me to get out. After tying the canoe to a stake, he took off his clothes and dived for so long that I thought he might have actually drowned. I was surprised to see his wife act so casually about it, but my worries disappeared when he surfaced behind the canoe and called for a rope. With that rope, he dove again, then got back into the canoe and instructed the boy to help him pull. Eventually, they brought up a large basket, about ten feet wide, that held two nice fish. After returning the basket to the water, the fisherman took the fish ashore and hid them in the grass. We moved a little further down and pulled up another basket that contained one fish. The fisherman then left us to take his catch to a nearby market, and the woman and the boy continued with me in the canoe down the river.
About four o’clock we arrived at Moorzan, a fishing town on the northern bank, from whence I was conveyed across the river to Silla, a large town, where I remained until it was quite dark, under a tree, surrounded by hundreds of people.
About four o’clock we got to Moorzan, a fishing town on the north bank, where I was taken across the river to Silla, a big town, and I stayed there until it got completely dark, under a tree, surrounded by hundreds of people.
With a great deal of entreaty the dooty allowed me to come into his baloon to avoid the rain, but the place was very damp, and I had a smart paroxysm of fever during the night. Worn down by sickness, exhausted with hunger and fatigue, half-naked, and without any article of value by which I might procure provisions, clothes, or lodging, I began to reflect seriously on my situation. I was now convinced, by painful experience, that the obstacles to my farther progress were insurmountable. The tropical rains were already set in with all their violence—the rice grounds and swamps were everywhere overflowed—and in a few days more, travelling of every kind, unless by water, would be completely obstructed. The kowries which remained of the king of Bambarra’s present were not sufficient to enable me to hire a canoe for any great distance, and I had but little hopes of subsisting by charity in a country where the Moors have such influence. But, above all, I perceived that I was advancing more and more within the power of those merciless fanatics, and, from my reception both at Sego and Sansanding, I was apprehensive that, in attempting to reach even Jenné (unless under the protection of some man of consequence amongst them, which I had no means of obtaining), I should sacrifice my life to no purpose, for my discoveries would perish with me. The prospect either way was gloomy. In returning to the Gambia, a journey on foot of many hundred miles presented itself to my contemplation, through regions and countries unknown. Nevertheless, this seemed to be the only alternative, for I saw inevitable destruction in attempting to proceed to the eastward. With this conviction on my mind I hope my readers will acknowledge that I did right in going no farther.
With a lot of pleading, the duty officer let me into his balloon to escape the rain, but the place was very damp, and I had a bad fever episode during the night. Worn down by illness, exhausted from hunger and fatigue, half-naked, and with no valuable possessions to trade for food, clothes, or shelter, I started thinking seriously about my situation. I was now convinced, through painful experience, that the obstacles to my continued journey were insurmountable. The tropical rains had already set in with full force—the rice fields and swamps were completely flooded—and in just a few days, all travel, except by water, would be impossible. The cowries left from the king of Bambarra’s gift were not enough to hire a canoe for any distance, and I had little hope of relying on charity in a country where the Moors held such power. But more than anything, I realized that I was getting further into the control of those ruthless fanatics, and based on my experiences in Sego and Sansanding, I feared that attempting to reach Jenné (unless under the protection of someone influential among them, which I had no way of securing) would cost me my life for no reason, as my discoveries would die with me. The outlook in either direction was bleak. Heading back to the Gambia meant a walk of hundreds of miles through unknown regions and countries. Still, this seemed to be the only option, as I saw certain destruction if I tried to move east. With this belief in mind, I hope my readers will agree that I was right not to go any further.
Having thus brought my mind, after much doubt and perplexity, to a determination to return westward, I thought it incumbent on me, before I left Silla, to collect from the Moorish and negro traders all the information I could concerning the farther course of the Niger eastward, and the situation and extent of the kingdoms in its vicinage; and the following few notices I received from such various quarters as induce me to think they are authentic:—
Having finally decided to head back west after a lot of doubt and confusion, I felt it was important, before leaving Silla, to gather as much information as I could from the Moorish and Black traders about the eastern course of the Niger, as well as the location and size of the kingdoms nearby. Here are the few notes I received from different sources that make me believe they are credible:—
Two short days’ journey to the eastward of Silla is the town of Jenné, which is situated on a small island in the river, and is said to contain a greater number of inhabitants than Sego itself, or any other town in Bambarra. At the distance of two days more, the river spreads into a considerable lake, called Dibbie (or the Dark Lake), concerning the extent of which all the information I could obtain was that in crossing it from west to east the canoes lose sight of land one whole day. From this lake the water issues in many different streams, which terminate in two large branches, one whereof flows towards the north-east, and the other to the east; but these branches join at Kabra, which is one day’s journey to the southward of Timbuctoo, and is the port or shipping-place of that city. The tract of land which the two streams encircle is called Jinbala, and is inhabited by negroes; and the whole distance by land from Jenné to Timbuctoo is twelve days’ journey.
Two short days' travel east of Silla is the town of Jenné, located on a small island in the river, and it's said to have more residents than Sego itself or any other town in Bambarra. Another two days further, the river expands into a sizable lake known as Dibbie (or the Dark Lake). All I could find out about its size is that when you cross it from west to east, the canoes are out of sight of land for an entire day. From this lake, water flows into several different streams, which merge into two large branches: one heads northeast and the other goes east. These branches meet at Kabra, which is a day's journey south of Timbuctoo and serves as the port for that city. The land area encircled by the two streams is called Jinbala and is inhabited by black people; the total distance over land from Jenné to Timbuctoo is twelve days' journey.
From Kabra, at the distance of eleven days’ journey down the stream, the river passes to the southward of Houssa, which is two days’ journey distant from the river. Of the farther progress of this great river, and its final exit, all the natives with whom I conversed seemed to be entirely ignorant. Their commercial pursuits seldom induce them to travel farther than the cities of Timbuctoo and Houssa, and as the sole object of those journeys is the acquirement of wealth, they pay little attention to the course of rivers or the geography of countries. It is, however, highly probable that the Niger affords a safe and easy communication between very remote nations. All my informants agreed that many of the negro merchants who arrive at Timbuctoo and Houssa from the eastward speak a different language from that of Bambarra, or any other kingdom with which they are acquainted But even these merchants, it would seem, are ignorant of the termination of the river, for such of them as can speak Arabic describe the amazing length of its course in very general terms, saying only that they believe it runs to the world’s end.
From Kabra, an eleven-day journey down the river, it flows south of Houssa, which is a two-day journey away from the river. The locals I spoke with seemed completely unaware of what lies further down this massive river or where it eventually leads. Their business pursuits rarely take them beyond the cities of Timbuctoo and Houssa, and since the main goal of their travels is to gain wealth, they pay little attention to the rivers' paths or the geography of the regions. However, it's highly likely that the Niger provides a safe and convenient route between very distant nations. All my sources agreed that many of the Black merchants arriving in Timbuctoo and Houssa from the east speak a language different from that of Bambarra or any other kingdom they know. But even these merchants seem unaware of where the river ends, as those who can speak Arabic describe its incredible length in very vague terms, saying only that they believe it runs to the world’s end.
The names of many kingdoms to the eastward of Houssa are familiar to the inhabitants of Bambarra. I was shown quivers and arrows of very curious workmanship, which I was informed came from the kingdom of Kassina.
The names of many kingdoms east of Houssa are well-known to the people of Bambarra. I was shown quivers and arrows with very unique designs, which I was told came from the kingdom of Kassina.
On the northern bank of the Niger, at a short distance from Silla, is the kingdom of Masina, which is inhabited by Foulahs. They employ themselves there, as in other places, chiefly in pasturage, and pay an annual tribute to the king of Bambarra for the lands which they occupy.
On the northern bank of the Niger, just a short distance from Silla, lies the kingdom of Masina, home to the Foulahs. They primarily engage in herding, like in other regions, and they give an annual tribute to the king of Bambarra for the lands they occupy.
To the north-east of Masina is situated the kingdom of Timbuctoo, the great object of European research—the capital of this kingdom being one of the principal marts for that extensive commerce which the Moors carry on with the negroes. The hopes of acquiring wealth in this pursuit, and zeal for propagating their religion, have filled this extensive city with Moors and Mohammedan converts. The king himself and all the chief officers of state are Moors; and they are said to be more severe and intolerant in their principles than any other of the Moorish tribes in this part of Africa. I was informed by a venerable old negro, that when he first visited Timbuctoo, he took up his lodging at a sort of public inn, the landlord of which, when he conducted him into his hut, spread a mat on the floor, and laid a rope upon it, saying, “If you are a Mussulman, you are my friend—sit down; but if you are a kafir, you are my slave, and with this rope I will lead you to market.” The present king of Timbuctoo is named Abu Abrahima. He is reported to possess immense riches. His wives and concubines are said to be clothed in silk, and the chief officers of state live in considerable splendour. The whole expense of his government is defrayed, as I was told, by a tax upon merchandise, which is collected at the gates of the city.
To the northeast of Masina lies the kingdom of Timbuctoo, a primary focus of European exploration—the capital of this kingdom is one of the main trading hubs for the extensive commerce that the Moors engage in with the Black populations. The desire to gain wealth from this trade and the enthusiasm for spreading their religion have filled this large city with Moors and Muslim converts. The king and all the top government officials are Moors, and they are said to be more strict and intolerant in their beliefs than any other Moorish tribes in this region of Africa. A wise old Black man told me that when he first visited Timbuctoo, he stayed at a sort of public inn. The landlord, when he showed him to his hut, spread a mat on the floor and placed a rope upon it, saying, “If you are a Muslim, you are my friend—sit down; but if you are an infidel, you are my slave, and I will use this rope to lead you to the market.” The current king of Timbuctoo is named Abu Abrahima. He is said to be extremely wealthy. His wives and concubines are reported to wear silk, and the top government officials live in considerable luxury. The entire cost of his government is reportedly covered by a tax on goods, which is collected at the city gates.
The city of Houssa (the capital of a large kingdom of the same name, situated to the eastward of Timbuctoo), is another great mart for Moorish commerce. I conversed with many merchants who had visited that city, and they all agreed that it is larger—and more populous than Timbuctoo. The trade, police, and government are nearly the same in both; but in Houssa the negroes are in greater proportion to the Moors, and have some share in the government.
The city of Houssa (the capital of a large kingdom of the same name, located east of Timbuctoo) is another major hub for Moorish trade. I spoke with several merchants who had been to that city, and they all agreed that it is larger and more populated than Timbuctoo. The trade, law enforcement, and government are quite similar in both cities; however, in Houssa, there are more Black people compared to the Moors, and they have some involvement in the government.
Concerning the small kingdom of Jinbala I was not able to collect much information. The soil is said to be remarkably fertile, and the whole country so full of creeks and swamps that the Moors have hitherto been baffled in every attempt to subdue it. The inhabitants are negroes, and some of them are said to live in considerable affluence, particularly those near the capital, which is a resting-place for such merchants as transport goods from Timbuctoo to the western parts of Africa.
Concerning the small kingdom of Jinbala, I couldn’t gather much information. The soil is said to be incredibly fertile, and the entire country is so filled with creeks and swamps that the Moors have so far been unsuccessful in their attempts to conquer it. The inhabitants are black, and some of them are said to live quite comfortably, especially those near the capital, which serves as a stopping point for merchants transporting goods from Timbuktu to the western parts of Africa.
To the southward of Jinbala is situated the negro kingdom of Gotto, which is said to be of great extent. It was formerly divided into a number of petty states, which were governed by their own chiefs; but their private quarrels invited invasion from the neighbouring kingdoms. At length a politic chief of the name of Moossee had address enough to make them unite in hostilities against Bambarra; and on this occasion he was unanimously chosen general—the different chiefs consenting for a time to act under his command. Moossee immediately despatched a fleet of canoes, loaded with provisions, from the banks of the lake Dibbie up the Niger towards Jenné, and with the whole of his army pushed forwards into Bambarra. He arrived on the bank of the Niger opposite to Jenné before the townspeople had the smallest intimation of his approach. His fleet of canoes joined him the same day, and having landed the provisions, he embarked part of his army, and in the night took Jenné by storm. This event so terrified the king of Bambarra that he sent messengers to sue for peace; and in order to obtain it consented to deliver to Moossee a certain number of slaves every year, and return everything that had been taken from the inhabitants of Gotto. Moossee, thus triumphant, returned to Gotto, where he was declared king, and the capital of the country is called by his name.
To the south of Jinbala lies the kingdom of Gotto, which is said to be quite large. It was once divided into several small states, each ruled by its own chief, but their internal conflicts led to invasions from neighboring kingdoms. Eventually, a clever chief named Moossee managed to unite them against Bambarra. On this occasion, he was unanimously chosen as their general, and the various chiefs agreed to follow his lead for a while. Moossee quickly sent a fleet of canoes loaded with provisions from the banks of Lake Dibbie up the Niger toward Jenné, and with his entire army, he advanced into Bambarra. He reached the bank of the Niger opposite Jenné before the townspeople had any warning of his arrival. His fleet of canoes joined him the same day, and after landing the provisions, he loaded part of his army onto the canoes and, under the cover of night, attacked Jenné. This event frightened the king of Bambarra so much that he sent messengers to ask for peace; to achieve this, he agreed to give Moossee a certain number of slaves each year and to return everything taken from the people of Gotto. Triumphant, Moossee returned to Gotto, where he was declared king, and the capital of the country is named after him.
On the west of Gotto is the kingdom of Baedoo, which was conquered by the present king of Bambarra about seven years ago, and has continued tributary to him ever since.
On the west of Gotto is the kingdom of Baedoo, which was conquered by the current king of Bambarra about seven years ago and has remained under his tribute ever since.
West of Baedoo is Maniana, the inhabitants of which, according to the best information I was able to collect, are cruel and ferocious—carrying their resentment towards their enemies so far as never to give quarter, and even to indulge themselves with unnatural and disgusting banquets of human flesh.
West of Baedoo is Maniana, whose inhabitants, based on the best information I could gather, are cruel and savage—they hold such deep resentment toward their enemies that they never show mercy and even partake in unnatural and disgusting feasts of human flesh.
CHAPTER XVII.
MOORZAN TO TAFFARA.
Having, for the reasons assigned in the last chapter, determined to proceed no farther eastward than Silla, I acquainted the dooty with my intention of returning to Sego, proposing to travel along the southern side of the river; but he informed me that, from the number of creeks and swamps on that side, it was impossible to travel by any other route than along the northern bank, and even that route, he said, would soon be impassable on account of the overflowing of the river. However, as he commended my determination to return westward, he agreed to speak to some one of the fishermen to carry me over to Moorzan. I accordingly stepped into a canoe about eight o’clock in the morning of July 30th, and in about an hour was landed at Moorzan. At this place I hired a canoe for sixty kowries, and in the afternoon arrived at Kea, where, for forty kowries more, the dooty permitted me to sleep in the same hut with one of his slaves. This poor negro, perceiving that I was sickly, and that my clothes were very ragged, humanely lent me a large cloth to cover me for the night.
Having, for the reasons mentioned in the last chapter, decided not to go any further east than Silla, I informed the dooty of my plan to return to Sego, suggesting I travel along the southern side of the river. However, he told me that due to the many creeks and swamps on that side, it was impossible to take any route other than the northern bank, and even that route would soon become impassable because of the river overflowing. Still, as he praised my decision to head west, he agreed to talk to one of the fishermen to take me across to Moorzan. I got into a canoe around eight in the morning on July 30th, and about an hour later, I landed at Moorzan. There, I rented a canoe for sixty kowries, and in the afternoon, I arrived at Kea, where, for forty kowries more, the dooty allowed me to sleep in the same hut as one of his slaves. This poor man, noticing that I looked sickly and my clothes were tattered, kindly offered me a large cloth to cover myself for the night.
July 31.—The dooty’s brother being going to Modiboo, I embraced the opportunity of accompanying him thither, there being no beaten road. He promised to carry my saddle, which I had left at Kea, when my horse fell down in the woods, as I now proposed to present it to the king of Bambarra.
July 31.—The duty’s brother was going to Modiboo, so I took the chance to go with him since there wasn’t a defined path. He agreed to carry my saddle, which I had left at Kea when my horse collapsed in the woods, as I now planned to give it to the king of Bambarra.
We departed from Kea at eight o’clock, and about a mile to the westward observed on the bank of the river a great number of earthen jars piled up together. They were very neatly formed, but not glazed, and were evidently of that sort of pottery which is manufactured at Downie (a town to the west of Timbuctoo), and sold to great advantage in different parts of Bambarra. As we approached towards the jars my companion plucked up a large handful of herbage, and threw it upon them, making signs for me to do the same, which I did. He then, with great seriousness told me that these jars belonged to some supernatural power; that they were found in their present situation about two years ago; and as no person had claimed them, every traveller as he passed them, from respect to the invisible proprietor, threw some grass, or the branch of a tree, upon the heap, to defend the jars from the rain.
We left Kea at eight o’clock, and about a mile to the west, we saw a lot of earthen jars stacked up by the riverbank. They were well made but unglazed, clearly the type of pottery produced in Downie (a town west of Timbuctoo) and sold profitably in various parts of Bambarra. As we got closer to the jars, my companion picked a large handful of grass and tossed it onto them, signaling me to do the same, which I did. Then, with great seriousness, he told me that these jars belonged to some supernatural force; they had been found in their current place about two years ago, and since no one had claimed them, every traveler passing by, out of respect for the unseen owner, threw some grass or a tree branch on the pile to protect the jars from the rain.
Thus conversing, we travelled in the most friendly manner, until unfortunately we perceived the footsteps of a lion, quite fresh in the mud, near the river-side. My companion now proceeded with great circumspection; and at last, coming to some thick underwood, he insisted that I should walk before him. I endeavoured to excuse myself, by alleging that I did not know the road; but he obstinately persisted, and, after a few high words and menacing looks, threw down the saddle and went away. This very much disconcerted me; but as I had given up all hopes of obtaining a horse, I could not think of encumbering myself with the saddle, and, taking off the stirrups and girths, I threw the saddle into the river. The negro no sooner saw me throw the saddle into the water than he came running from among the bushes where he had concealed himself, jumped into the river, and by help of his spear, brought out the saddle and ran away with it. I continued my course along the bank; but as the wood was remarkably thick, and I had reason to believe that a lion was at no great distance, I became much alarmed, and took a long circuit through the bushes to avoid him.
As we chatted away, we traveled in a friendly way, until we suddenly noticed fresh lion tracks in the mud by the riverbank. My companion became very cautious; eventually, when we reached some thick underbrush, he insisted that I walk in front of him. I tried to decline, saying I didn't know the way, but he stubbornly insisted. After a few sharp words and threatening looks, he threw down the saddle and walked off. This really upset me; however, since I had lost all hope of getting a horse, I didn’t want to be burdened with the saddle. So, I took off the stirrups and girths and tossed the saddle into the river. As soon as the guy saw me do that, he came sprinting out from his hiding spot in the bushes, jumped into the river, and using his spear, retrieved the saddle before running off with it. I continued along the riverbank, but since the woods were very dense and I had good reason to believe a lion was nearby, I got really anxious and took a long way around through the bushes to avoid it.
About four in the afternoon I reached Modiboo, where I found my saddle. The guide, who had got there before me, being afraid that I should inform the king of his conduct, had brought the saddle with him in a canoe.
About four in the afternoon, I arrived at Modiboo, where I found my saddle. The guide, who had gotten there before me, was worried that I would tell the king about his behavior, so he had brought the saddle with him in a canoe.
While I was conversing with the dooty, and remonstrating against the guide for having left me in such a situation, I heard a horse neigh in one of the huts; and the dooty inquired with a smile if I knew who was speaking to me. He explained himself by telling me that my horse was still alive, and somewhat recovered from his fatigue; but he insisted that I should take him along with me, adding that he had once kept a Moor’s horse for four months, and when the horse had recovered and got into good condition, the Moor returned and claimed it, and refused to give him any reward for his trouble.
While I was talking to the dooty and complaining to the guide about being left in such a situation, I heard a horse neigh from one of the huts. The dooty asked with a smile if I knew who was talking to me. He clarified that my horse was still alive and had somewhat recovered from his fatigue. He insisted that I should take him with me, mentioning that he had once taken care of a Moor’s horse for four months. When the horse recovered and got in good shape, the Moor came back to claim it and refused to give him any reward for his trouble.
August 1.—I departed from Modiboo, driving my horse before me, and in the afternoon reached Nyamee; where I remained three days, during which time it rained without intermission, and with such violence that no person could venture out of doors.
August 1.—I left Modiboo, leading my horse, and in the afternoon arrived in Nyamee; where I stayed for three days, during which it rained nonstop and so heavily that no one could go outside.
August 5.—I departed from Nyamee; but the country was so deluged that I was frequently in danger of losing the road, and had to wade across the savannas for miles together, knee-deep in water. Even the corn ground, which is the driest land in the country, was so completely flooded that my horse twice stuck fast in the mud, and was not got out without the greatest difficulty.
August 5.—I left Nyamee, but the area was so flooded that I often risked losing the path, having to wade through the savannas for miles, knee-deep in water. Even the corn fields, usually the driest land around, were so completely submerged that my horse got stuck in the mud twice and it took a lot of effort to free it.
In the evening of the same day I arrived at Nyara, where I was well received by the dooty; and as the 6th was rainy I did not depart until the morning of the 7th; but the water had swelled to such a height, that in many places the road was scarcely passable, and though I waded breast-deep across the swamps I could only reach a small village called Nemaboo, where however, for a hundred kowries, I procured from some Foulahs plenty of corn for my horse and milk for myself.
In the evening of the same day I got to Nyara, where the dooty welcomed me warmly; and since it was rainy on the 6th, I didn’t leave until the morning of the 7th. However, the water had risen so much that in many spots the road was barely passable. Even though I waded through the swamps chest-deep, I could only reach a small village called Nemaboo. There, for a hundred kowries, I got plenty of corn for my horse and milk for myself from some Foulahs.
August 8.—The difficulties I had experienced the day before made me anxious to engage a fellow-traveller, particularly as I was assured that, in the course of a few days, the country would be so completely overflowed as to render the road utterly impassable; but though I offered two hundred kowries for a guide, nobody would accompany me. However, on the morning following, August 9th, a Moor and his wife, riding upon two bullocks, and bound for Sego with salt, passed the village, and agreed to take me along with them; but I found them of little service, for they were wholly unacquainted with the road, and being accustomed to a sandy soil, were very bad travellers. Instead of wading before the bullocks to feel if the ground was solid, the woman boldly entered the first swamp, riding upon the top of the load; but when she had proceeded about two hundred yards the bullock sunk into a hole, and threw both the load and herself among the reeds. The frightened husband stood for some time seemingly petrified with horror, and suffered his wife to be almost drowned before he went to her assistance.
August 8.—The problems I faced the day before made me eager to find a travel companion, especially since I was told that within a few days, the area would flood completely, making the road impassable. I offered two hundred kowries for a guide, but no one was willing to join me. However, the next morning, August 9th, a Moor and his wife, riding on two bullocks and heading to Sego with salt, passed through the village and agreed to take me with them. Unfortunately, they were not very helpful; they didn't know the route at all, and being used to sandy terrain, they were poor travelers. Instead of checking the ground ahead of the bullocks to ensure it was solid, the woman boldly charged into the first swamp, riding on top of the load. But after about two hundred yards, one of the bullocks got stuck in a hole, tossing both the load and her into the reeds. Her terrified husband stood frozen in horror for a while, allowing his wife to nearly drown before he finally went to help her.
About sunset we reached Sibity, but the dooty received me very coolly; and when I solicited for a guide to Sansanding he told me his people were otherwise employed. I was shown into a damp old hut, where I passed a very uncomfortable night; for when the walls of the huts are softened by the rain they frequently become too weak to support the weight of the roof. I heard three huts fall during the night, and was apprehensive that the hut I lodged in would be the fourth. In the morning, as I went to pull some grass for my horse, I counted fourteen huts which had fallen in this manner since the commencement of the rainy season.
About sunset, we arrived in Sibity, but the locals greeted me very coldly. When I asked for a guide to Sansanding, he told me his people were busy with other things. I was directed to a damp, old hut, where I spent an uncomfortable night. When the walls of the huts get wet from the rain, they often become too weak to hold up the roof. I heard three huts collapse during the night and worried that mine would be the next. In the morning, as I went to gather some grass for my horse, I counted fourteen huts that had fallen like this since the rainy season started.
It continued to rain with great violence all the 10th; and as the dooty refused to give me any provisions, I purchased some corn, which I divided with my horse.
It kept raining heavily all day on the 10th, and since the duty wouldn’t give me any supplies, I bought some corn, which I shared with my horse.
August 11.—The dooty compelled me to depart from the town, and I set out for Sansanding without any great hopes of faring better than I had done at Sibity; for I learned, from people who came to visit me, that a report prevailed, and was universally believed, that I had come to Bambarra as a spy; and as Mansong had not admitted me into his presence, the dooties of the different towns were at liberty to treat me in what manner they pleased. From repeatedly hearing the same story I had no doubt of the truth of it; but as there was no alternative I determined to proceed, and a little before sunset I arrived at Sansanding. My reception was what I expected. Counti Mamadi, who had been so kind to me formerly, scarcely gave me welcome. Every one wished to shun me; and my landlord sent a person to inform me that a very unfavourable report was received from Sego concerning me, and that he wished me to depart early in the morning. About ten o’clock at night Counti Mamadi himself came privately to me, and informed me that Mansong had despatched a canoe to Jenné to bring me back; and he was afraid I should find great difficulty in going to the west country. He advised me therefore to depart from Sansanding before daybreak, and cautioned me against stopping at Diggani, or any town near Sego.
August 11.—Duty forced me to leave the town, and I set off for Sansanding without much hope of better luck than I had at Sibity. I heard from visitors that there was a rumor going around, widely believed, that I had come to Bambarra as a spy. Since Mansong hadn’t allowed me to meet him, the local leaders were free to treat me however they wanted. After hearing the same story repeatedly, I had no doubt it was true; but with no other option, I decided to continue my journey, and I arrived in Sansanding just before sunset. My welcome was as I had expected. Counti Mamadi, who had been so generous to me before, barely acknowledged me. Everyone seemed to want to avoid me, and my landlord sent someone to tell me that bad news had come from Sego about me, and he wanted me to leave early in the morning. Around ten o’clock that night, Counti Mamadi came to see me privately and told me that Mansong had sent a canoe to Jenné to bring me back; he feared I would have a hard time traveling to the west. He advised me to leave Sansanding before dawn and warned me against stopping at Diggani or any town near Sego.
August 12.—I departed from Sansanding, and reached Kabba in the afternoon. As I approached the town I was surprised to see several people assembled at the gate, one of whom, as I advanced, came running towards me, and taking my horse by the bridle, led me round the walls of the town, and then, pointing to the west, told me to go along, or it would fare worse with me. It was in vain that I represented the danger of being benighted in the woods, exposed to the inclemency of the weather and the fury of wild beasts. “Go along!” was all the answer; and a number of people coming up and urging me in the same manner, with great earnestness, I suspected that some of the king’s messengers, who were sent in search of me, were in the town, and that these negroes, from mere kindness, conducted me past it with a view to facilitate my escape. I accordingly took the road for Sego, with the uncomfortable prospect of passing the night on the branches of a tree. After travelling about three miles, I came to a small village near the road. The dooty was splitting sticks by the gate, but I found I could have no admittance, and when I attempted to enter, he jumped up, and with the stick he held in his hand, threatened to strike me off the horse if I presumed to advance another step.
August 12.—I left Sansanding and arrived in Kabba in the afternoon. As I got close to the town, I was surprised to see several people gathered at the gate. One of them ran towards me, took my horse by the bridle, and led me around the town's walls. He pointed to the west and told me to keep going, or things would go badly for me. I tried to explain the danger of getting stuck in the woods, facing bad weather and wild animals, but all I got in response was, “Go along!” As more people joined in urging me the same way, I grew suspicious that some of the king's messengers, who were sent to find me, were in the town. I suspected these folks were just trying to help me avoid trouble. So, I set off toward Sego, dreading the thought of spending the night up in a tree. After traveling about three miles, I found a small village near the road. The dooty was splitting sticks by the gate, but I realized they wouldn't let me in. When I tried to enter, he jumped up and threatened to hit me off my horse with the stick he was holding if I dared to take another step forward.
At a little distance from this village (and further from the road) is another small one. I conjectured that, being rather out of the common route, the inhabitants might have fewer objections to give me house-room for the night; and having crossed some cornfields, I sat down under a tree by the well. Two or three women came to draw water, and one of them, perceiving I was a stranger, inquired whither I was going. I told her I was going for Sego, but being benighted on the road, I wished to stay at the village until morning, and begged she would acquaint the dooty with my situation. In a little time the dooty sent for me, and permitted me to sleep in a large baloon.
Not far from this village (and further away from the road) is another small one. I figured that since it was somewhat off the beaten path, the locals might be more willing to let me crash for the night. After crossing some cornfields, I settled down under a tree by the well. A couple of women came to draw water, and one of them, noticing I was a stranger, asked where I was headed. I told her I was on my way to Sego but got caught out after dark, so I hoped to stay in the village until morning. I asked her to let the dooty know about my situation. Before long, the dooty sent for me and allowed me to sleep in a large baloon.
August 13.—About ten o’clock I reached a small village within half a mile of Sego, where I endeavoured, but in vain, to procure some provisions. Every one seemed anxious to avoid me; and I can plainly perceive, by the looks and behaviour of the inhabitants, that some very unfavourable accounts had been circulated concerning me. I was again informed that Mansong had sent people to apprehend me, and the dooty’s son told me I had no time to lose if I wished to get safe out of Bambarra. I now fully saw the danger of my situation, and determined to avoid Sego altogether. I accordingly mounted my horse, and taking the road for Diggani, travelled as fast as I could till I was out of sight of the villagers, when I struck to the westward, through high grass and swampy ground. About noon I stopped under a tree to consider what course to take, for I had now no doubt that the Moors and slatees had misinformed the king respecting the object of my mission, and that people were absolutely in search of me to convey me a prisoner to Sego. Sometimes I had thoughts of swimming my horse across the Niger, and going to the southward for Cape Coast, but reflecting that I had ten days to travel before I should reach Kong, and afterwards an extensive country to traverse, inhabited by various nations with whose language and manners I was totally unacquainted, I relinquished this scheme, and judged that I should better answer the purpose of my mission by proceeding to the westward along the Niger, endeavouring to ascertain how far the river was navigable in that direction. Having resolved upon this course, I proceeded accordingly, and a little before sunset arrived at a Foulah village called Sooboo, where, for two hundred kowries, I procured lodging for the night.
August 13.—Around ten o’clock, I got to a small village about half a mile from Sego, where I tried, but failed, to get some food. Everyone seemed eager to avoid me, and I could clearly see from the looks and behavior of the locals that some very negative stories had been spread about me. I was told again that Mansong had sent people to capture me, and the dooty’s son warned me that I didn’t have much time if I wanted to escape Bambarra safely. I now fully realized how dangerous my situation was, so I decided to avoid Sego completely. I got on my horse and headed for Diggani, riding as fast as I could until I was out of sight of the villagers. Then I turned west through tall grass and swampy land. Around noon, I stopped under a tree to figure out my next move because I was certain that the Moors and slatees had misled the king about my mission, and people were actively searching for me to take me as a prisoner to Sego. I sometimes thought about swimming my horse across the Niger and heading south toward Cape Coast, but then I remembered that I had ten days of travel to reach Kong, and from there, I would have to navigate a vast area inhabited by different nations whose languages and customs I didn’t know at all. So, I gave up on that plan and decided that it would be better for my mission to travel west along the Niger, trying to find out how far the river was navigable in that direction. After making this decision, I continued on and arrived just before sunset at a Foulah village called Sooboo, where I got a place to sleep for the night for two hundred kowries.
August 14.—I continued my course along the bank of the river, through a populous and well-cultivated country. I passed a walled town called Kamalia [35] without stopping, and at noon rode through a large town called Samee, where there happened to be a market, and a number of people assembled in an open place in the middle of the town, selling cattle, cloth, corn, &c. I rode through the midst of them without being much observed, every one taking me for a Moor. In the afternoon I arrived at a small village called Binni, where I agreed with the dooty’s son, for one hundred kowries, to allow me to stay for the night; but when the dooty returned, he insisted that I should instantly leave the place, and if his wife and son had not interceded for me, I must have complied.
August 14.—I continued my path along the riverbank, through a densely populated and well-farmed area. I passed a walled town called Kamalia [35] without stopping, and at noon rode through a large town called Samee, where there was a market and a crowd had gathered in an open area in the center of the town, selling cattle, cloth, corn, etc. I rode through the crowd mostly unnoticed, as everyone took me for a Moor. In the afternoon, I arrived at a small village called Binni, where I made a deal with the dooty’s son for one hundred kowries to let me stay the night; but when the dooty returned, he insisted that I leave immediately, and if his wife and son hadn't intervened on my behalf, I would have had to comply.
August 15.—About nine o’clock I passed a large town called Sai, which very much excited my curiosity. It is completely surrounded by two very deep trenches, at about two hundred yards distant from the walls. On the top of the trenches are a number of square towers, and the whole has the appearance of a regular fortification.
August 15.—Around nine o’clock, I came across a large town called Sai, which really piqued my curiosity. It’s completely surrounded by two very deep ditches, about two hundred yards away from the walls. There are several square towers on top of the ditches, giving it the look of a proper fortification.
About noon I came to the village of Kaimoo, situated upon the bank of the river, and as the corn I had purchased at Sibili was exhausted, I endeavoured to purchase a fresh supply, but was informed that corn was become very scarce all over the country, and though I offered fifty kowries for a small quantity, no person would sell me any. As I was about to depart, however, one of the villagers (who probably mistook me for some Moorish shereef) brought me some as a present, only desiring me to bestow my blessing upon him, which I did in plain English, and he received it with a thousand acknowledgments. Of this present I made my dinner, and it was the third successive day that I had subsisted entirely upon raw corn.
About noon, I arrived at the village of Kaimoo, located by the riverbank. Since the corn I had bought at Sibili was finished, I tried to buy some more but was told that corn was really scarce throughout the country. Even though I offered fifty kowries for a small amount, no one was willing to sell me any. Just as I was about to leave, one of the villagers (who probably mistook me for some Moorish shereef) brought me some as a gift, just asking for me to bless him, which I did in plain English, and he thanked me profusely. I used this gift for my dinner, marking the third consecutive day I had survived entirely on raw corn.
In the evening I arrived at a small village called Song, the surly inhabitants of which would not receive me, nor so much as permit me to enter the gate; but as lions were very numerous in this neighbourhood, and I had frequently, in the course of the day, observed the impression of their feet on the road, I resolved to stay in the vicinity of the village. Having collected some grass for my horse, I accordingly lay down under a tree by the gate. About ten o’clock I heard the hollow roar of a lion at no great distance, and attempted to open the gate, but the people from within told me that no person must attempt to enter the gate without the dooty’s permission. I begged them to inform the dooty that a lion was approaching the village, and I hoped he would allow me to come within the gate. I waited for an answer to this message with great anxiety, for the lion kept prowling round the village, and once advanced so very near me that I heard him rustling among the grass, and climbed the tree for safety. About midnight the dooty, with some of his people, opened the gate, and desired me to come in. They were convinced, they said, that I was not a Moor, for no Moor ever waited any time at the gate of a village without cursing the inhabitants.
In the evening, I arrived at a small village called Song, where the grumpy residents wouldn't let me in or even allow me to enter the gate. Since there were a lot of lions in the area, and I had noticed their footprints on the road throughout the day, I decided to stay near the village. I gathered some grass for my horse and lay down under a tree by the gate. Around ten o’clock, I heard the deep roar of a lion not too far away and tried to open the gate, but the people inside told me that no one could enter without the dooty’s permission. I asked them to let the dooty know that a lion was approaching the village and hoped he would let me in. I anxiously waited for a response because the lion kept prowling around the village and once got so close that I heard it rustling in the grass, prompting me to climb the tree for safety. Around midnight, the dooty and some of his men opened the gate and invited me in. They were convinced, they said, that I wasn’t a Moor, since no Moor would wait at the gate of a village without cursing the residents.
August 16.—About ten o’clock I passed a considerable town, with a mosque, called Jabbee. Here the country begins to rise into hills, and I could see the summits of high mountains to the westward. About noon I stopped at a small village near Yamina, where I purchased some corn, and dried my papers and clothes.
August 16.—Around ten o’clock, I passed a sizable town with a mosque called Jabbee. This is where the land starts to rise into hills, and I could see the peaks of high mountains to the west. Around noon, I stopped at a small village near Yamina, where I bought some corn and dried my papers and clothes.
The town of Yamina at a distance has a very fine appearance. It covers nearly the same extent of ground as Sansanding, but having been plundered by Daisy, king of Kaarta, about four years ago, it has not yet resumed its former prosperity, nearly one-half of the town being nothing but a heap of ruins. However, it is still a considerable place, and is so much frequented by the Moors that I did not think it safe to lodge in it, but in order to satisfy myself respecting its population and extent, I resolved to ride through it, in doing which I observed a great many Moors sitting upon the bentangs, and other places of public resort. Everybody looked at me with astonishment, but as I rode briskly along they had no time to ask questions.
The town of Yamina looks quite impressive from a distance. It covers almost the same area as Sansanding, but after being attacked by Daisy, the king of Kaarta, about four years ago, it hasn’t regained its former prosperity, with almost half of the town in ruins. Still, it’s a significant place, and there are so many Moors around that I felt it wasn’t safe to stay there. To learn more about its population and size, I decided to ride through it. While doing so, I noticed many Moors sitting on the benches and in other public spots. Everyone stared at me in surprise, but since I rode past quickly, they didn’t have time to ask questions.
I arrived in the evening at Farra, a walled village, where, without much difficulty, I procured a lodging for the night.
I arrived in the evening at Farra, a walled village, where, without much trouble, I found a place to stay for the night.
August 17.—Early in the morning I pursued my journey, and at eight o’clock passed a considerable town called Balaba, after which the road quits the plain, and stretches along the side of the hill. I passed in the course of this day the ruins of three towns, the inhabitants of which were all carried away by Daisy, king of Kaarta, on the same day that he took and plundered Yamina. Near one of these ruins I climbed a tamarind-tree, but found the fruit quite green and sour, and the prospect of the country was by no means inviting, for the high grass and bushes seemed completely to obstruct the road, and the low lands were all so flooded by the river, that the Niger had the appearance of an extensive lake. In the evening I arrived at Kanika, where the dooty, who was sitting upon an elephant’s hide at the gate, received me kindly, and gave me for supper some milk and meal, which I considered (as to a person in my situation it really was) a very great luxury.
August 17.—Early in the morning, I continued my journey and at eight o’clock passed through a significant town called Balaba. After that, the road left the plain and ran alongside the hill. Throughout the day, I came across the ruins of three towns, whose residents were all taken away by Daisy, king of Kaarta, on the same day he captured and plundered Yamina. Near one of these ruins, I climbed a tamarind tree but found the fruit to be quite green and sour. The view of the area wasn’t appealing either, as the tall grass and bushes completely blocked the road, and the lowlands were flooded by the river, making the Niger look like a vast lake. In the evening, I arrived at Kanika, where the dooty, sitting on an elephant’s hide at the gate, welcomed me warmly and offered me milk and meal for supper, which I considered (as anyone in my position would) a real luxury.
August 18.—By mistake I took the wrong road, and did not discover my error until I had travelled nearly four miles, when, coming to an eminence, I observed the Niger considerably to the left. Directing my course towards it, I travelled through long grass and bushes with great difficulty until two o’clock in the afternoon, when I came to a comparatively small but very rapid river, which I took at first for a creek, or one of the streams of the Niger. However, after I had examined it with more attention, I was convinced that it was a distinct river, and as the road evidently crossed it (for I could see the pathway on the opposite side), I sat down upon the bank in hopes that some traveller might arrive who would give me the necessary information concerning the fording-place—for the banks were so covered with reeds and bushes that it would have been almost impossible to land on the other side, except at the pathway, which, on account of the rapidity of the stream, it seemed very difficult to reach. No traveller however arriving, and there being a great appearance of rain, I examined the grass and bushes for some way up the bank, and determined upon entering the river considerably above the pathway, in order to reach the other side before the stream had swept me too far down. With this view I fastened my clothes upon the saddle, and was standing up to the neck in water, pulling my horse by the bridle to make him follow me, when a man came accidentally to the place, and seeing me in the water, called to me with great vehemence to come out. The alligators, he said, would devour both me and my horse, if we attempted to swim over. When I had got out, the stranger, who had never before seen a European, seemed wonderfully surprised. He twice put his hand to his mouth, exclaiming, in a low tone of voice, “God preserve me! who is this?” but when he heard me speak the Bambarra tongue, and found that I was going the same way as himself, he promised to assist me in crossing the river, the name of which he said was Frina. He then went a little way along the bank, and called to some person, who answered from the other side. In a short time a canoe with two boys came paddling from among the reeds. These boys agreed for fifty kowries to transport me and my horse over the river, which was effected without much difficulty, and I arrived in the evening at Taffara, a walled town, and soon discovered that the language of the natives was improved from the corrupted dialect of Bambarra to the pure Mandingo.
August 18.—I accidentally took the wrong road and didn’t realize my mistake until I had traveled nearly four miles. When I reached a hill, I saw the Niger River quite a bit to the left. I changed my direction toward it and struggled through tall grass and bushes until two o’clock in the afternoon, when I came to a relatively small but very fast-moving river that I initially thought was a creek or one of the Niger's streams. However, after examining it more closely, I was convinced it was a separate river. Since the road clearly crossed it (I could see the path on the other side), I sat on the bank hoping some traveler would come by to tell me where to ford it—because the banks were so overgrown with reeds and bushes that it would have been nearly impossible to get to the other side except at the path, which seemed very difficult to access due to the stream's speed. When no traveler arrived and the sky looked like it might rain, I searched the grass and bushes for a way upstream and decided to enter the river quite a bit above the pathway to reach the other side before the current carried me too far downstream. With this plan, I secured my clothes to the saddle and was standing neck-deep in water, pulling my horse by the bridle to follow me when a man stumbled onto the scene. Seeing me in the water, he urgently called for me to come out. He warned that alligators would eat both me and my horse if we tried to swim across. Once I got out, the stranger, who had never seen a European before, looked incredibly surprised. He repeatedly covered his mouth and whispered, “God preserve me! Who is this?” But when he heard me speak in Bambarra and realized we were heading the same way, he offered to help me cross the river, which he said was called Frina. He walked a short distance along the bank and called to someone who answered from the other side. Soon, a canoe with two boys paddled through the reeds. They agreed to take me and my horse across for fifty kowries, and they did so without much trouble. I arrived in the evening at Taffara, a walled town, and quickly noticed that the locals spoke a more refined version of Mandingo rather than the corrupted Bambarra dialect.
CHAPTER XVIII.
DESPAIRING THOUGHTS—ARRIVAL AT SIBIDOOLOO.
On my arrival at Taffara I inquired for the dooty, but was informed that he had died a few days before my arrival, and that there was at that moment a meeting of the chief men for electing another, there being some dispute about the succession. It was probably owing to this unsettled state of the town that I experienced such a want of hospitality in it, for though I informed the inhabitants that I should only remain with them for one night, and assured them that Mansong had given me some kowries to pay for my lodging, yet no person invited me to come in, and I was forced to sit alone under the bentang-tree, exposed to the rain and wind of a tornado, which lasted with great violence until midnight. At this time the stranger who had assisted me in crossing the river paid me a visit, and observing that I had not found a lodging, invited me to take part of his supper, which he had brought to the door of his hut; for, being a guest himself, he could not, without his landlord’s consent, invite me to come in. After this I slept upon some wet grass in the corner of a court. My horse fared still worse than myself, the corn I purchased being all expended, and I could not procure a supply.
On my arrival at Taffara, I asked for the dooty, but I was told that he had died just a few days before I got there, and there was a meeting of the local leaders happening to elect a new one since there was some disagreement about who should succeed him. It was likely due to this unsettled situation in the town that I experienced such a lack of hospitality, because even though I told the residents I would only stay for one night and assured them that Mansong had given me some kowries to pay for my accommodation, not a single person invited me inside. I had to sit alone under the bentang tree, exposed to the heavy rain and wind from a severe storm that lasted until midnight. During this time, the stranger who had helped me across the river came to visit and noticed that I hadn’t found a place to stay. He invited me to share his supper, which he had brought to the entrance of his hut; since he was a guest himself, he couldn't invite me inside without his landlord’s permission. After that, I slept on some damp grass in the corner of a courtyard. My horse was even worse off than I was; the corn I had bought was all gone, and I couldn’t find more.
August 20.—I passed the town of Jaba, and stopped a few minutes at a village called Somino, where I begged and obtained some coarse food, which the natives prepare from the husks of corn, and call boo. About two o’clock I came to the village of Sooha, and endeavoured to purchase some corn from the dooty, who was sitting by the gate, but without success. I then requested a little food by way of charity, but was told he had none to spare. Whilst I was examining the countenance of this inhospitable old man, and endeavouring to find out the cause of the sullen discontent which was visible in his eye, he called to a slave who was working in the cornfield at a little distance, and ordered him to bring his hoe along with him. The dooty then told him to dig a hole in the ground, pointing to a spot at no great distance. The slave, with his hoe, began to dig a pit in the earth, and the dooty, who appeared to be a man of very fretful disposition, kept muttering and talking to himself until the pit was almost finished, when he repeatedly pronounced the words “dankatoo” (“good for nothing”)—“jankra lemen” (“a real plague”)—which expressions I thought could be applied to nobody but myself; and as the pit had very much the appearance of a grave, I thought it prudent to mount my horse, and was about to decamp, when the slave, who had before gone into the village, to my surprise returned with the corpse of a boy about nine or ten years of age, quite naked. The negro carried the body by a leg and an arm, and threw it into the pit with a savage indifference which I had never before seen. As he covered the body with earth, the dooty often expressed himself, “naphula attiniata” (“money lost”), whence I concluded that the boy had been one of his slaves.
August 20.—I passed through the town of Jaba and stopped for a few minutes at a village called Somino, where I asked for and received some rough food that the locals make from corn husks, which they call boo. Around two o’clock, I arrived at the village of Sooha and tried to buy some corn from the dooty, who was sitting by the gate, but I was unsuccessful. I then asked for a little food as charity, but he told me he had none to give. While I was observing the face of this unfriendly old man and trying to figure out the reason for the gloomy discontent in his eyes, he called to a slave working in a nearby cornfield and ordered him to bring his hoe. The dooty then instructed him to dig a hole in the ground, pointing to a spot not far away. The slave began to dig a pit in the earth, and the dooty, who seemed to be a very cranky person, kept muttering and talking to himself until the pit was almost done, when he repeatedly said the words “dankatoo” (“good for nothing”)—“jankra lemen” (“a real plague”)—which I thought were directed at me; and since the pit looked very much like a grave, I decided it would be wise to get on my horse and leave. Just as I was about to ride away, the slave, who had gone into the village before, surprisingly returned with the body of a boy about nine or ten years old, completely naked. The slave carried the body by a leg and an arm and threw it into the pit with a brutal indifference I had never witnessed before. As he covered the body with dirt, the dooty repeatedly said, “naphula attiniata” (“money lost”), which made me conclude that the boy had been one of his slaves.
Departing from this shocking scene, I travelled by the side of the river until sunset, when I came to Koolikorro, a considerable town, and a great market for salt. Here I took up my lodging at the house of a Bambarran, who had formerly been the slave of a Moor, and in that character had travelled to Aroan, Towdinni, and many other places in the Great Desert; but turning Mussulman, and his master dying at Jenné, he obtained his freedom and settled at this place, where he carries on a considerable trade in salt, cotton cloth, &c. His knowledge of the world had not lessened that superstitious confidence in saphies and charms which he had imbibed in his earlier years, for when he heard that I was a Christian, he immediately thought of procuring a saphie, and for this purpose brought out his walha, or writing-board, assuring me that he would dress me a supper of rice if I would write him a saphie to protect him from wicked men. The proposal was of too great consequence to me to be refused. I therefore wrote the board full, from top to bottom, on both sides; and my landlord, to be certain of having the whole force of the charm, washed the writing from the board into a calabash with a little water, and having said a few prayers over it, drank this powerful draught; after which, lest a single word should escape, he licked the board until it was quite dry. A saphie-writer was a man of too great consequence to be long concealed; the important information was carried to the dooty, who sent his son with half a sheet of writing-paper, desiring me to write him a naphula saphie (a charm to procure wealth). He brought me, as a present, some meal and milk, and when I had finished the saphie, and read it to him with an audible voice, he seemed highly satisfied with his bargain, and promised to bring me in the morning some milk for my breakfast. When I had finished my supper of rice and salt, I laid myself down upon a bullock’s hide, and slept very quietly until morning, this being the first good meal and refreshing sleep that I had enjoyed for a long time.
Leaving behind that shocking scene, I traveled along the river until sunset, when I arrived at Koolikorro, a significant town and a major salt market. I stayed at the house of a Bambarran, who had once been a slave to a Moor. As a slave, he had traveled to Aroan, Towdinni, and several other places in the Great Desert. After converting to Islam and with his master dying in Jenné, he gained his freedom and settled here, where he runs a substantial salt and cotton cloth trade. His worldly experiences hadn’t wiped out the superstitious belief in amulets and charms he had developed in his youth. So when he learned I was a Christian, he immediately wanted to get an amulet and pulled out his walha, or writing board, telling me he would make me a rice dinner if I would write him an amulet to protect him from evil men. The proposition was too important for me to decline, so I filled the board with writing, from top to bottom, on both sides. My landlord, wanting to ensure he had the full power of the charm, washed the writing off the board into a calabash with a little water. He then said some prayers over it and drank this potent mix. After that, to make sure not a single word was lost, he licked the board until it was completely dry. A saphie writer was someone with enough significance to not stay hidden for long; the word got to the dooty, who sent his son with half a sheet of writing paper, asking me to write him a naphula saphie (a charm for wealth). As a gift, he brought me some meal and milk. Once I finished the amulet and read it out loud to him, he seemed really pleased with the deal and promised to bring me milk for breakfast in the morning. After finishing my rice and salt dinner, I laid down on a bullock's hide and slept very peacefully until morning. This was the first decent meal and restful sleep I had enjoyed in a long time.
August 21.—At daybreak I departed from Koolikorro, and about noon passed the villages of Kayoo and Toolumbo. In the afternoon I arrived at Marraboo, a large town, and, like Koolikorro, famous for its trade in salt. I was conducted to the house of a Kaartan, of the tribe of Jower, by whom I was well received. This man had acquired a considerable property in the slave-trade, and, from his hospitality to strangers, was called, by way of pre-eminence, jatee (the landlord), and his house was a sort of public inn for all travellers. Those who had money were well lodged, for they always made him some return for his kindness, but those who had nothing to give were content to accept whatever he thought proper; and as I could not rank myself among the moneyed men, I was happy to take up my lodging in the same hut with seven poor fellows who had come from Kancaba in a canoe. But our landlord sent us some victuals.
August 21.—At dawn I left Koolikorro, and around noon I passed through the villages of Kayoo and Toolumbo. In the afternoon, I reached Marraboo, a large town, known like Koolikorro for its salt trade. I was welcomed into the home of a Kaartan from the Jower tribe, who received me warmly. This man had made a significant fortune in the slave trade and was known as jatee (the landlord) for his hospitality to strangers; his house functioned as a kind of public inn for travelers. Those who had money received comfortable accommodations, as they always repaid his kindness in some way, but those without any resources accepted whatever he deemed appropriate. Since I couldn't call myself one of the wealthy, I was glad to stay in the same hut as seven other poor souls who had come from Kancaba in a canoe. Fortunately, our landlord provided us with some food.
August 22—One of the landlord’s servants went with me a little way from the town to show me what road to take, but, whether from ignorance or design I know not, he directed me wrong, and I did not discover my mistake until the day was far advanced, when, coming to a deep creek, I had some thoughts of turning back, but as by that means I foresaw that I could not possibly reach Bammakoo before night, I resolved to cross it, and, leading my horse close to the brink, I went behind him and pushed him headlong into the water, and then taking the bridle in my teeth, swam over to the other side. About four o’clock in the afternoon, having altered my course from the river towards the mountains, I came to a small pathway which led to a village called Frookaboo, where I slept.
August 22—One of the landlord’s servants walked with me a bit out of town to show me which road to take, but, whether out of ignorance or by choice, he led me the wrong way. I didn’t realize my mistake until later in the day when I reached a deep creek. I considered turning back, but I knew that if I did, I wouldn’t make it to Bammakoo before nightfall, so I decided to cross it. I brought my horse to the edge, went behind him, and pushed him in the water. Then, with the bridle in my mouth, I swam to the other side. Around four in the afternoon, after changing my direction from the river towards the mountains, I found a small path leading to a village called Frookaboo, where I spent the night.
August 23—Early in the morning I set out for Bammakoo, at which place I arrived about five o’clock in the afternoon. I had heard Bammakoo much talked of as a great market for salt, and I felt rather disappointed to find it only a middling town, not quite so large as Marraboo; however, the smallness of its size is more than compensated by the richness of its inhabitants, for when the Moors bring their salt through Kaarta or Bambarra, they constantly rest a few days at this place, and the negro merchants here, who are well acquainted with the value of salt in different kingdoms, frequently purchase by wholesale, and retail it to great advantage. Here I lodged at the house of a Serawoolli negro, and was visited by a number of Moors. They spoke very good Mandingo, and were more civil to me than their countrymen had been. One of them had travelled to Rio Grande, and spoke very highly of the Christians. He sent me in the evening some boiled rice and milk. I now endeavoured to procure information concerning my route to the westward from a slave merchant who had resided some years on the Gambia. He gave me some imperfect account of the distance, and enumerated the names of a great many places that lay in the way, but withal told me that the road was impassable at this season of the year: he was even afraid, he said, that I should find great difficulty in proceeding any farther; as the road crossed the Joliba at a town about half a day’s journey to the westward of Bammakoo, and there being no canoes at that place large enough to receive my horse, I could not possibly get him over for some months to come. This was an obstruction of a very serious nature; but as I had no money to maintain myself even for a few days, I resolved to push on, and if I could not convey my horse across the river, to abandon him, and swim over myself. In thoughts of this nature I passed the night, and in the morning consulted with my landlord how I should surmount the present difficulty. He informed me that one road still remained, which was indeed very rocky, and scarcely passable for horses, but that if I had a proper guide over the hills to a town called Sibidooloo, he had no doubt but with patience and caution I might travel forwards through Manding. I immediately applied to the dooty, and was informed that a jilli kea (singing man) was about to depart for Sibidooloo, and would show me the road over the hills. With this man, who undertook to be my conductor, I travelled up a rocky glen about two miles, when we came to a small village, and here my musical fellow-traveller found out that he had brought me the wrong road. He told me that the horse-road lay on the other side of the hill, and throwing his drum on his back, mounted up the rocks where, indeed, no horse could follow him, leaving me to admire his agility, and trace out a road for myself. As I found it impossible to proceed, I rode back to the level ground, and directing my course to the eastward, came about noon to another glen, and discovered a path on which I observed the marks of horses’ feet. Following this path I came in a short time to some shepherds’ huts, where I was informed that I was in the right road, but that I could not possibly reach Sibidooloo before night.
August 23—Early in the morning, I set off for Bammakoo, arriving around five o’clock in the afternoon. I had heard a lot about Bammakoo being a major salt market, so I was a bit disappointed to find it just a small town, not quite as big as Marraboo. However, the small town size is more than made up for by the wealth of its residents, as the Moors stop here for a few days when bringing their salt through Kaarta or Bambarra, and the local merchants, who know the value of salt across different kingdoms, often buy in bulk and sell it at a good profit. I stayed at the home of a Serawoolli man and was visited by several Moors. They spoke very good Mandingo and were more polite to me than their fellow countrymen had been. One had traveled to Rio Grande and spoke highly of the Christians. He sent me some boiled rice and milk in the evening. I then tried to gather information about my route westward from a slave trader who had lived for several years on the Gambia. He provided me with an incomplete account of the distances and listed many places along the way, but also said that the road was impassable at this time of year. He was concerned that I would have great difficulty moving forward since the road crossed the Joliba at a town about half a day's journey west of Bammakoo, and there were no canoes large enough to carry my horse. He thought I wouldn’t be able to get him across for some months. This was a serious obstacle; however, since I had no money to support myself for even a few days, I decided to keep going, even if it meant leaving my horse behind and swimming across myself. I spent the night thinking about this, and in the morning I spoke with my landlord about how to overcome the current challenge. He told me that there was still one road left, which was indeed very rocky and barely passable for horses, but if I had a proper guide over the hills to a town called Sibidooloo, he was confident that with patience and care, I could get through Manding. I immediately asked the dooty and learned that a jilli kea (singing man) was about to leave for Sibidooloo and would show me the way over the hills. Accompanied by this man, my guide, I traveled up a rocky glen for about two miles until we reached a small village, where my musical travel companion realized he had taken me the wrong way. He told me that the horse path was on the other side of the hill, tossed his drum on his back, and climbed up the rocks where no horse could follow him, leaving me to admire his agility and find a path for myself. Finding it impossible to proceed, I rode back to the flat ground and headed eastward, reaching another glen around noon, where I found a path marked with horses' tracks. Following this path, I soon came across some shepherds’ huts, where I was told that I was on the right road but wouldn’t reach Sibidooloo before nightfall.
A little before sunset I descended on the north-west side of this ridge of hills, and as I was looking about for a convenient tree under which to pass the night (for I had no hopes of reaching any town) I descended into a delightful valley, and soon afterwards arrived at a romantic village called Kooma. This village is surrounded by a high wall, and is the sole property of a Mandingo merchant, who fled hither with his family during a former war. The adjacent fields yield him plenty of corn, his cattle roam at large in the valley, and the rocky hills secure him from the depredations of war. In this obscure retreat he is seldom visited by strangers, but whenever this happens he makes the weary traveller welcome. I soon found myself surrounded by a circle of the harmless villagers. They asked a thousand questions about my country, and, in return for my information, brought corn and milk for myself, and grass for my horse, kindled a fire in the hut where I was to sleep, and appeared very anxious to serve me.
A little before sunset, I went down the northwest side of this ridge of hills, and as I was looking for a convenient tree to spend the night under (since I didn’t expect to reach any town), I found myself in a lovely valley and soon arrived at a charming village called Kooma. This village is surrounded by a high wall and is owned by a Mandingo merchant, who came here with his family during a past war. The surrounding fields provide him with plenty of corn, his cattle roam freely in the valley, and the rocky hills protect him from the ravages of war. In this quiet spot, he rarely sees strangers, but when he does, he welcomes the weary traveler warmly. I quickly found myself surrounded by a group of friendly villagers. They asked a ton of questions about my country, and in exchange for my answers, they brought corn and milk for me, grass for my horse, lit a fire in the hut where I would sleep, and seemed eager to help me.
August 25.—I departed from Kooma, accompanied by two shepherds who were going towards Sibidooloo. The road was very steep and rocky, and as my horse had hurt his feet much in coming from Bammakoo, he travelled slowly and with great difficulty, for in many places the ascent was so sharp, and the declivities so great, that if he had made one false step he must inevitably have been dashed to pieces. The shepherds being anxious to proceed, gave themselves little trouble about me or my horse, and kept walking on at a considerable distance. It was about eleven o’clock, as I stopped to drink a little water at a rivulet (my companions being near a quarter of a mile before me), that I heard some people calling to each other, and presently a loud screaming, as from a person in great distress. I immediately conjectured that a lion had taken one of the shepherds, and mounted my horse to have a better view of what had happened. The noise, however, ceased, and I rode slowly towards the place from whence I thought it had proceeded, calling out, but without receiving any answer. In a little time, however, I perceived one of the shepherds lying among the long grass near the road, and though I could see no blood upon him, I concluded he was dead. But when I came close to him, he whispered to me to stop, telling me that a party of armed men had seized upon his companion, and shot two arrows at himself as he was making his escape. I stopped to consider what course to take, and looking round, saw at a little distance a man sitting upon the stump of a tree. I distinguished also the heads of six or seven more, sitting among the grass, with muskets in their hands. I had now no hopes of escaping, and therefore determined to ride forward towards them. As I approached them, I was in hopes they were elephant-hunters; and by way of opening the conversation inquired if they had shot anything, but without returning an answer one of them ordered me to dismount, and then, as if recollecting himself, waved with his hand for me to proceed. I accordingly rode past, and had with some difficulty crossed a deep rivulet, when I heard somebody holloa, and looking behind, saw those I had taken for elephant-hunters running after me, and calling out to me to turn back. I stopped until they were all come up, when they informed me that the king of the Foulahs had sent them on purpose to bring me, my horse, and everything that belonged to me, to Fooladoo, and that therefore I must turn back and go along with them. Without hesitating a moment, I turned round and followed them, and we travelled together nearly a quarter of a mile without exchanging a word; when, coming to a dark place in a wood, one of them said in the Mandingo language, “This place will do,” and immediately snatched my hat from my head. Though I was by no means free of apprehension, yet I resolved to show as few signs of fear as possible, and therefore told them that unless my hat was returned to me I should proceed no farther. But before I had time to receive an answer another drew his knife, and seizing upon a metal button which remained upon my waistcoat, cut it off and put it into his pocket. Their intentions were obvious, and I thought that the easier they were permitted to rob me of everything, the less I had to fear. I therefore allowed them to search my pockets without resistance, and examine every part of my apparel, which they did with the most scrupulous exactness. But observing that I had one waistcoat under another, they insisted that I should cast them both off; and at last, to make sure work, they stripped me quite naked. Even my half-boots (though the sole of one of them was tied on to my foot with a broken bridle rein) were minutely inspected. Whilst they were examining the plunder, I begged them, with great earnestness, to return my pocket-compass; but when I pointed it out to them as it was lying on the ground, one of the banditti, thinking I was about to take it up, cocked his musket, and swore that he would lay me dead upon the spot if I presumed to put my hand upon it. After this, some of them went away with my horse, and the remainder stood considering whether they should leave me quite naked, or allow me something to shelter me from the sun. Humanity at last prevailed; they returned me the worst of the two shirts and a pair of trousers; and, as they went away, one of them threw back my hat, in the crown of which I kept my memorandums, and this was probably the reason they did not wish to keep it. After they were gone, I sat for some time looking round me with amazement and terror. Whichever way I turned, nothing appeared but danger and difficulty. I saw myself in the midst of a vast wilderness, in the depth of the rainy season—naked and alone, surrounded by savage animals, and men still more savage. I was five hundred miles from the nearest European settlement. All these circumstances crowded at once on my recollection, and I confess that my spirits began to fail me. I considered my fate as certain, and that I had no alternative but to lie down and perish. The influence of religion, however, aided and supported me. I reflected that no human prudence or foresight could possibly have averted my present sufferings. I was indeed a stranger in a strange land, yet I was still under the protecting eye of that Providence who has condescended to call Himself the stranger’s Friend. At this moment, painful as my reflections were, the extraordinary beauty of a small moss in fructification irresistibly caught my eye. I mention this to show from what trifling circumstances the mind will sometimes derive consolation; for though the whole plant was not larger than the top of one of my fingers, I could not contemplate the delicate conformation of its roots, leaves, and capsula without admiration. Can that Being, thought I, who planted, watered, and brought to perfection, in this obscure part of the world, a thing which appears of so small importance, look with unconcern upon the situation and sufferings of creatures formed after His own image? Surely not! Reflections like these would not allow me to despair. I started up, and, disregarding both hunger and fatigue, travelled forwards, assured that relief was at hand; and I was not disappointed. In a short time I came to a small village, at the entrance of which I overtook the two shepherds who had come with me from Kooma. They were much surprised to see me; for they said they never doubted that the Foulahs, when they had robbed, had murdered me. Departing from this village, we travelled over several rocky ridges, and at sunset arrived at Sibidooloo, the frontier town of the kingdom of Manding.
August 25.—I left Kooma, accompanied by two shepherds heading to Sibidooloo. The road was very steep and rocky, and since my horse had hurt his feet a lot coming from Bammakoo, he moved slowly and with great difficulty. In many spots, the incline was so sharp and the descents so steep that if he made one wrong step, he would have definitely fallen and gotten injured. The shepherds were eager to move on and paid little attention to me or my horse, keeping quite a distance ahead. It was around eleven o’clock when I stopped to drink some water from a small stream (with my companions nearly a quarter of a mile ahead) that I heard people calling out to each other, followed by a loud scream, as if someone were in terrible distress. I immediately guessed that a lion had attacked one of the shepherds and got on my horse to see what was happening. However, the noise stopped, and I rode slowly toward where I thought it came from, calling out but not getting any response. After a little while, I saw one of the shepherds lying in the tall grass near the road, and although there was no blood on him, I assumed he was dead. But when I got closer, he whispered for me to stop, telling me that a group of armed men had captured his companion and shot two arrows at him while he was trying to escape. I paused to think about what to do, and looking around, I noticed a man sitting on the stump of a tree not far away. I also saw the heads of six or seven others sitting in the grass, holding muskets. I lost all hope of escaping, so I decided to ride closer to them. As I got near, I hoped they were elephant hunters, so I casually asked if they had shot anything, but without answering, one of them ordered me to get off my horse, and then, seeming to change his mind, waved for me to keep going. I rode past them and, after some struggle, crossed a deep stream when I heard someone shout, and looking back, I saw those I took for elephant hunters running after me, calling out for me to turn back. I stopped until they all caught up with me, and they told me that the king of the Foulahs had sent them to bring me, my horse, and everything I owned to Fooladoo, so I had to turn back and go with them. Without hesitating, I turned around and followed them, and we traveled nearly a quarter of a mile without saying a word; when we reached a dark spot in the woods, one of them said in Mandingo, “This place will do,” and immediately snatched my hat off my head. Though I was definitely scared, I decided to show as little fear as possible, so I told them that unless my hat was returned, I wouldn’t go any further. But before I could get an answer, another one drew his knife, seized a metal button that was still on my waistcoat, cut it off, and pocketed it. Their intentions were clear, and I thought that if I let them rob me of everything easily, I would have less to worry about. I let them search my pockets without resisting and examine every part of my clothing, which they did very thoroughly. But when they noticed that I had one waistcoat over another, they insisted that I take both off; eventually, to ensure they got everything, they stripped me completely naked. Even my half-boots (though the sole of one was tied to my foot with a broken bridle rein) were examined closely. While they were going through my things, I earnestly asked them to give me back my pocket compass; but when I pointed it out lying on the ground, one of the bandits, thinking I was about to grab it, cocked his musket and yelled that he would shoot me on the spot if I dared to touch it. After this, some of them took my horse, and the rest debated whether to leave me completely naked or give me something to shield me from the sun. Ultimately, they chose kindness; they gave me the worst of the two shirts and a pair of trousers, and as they left, one of them tossed my hat back to me—likely because I kept my notes in the crown, which was probably why they didn’t want to keep it. After they were gone, I sat there for a while, feeling a mix of amazement and fear. No matter where I looked, I saw nothing but threat and difficulty. I found myself in the middle of a vast wilderness during the rainy season—naked and alone, surrounded by fierce animals and even fiercer men. I was five hundred miles from the nearest European settlement. All these thoughts rushed into my mind, and I have to admit that I started to lose hope. I thought my fate was sealed, and I had no choice but to lie down and die. However, my faith helped me through this tough time. I reflected on how no human planning or foresight could have possibly prevented the suffering I was now enduring. I was truly a stranger in an unfamiliar land, yet I was still under the watchful care of that Providence who calls Himself the friend of strangers. In that moment, despite my painful thoughts, the incredible beauty of a tiny moss sprouting nearby caught my eye. I mention this to illustrate how from the smallest things, the mind can sometimes find comfort; because even though the whole plant was no bigger than the tip of my finger, I couldn't help but admire the delicate structure of its roots, leaves, and capsule. Can that Being, I thought, who planted, watered, and nurtured something so seemingly insignificant in this obscure corner of the world, look on without concern for the situation and suffering of beings made in His image? Surely not! Thoughts like these kept me from falling into despair. I stood up, disregarding hunger and exhaustion, and moved forward, confident that help was on the way; and I was right. Soon, I stumbled upon a small village, where I caught up with the two shepherds who had come with me from Kooma. They were shocked to see me, saying they had assumed the Foulahs had killed me after robbing me. Leaving this village, we crossed several rocky ridges and reached Sibidooloo, the frontier town of the Manding kingdom at sunset.
CHAPTER XIX.
ILLNESS AT KAMALIA AND THE KINDNESS OF THE LOCALS.
The town of Sibidooloo is situated in a fertile valley, surrounded with high, rocky hills. It is scarcely accessible for horses, and during the frequent wars between the Bambarrans, Foulahs, and Mandingoes has never once been plundered by an enemy. When I entered the town, the people gathered round me and followed me into the baloon, where I was presented to the dooty or chief man, who is here called mansa, which usually signifies king. Nevertheless, it appeared to me that the government of Manding was a sort of republic, or rather an oligarchy—every town having a particular mansa, and the chief power of the state, in the last resort, being lodged in the assembly of the whole body. I related to the mansa the circumstances of my having been robbed of my horse and apparel; and my story was confirmed by the two shepherds. He continued smoking his pipe all the time I was speaking; but I had no sooner finished, than, taking his pipe from his mouth, and tossing up the sleeve of his cloak with an indignant air—“Sit down,” said he; “you shall have everything restored to you; I have sworn it:”—and then turning to an attendant, “Give the white man,” said he, “a draught of water; and with the first light of the morning go over the hills, and inform the dooty of Bammakoo that a poor white man, the king of Bambarra’s stranger, has been robbed by the king of Fooladoo’s people.”
The town of Sibidooloo is located in a fertile valley, surrounded by high, rocky hills. It's difficult to reach on horseback, and during the frequent wars between the Bambarrans, Foulahs, and Mandingoes, it has never been looted by an enemy. When I entered the town, the people gathered around me and followed me into the baloon, where I was introduced to the dooty, or chief, who is called mansa here, which usually means king. However, it seemed to me that the government of Manding resembled a kind of republic, or more accurately, an oligarchy—each town having its own mansa, and the ultimate power of the state resting with the assembly of the entire body. I told the mansa about how I had been robbed of my horse and belongings; my story was backed up by the two shepherds. He kept smoking his pipe while I spoke, but as soon as I finished, he took the pipe from his mouth and, throwing back the sleeve of his cloak with a look of indignation, said, “Sit down. You will get everything back; I swear it.” Then turning to an aide, he instructed, “Bring the white man a drink of water; and at first light tomorrow, go over the hills and inform the dooty of Bammakoo that a poor white man, a stranger of the king of Bambarra, has been robbed by the king of Fooladoo's people.”
I little expected, in my forlorn condition, to meet with a man who could thus feel for my sufferings. I heartily thanked the mansa for his kindness, and accepted his invitation to remain with him until the return of the messenger. I was conducted into a hut and had some victuals sent me, but the crowd of people which assembled to see me—all of whom commiserated my misfortunes, and vented imprecations against the Foulahs—prevented me from sleeping until past midnight. Two days I remained without hearing any intelligence of my horse or clothes; and as there was at this time a great scarcity of provisions, approaching even to famine, all over this part of the country, I was unwilling to trespass any farther on the mansa’s generosity, and begged permission to depart to the next village. Finding me very anxious to proceed, he told me that I might go as far as a town called Wonda, where he hoped I would remain a few days until I heard some account of my horse, etc.
I never expected, in my sad state, to meet someone who could feel for my suffering. I sincerely thanked the mansa for his kindness and accepted his offer to stay with him until the messenger returned. I was led into a hut and given some food, but the crowd that gathered to see me—everyone who sympathized with my misfortunes and cursed the Foulahs—kept me from sleeping until after midnight. I spent two days without any news about my horse or clothes, and since there was a significant shortage of food, nearly a famine, in this part of the country, I didn’t want to impose any further on the mansa’s generosity and asked for permission to leave for the next village. Seeing how eager I was to continue, he said I could go as far as a town called Wonda, where he hoped I would stay for a few days until I heard some news about my horse, etc.
I departed accordingly on the next morning, the 28th, and stopped at some small villages for refreshment. I was presented at one of them with a dish which I had never before seen. It was composed of the blossoms or antheræ of the maize, stewed in milk and water. It is eaten only in time of great scarcity. On the 30th, about noon, I arrived at Wonda, a small town with a mosque, and surrounded by a high wall. The mansa, who was a Mohammedan, acted in two capacities—as chief magistrate of the town, and schoolmaster to the children. He kept his school in an open shed, where I was desired to take up my lodging until some account should arrive from Sibidooloo concerning my horse and clothes; for though the horse was of little use to me, yet the few clothes were essential, The little raiment upon me could neither protect me from the sun by day, nor the dews and mosquitoes by night: indeed, my shirt was not only worn thin like a piece of muslin, but withal so very dirty that I was happy to embrace an opportunity of washing it, which having done, and spread it upon a bush, I sat down naked in the shade until it was dry.
I set off the next morning, the 28th, and stopped at some small villages for a break. In one of them, I was served a dish I had never seen before. It was made of the cornflowers, stewed in milk and water. It’s only eaten during times of great scarcity. On the 30th, around noon, I arrived in Wonda, a small town with a mosque, surrounded by a high wall. The mansa, who was a Muslim, served as both the town's chief magistrate and the children's teacher. He held his classes in an open shed, where I was asked to stay until I received news from Sibidooloo about my horse and clothes. Even though the horse wasn’t much help to me, I really needed my few clothes. The little bit I was wearing couldn’t protect me from the sun during the day or the dew and mosquitoes at night. In fact, my shirt was so thin it was like a piece of muslin, and it was so dirty that I was glad for the chance to wash it. After washing it, I spread it on a bush and sat down naked in the shade until it dried.
Ever since the commencement of the rainy season my health had been greatly on the decline. I had often been affected with slight paroxysms of fever; and from the time of leaving Bammakoo the symptoms had considerably increased. As I was sitting in the manner described, the fever returned with such violence that it very much alarmed me; the more so as I had no medicine to stop its progress, nor any hope of obtaining that care and attention which my situation required.
Ever since the rainy season started, my health had been getting worse. I frequently experienced mild fever episodes, and since leaving Bammakoo, the symptoms had significantly worsened. While I was sitting as described, the fever hit me so hard that it really scared me—especially because I had no medicine to stop it or any hope of getting the care and attention I needed.
I remained at Wonda nine days, during which time I experienced the regular return of the fever every day. And though I endeavoured as much as possible to conceal my distress from my landlord, and frequently lay down the whole day out of his sight, in a field of corn—conscious how burdensome I was to him and his family in a time of such great scarcity—yet I found that he was apprised of my situation; and one morning, as I feigned to be asleep by the fire, he observed to his wife that they were likely to find me a very troublesome and chargeable guest; for that, in my present sickly state, they should be obliged, for the sake of their good name, to maintain me until I recovered or died.
I stayed in Wonda for nine days, during which I had a fever that came back every day. Even though I tried my best to hide my suffering from my landlord and often lay in a cornfield all day to stay out of sight—aware of how much of a burden I was to him and his family during such a difficult time—I realized he knew about my condition. One morning, while I pretended to be asleep by the fire, I heard him tell his wife that I was likely to be a troublesome and expensive guest; he said that, given my current sick state, they would have to take care of me until I either got better or passed away, all for the sake of their reputation.
The scarcity of provisions was certainly felt at this time most severely by the poor people, as the following circumstance most painfully convinced me:—Every evening during my stay I observed five or six women come to the mansa’s house, and receive each of them a certain quantity of corn. As I knew how valuable this article was at this juncture, I inquired of the mansa whether he maintained these poor women from pure bounty, or expected a return when the harvest should be gathered in. “Observe that boy,” said he (pointing to a fine child about five years of age); “his mother has sold him to me for forty days’ provision for herself and the rest of her family. I have bought another boy in the same manner.” Good God! thought I, what must a mother suffer before she sells her own child! I could not get this melancholy subject out of my mind; and the next night, when the women returned for their allowance, I desired the boy to point out to me his mother, which he did. She was much emaciated, but had nothing cruel or savage in her countenance; and when she had received her corn, she came and talked to her son with as much cheerfulness as if he had still been under her care.
The shortage of food was definitely hitting the poor the hardest during this time, as I painfully realized from the following situation:—Every evening during my stay, I saw five or six women come to the mansa’s house to receive a certain amount of corn each. Knowing how critical this food was at that moment, I asked the mansa whether he was providing for these women out of pure generosity or if he expected something in return when the harvest came in. “Look at that boy,” he said (pointing to a healthy child about five years old); “his mother has sold him to me for forty days’ worth of food for herself and the rest of her family. I’ve bought another boy the same way.” Good God! I thought, what must a mother endure to sell her own child! I couldn’t shake this somber thought, and the next night, when the women came back for their food, I asked the boy to show me his mother, which he did. She was very thin but didn’t appear cruel or savage; and when she received her corn, she spoke to her son with as much cheerfulness as if he were still in her care.
September 6.—Two people arrived from Sibidooloo, bringing with them my horse and clothes; but I found that my pocket-compass was broken to pieces. This was a great loss, which I could not repair.
September 6.—Two people came from Sibidooloo, bringing my horse and clothes; however, I discovered that my pocket compass was shattered. This was a significant loss that I couldn't fix.
September 7.—As my horse was grazing near the brink of a well the ground gave way and he fell in. The well was about ten feet in diameter, and so very deep that when I saw my horse snorting in the water I thought it was impossible to save him. The inhabitants of the village, however, immediately assembled, and having tied together a number of withes, [58] they lowered a man down into the well, who fastened those withes round the body of the horse; and the people, having first drawn up the man, took hold of the withes and, to my surprise, pulled the horse out with the greatest facility. The poor animal was now reduced to a mere skeleton, and the roads were scarcely passable, being either very rocky, or else full of mud and water. I therefore found it impracticable to travel with him any farther, and was happy to leave him in the hands of one who, I thought, would take care of him. I accordingly presented him to my landlord, and desired him to send my saddle and bridle as a present to the mansa of Sibidooloo, being the only return I could make him for having taken so much trouble in procuring my horse and clothes.
September 7.—While my horse was grazing near the edge of a well, the ground collapsed, and he fell in. The well was about ten feet across and so deep that when I saw my horse snorting in the water, I thought it was impossible to rescue him. However, the villagers quickly gathered, and after tying together several branches, [58] they lowered a man into the well, who secured the branches around the horse's body. They first pulled up the man and then, to my surprise, were able to lift the horse out very easily. The poor creature was now nothing but skin and bones, and the roads were hardly passable, being either very rocky or muddy and wet. So, I found it impossible to continue traveling with him, and I was relieved to leave him with someone I thought would take care of him. I presented him to my landlord and asked him to send my saddle and bridle as a gift to the mansa of Sibidooloo, as that was the only way I could repay him for all the trouble he went through to help me get my horse and clothes.
I now thought it necessary, sick as I was, to take leave of my hospitable landlord. On the morning of September 8th, when I was about to depart, he presented me with his spear, as a token of remembrance, and a leather bag to contain my clothes. Having converted my half-boots into sandals, I travelled with more ease, and slept that night at a village called Ballanti. On the 9th I reached Nemacoo; but the mansa of the village thought fit to make me sup upon the chameleon’s dish. By way of apology, however, he assured me the next morning that the scarcity of corn was such that he could not possibly allow me any. I could not accuse him of unkindness, as all the people actually appeared to be starving.
I now thought it was necessary, as sick as I was, to say goodbye to my generous landlord. On the morning of September 8th, when I was about to leave, he gave me his spear as a keepsake and a leather bag for my clothes. After turning my half-boots into sandals, I traveled more comfortably and slept that night in a village called Ballanti. On the 9th, I reached Nemacoo; however, the village chief decided to make me eat the chameleon’s dish. As an apology, he assured me the next morning that the shortage of corn was so great that he couldn’t possibly give me any. I couldn’t accuse him of being unkind, as everyone there actually seemed to be starving.
September 10.—It rained hard all day, and the people kept themselves in their huts. In the afternoon I was visited by a negro, named Modi Lemina Taura, a great trader, who, suspecting my distress, brought me some victuals, and promised to conduct me to his own house at Kinyeto the day following.
September 10.—It rained heavily all day, and everyone stayed inside their huts. In the afternoon, I was visited by a man named Modi Lemina Taura, a prominent trader. Noticing my troubles, he brought me some food and offered to take me to his home in Kinyeto the next day.
September 11.—I departed from Nemacoo, and arrived at Kinyeto in the evening; but having hurt my ankle in the way, it swelled and inflamed so much that I could neither walk nor set my foot to the ground the next day without great pain. My landlord, observing this, kindly invited me to stop with him a few days, and I accordingly remained at his house until the 14th, by which time I felt much relieved, and could walk with the help of a staff. I now set out, thanking my landlord for his great care and attention; and being accompanied by a young man who was travelling the same way, I proceeded for Jerijang, a beautiful and well-cultivated district, the mansa of which is reckoned the most powerful chief of any in Manding.
September 11.—I left Nemacoo and reached Kinyeto in the evening; however, I hurt my ankle along the way, and it swelled and inflamed so much that I couldn’t walk or even put my foot on the ground the next day without a lot of pain. My landlord, noticing this, kindly invited me to stay with him for a few days, so I stayed at his house until the 14th, by which time I felt much better and could walk with the help of a staff. I left, thanking my landlord for his great care and attention, and since I was accompanied by a young man traveling the same route, we headed for Jerijang, a beautiful and well-cultivated area, whose mansa is considered the most powerful chief of all in Manding.
On the 15th I reached Dosita, a large town, where I stayed one day on account of the rain; but I continued very sickly, and was slightly delirious in the night. On the 17th I set out for Mansia, a considerable town, where small quantities of gold are collected. The road led over a high, rocky hill, and my strength and spirits were so much exhausted that before I could reach the top of the hill I was forced to lie down three times, being very faint and sickly. I reached Mansia in the afternoon. The mansa of this town had the character of being very inhospitable; he, however, sent me a little corn for my supper, but demanded something in return; and when I assured him that I had nothing of value in my possession, he told me (as if in jest) that my white skin should not defend me if I told him lies. He then showed me the hut wherein I was to sleep, but took away my spear, saying that it should be returned to me in the morning. This trifling circumstance, when joined to the character I had heard of the man, made me rather suspicious of him, and I privately desired one of the inhabitants of the place, who had a bow and a quiver, to sleep in the same hut with me. About midnight I heard somebody approach the door, and, observing the moonlight strike suddenly into the hut, I started up and saw a man stepping cautiously over the threshold. I immediately snatched up the negro’s bow and quiver, the rattling of which made the man withdraw; and my companion, looking out, assured me that it was the mansa himself, and advised me to keep awake until the morning. I closed the door, and placed a large piece of wood behind it, and was wondering at this unexpected visit, when somebody pressed so hard against the door that the negro could scarcely keep it shut; but when I called to him to open the door, the intruder ran off as before.
On the 15th, I arrived in Dosita, a large town, where I stayed for a day because of the rain; however, I continued to feel very ill and was slightly delirious during the night. On the 17th, I set out for Mansia, a significant town where small amounts of gold are gathered. The road went over a high, rocky hill, and I was so exhausted that I had to lie down three times before I could reach the top, feeling very faint and sick. I got to Mansia in the afternoon. The mansa of this town was known for being quite unfriendly; nonetheless, he sent me some corn for my supper but asked for something in return. When I told him I had nothing valuable, he jokingly mentioned that my white skin wouldn’t protect me if I lied to him. He then showed me the hut where I was to sleep but took my spear, promising to return it in the morning. This minor incident, combined with what I had heard about him, made me a little wary, so I discreetly asked one of the locals, who had a bow and quiver, to sleep in the same hut with me. Around midnight, I heard someone approach the door, and as the moonlight suddenly filled the hut, I jumped up and saw a man cautiously stepping over the threshold. I quickly grabbed the local's bow and quiver, which rattled and caused the man to retreat. My companion, peeking out, confirmed it was the mansa himself and suggested I stay awake until morning. I closed the door and propped a large piece of wood against it, pondering this unexpected visit when someone pressed hard against the door, almost forcing it open. But when I called out to my companion to open the door, the intruder ran off like before.
September 16.—As soon as it was light the negro, at my request, went to the mansa’s house and brought away my spear. He told me that the mansa was asleep, and lest this inhospitable chief should devise means to detain me, he advised me to set out before he was awake, which I immediately did, and about two o’clock reached Kamalia, a small town situated at the bottom of some rocky hills, where the inhabitants collect gold in considerable quantities.
September 16.—As soon as it got light, the guy I asked to help me went to the mansa’s house and brought back my spear. He told me that the mansa was still asleep, and to avoid any chance of this unfriendly chief trying to keep me from leaving, he suggested I leave before he woke up. I took his advice and left right away, and by around two o’clock, I arrived at Kamalia, a small town down in some rocky hills, where the locals collect a good amount of gold.
On my arrival at Kamalia I was conducted to the house of a bushreen named Karfa Taura, the brother of him to whose hospitality I was indebted at Kinyeto. He was collecting a coffle of slaves, with a view to sell them to the Europeans on the Gambia as soon as the rains should be over. I found him sitting in his baloon, surrounded by several slatees who proposed to join the coffle. He was reading to them from an Arabic book, and inquired with a smile if I understood it. Being answered in the negative, he desired one of the slatees to fetch the little curious book which had been brought from the west country. On opening this small volume I was surprised and delighted to find it our Book of Common Prayer, and Karfa expressed great joy to hear that I could read it; for some of the slatees, who had seen the Europeans upon the coast, observing the colour of my skin (which was now become very yellow from sickness), my long beard, ragged clothes, and extreme poverty, were unwilling to admit that I was a white man, and told Karfa that they suspected I was some Arab in disguise. Karfa, however, perceiving that I could read this book, had no doubt concerning me, and kindly promised me every assistance in his power. At the same time he informed me that it was impossible to cross the Jallonka wilderness for many months yet to come, as no less than eight rapid rivers, he said, lay in the way. He added that he intended to set out himself for Gambia as soon as the rivers were fordable and the grass burnt, and advised me to stay and accompany him. He remarked that when a caravan of the natives could not travel through the country it was idle for a single white man to attempt it. I readily admitted that such an attempt was an act of rashness, but I assured him that I had no alternative, for, having no money to support myself, I must either beg my subsistence by travelling from place to place, or perish for want. Karfa now looked at me with great earnestness, and inquired if I could eat the common victuals of the country, assuring me he had never before seen a white man. He added that if I would remain with him until the rains were over, he would give me plenty of victuals in the meantime, and a hut to sleep in; and that after he had conducted me in safety to the Gambia, I might then make him what return I thought proper. I asked him if the value of one prime slave would satisfy him. He answered in the affirmative, and immediately ordered one of the huts to be swept for my accommodation. Thus was I delivered, by the friendly care of this benevolent negro, from a situation truly deplorable. Distress and famine pressed hard upon me. I had before me the gloomy wilds of Jallonkadoo, where the traveller sees no habitation for five successive days. I had observed at a distance the rapid course of the river Kokoro. I had almost marked out the place where I was doomed, I thought, to perish, when this friendly negro stretched out his hospitable hand for my relief.
Upon arriving in Kamalia, I was taken to the home of a bushreen named Karfa Taura, the brother of the man who had offered me hospitality in Kinyeto. He was gathering a group of slaves to sell to Europeans in the Gambia as soon as the rainy season ended. I found him sitting in his baloon, surrounded by several slatees who wanted to join the group. He was reading to them from an Arabic book and smiled as he asked if I understood it. When I said no, he asked one of the slatees to bring a small, interesting book that had come from the west. When he opened the book, I was surprised and delighted to discover it was our Book of Common Prayer, and Karfa was thrilled to learn that I could read it. Some of the slatees had seen Europeans on the coast and, noticing my skin color (which had turned very yellow from illness), long beard, tattered clothes, and extreme poverty, were hesitant to acknowledge me as a white man and suggested to Karfa that I might be an Arab in disguise. However, Karfa, seeing that I could read the book, had no doubt about who I was and kindly offered me any help he could provide. He also informed me that crossing the Jallonka wilderness would be impossible for several more months since eight fast rivers lay in the way. He mentioned that he intended to set out to Gambia as soon as the rivers were crossable and the grass burned, advising me to stay and travel with him. He pointed out that if a caravan of locals couldn’t travel through the region, it would be pointless for a single white man to try. I readily agreed that such an attempt would be reckless, but explained that I had no choice; without money to support myself, I had to choose between begging my way through or dying from starvation. Karfa looked at me earnestly and asked if I could eat the local food, assuring me that he had never seen a white man before. He added that if I stayed with him until the rains stopped, he would provide me with plenty of food and a hut to sleep in, and that once he safely took me to the Gambia, I could repay him however I saw fit. I asked if one prime slave would be enough payment. He said yes and immediately ordered one of the huts to be cleaned for my stay. Thus, thanks to the kind care of this generous man, I was rescued from a truly dire situation. I was struggling with distress and hunger, with the gloomy, desolate expanse of Jallonkadoo looming ahead, where travelers go five days without seeing a single house. I had noticed the swift flow of the river Kokoro from a distance and had nearly identified the spot where I believed I would sadly perish when this hospitable man reached out to help me.
In the hut which was appropriated for me I was provided with a mat to sleep on, an earthen jar for holding water, and a small calabash to drink out of; and Karfa sent me, from his own dwelling, two meals a day, and ordered his slaves to supply me with firewood and water. But I found that neither the kindness of Karfa nor any sort of accommodation could put a stop to the fever which weakened me, and which became every day more alarming. I endeavoured as much as possible to conceal my distress; but on the third day after my arrival, as I was going with Karfa to visit some of his friends, I found myself so faint that I could scarcely walk, and before we reached the place I staggered and fell into a pit, from which the clay had been taken to build one of the huts. Karfa endeavoured to console me with the hopes of a speedy recovery, assuring me that if I would not walk out in the wet I should soon be well. I determined to follow his advice, and confine myself to my hut, but was still tormented with the fever, and my health continued to be in a very precarious state for five ensuing weeks. Sometimes I could crawl out of the hut, and sit a few hours in the open air; at other times I was unable to rise, and passed the lingering hours in a very gloomy and solitary manner. I was seldom visited by any person except my benevolent landlord, who came daily to inquire after my health.
In the hut that was assigned to me, I had a mat to sleep on, a clay jar for water, and a small gourd to drink from. Karfa sent me two meals a day from his own home and instructed his slaves to bring me firewood and water. However, I discovered that neither Karfa's kindness nor my accommodations could alleviate the fever that drained me and grew more concerning each day. I tried to hide my suffering as much as I could, but by the third day after my arrival, while I was with Karfa visiting some of his friends, I felt so weak that I could barely walk. Before we reached our destination, I stumbled and fell into a pit where clay had been dug to build one of the huts. Karfa tried to comfort me with promises of a quick recovery, insisting that I would be fine if I stayed out of the wet. I decided to take his advice and stay inside my hut, but the fever continued to torment me, and my health remained precarious for the next five weeks. Sometimes I could crawl out of the hut and sit outside for a few hours; other times, I couldn't get out of bed and spent my days feeling gloomy and alone. The only person who visited me regularly was my kind landlord, who came every day to check on my health.
When the rains became less frequent, and the country began to grow dry, the fever left me, but in so debilitated a condition that I could scarcely stand upright; and it was with great difficulty that I could carry my mat to the shade of a tamarind-tree, at a short distance, to enjoy the refreshing smell of the cornfields, and delight my eyes with a prospect of the country. I had the pleasure at length to find myself in a state of convalescence, towards which the benevolent and simple manners of the negroes, and the perusal of Karfa’s little volume, greatly contributed.
When the rains became less frequent and the countryside started to dry out, the fever finally left me, but I was so weak that I could barely stand. It was a real struggle to carry my mat to the shade of a tamarind tree, just a short distance away, to enjoy the refreshing scent of the cornfields and take in the view of the land. Eventually, I was happy to realize I was recovering, thanks in large part to the kind and straightforward nature of the local people and reading Karfa’s little book.
In the meantime many of the slatees who reside at Kamalia having spent all their money, and become in a great measure dependent upon Karfa’s hospitality, beheld me with an eye of envy, and invented many ridiculous and trifling stories to lessen me in Karfa’s esteem. And in the beginning of December a Serawoolli slatee, with five slaves, arrived from Sego; this man, too, spread a number of malicious reports concerning me, but Karfa paid no attention to them, and continued to show me the same kindness as formerly. As I was one day conversing with the slaves which this slatee had brought, one of them begged me to give him some victuals. I told him I was a stranger, and had none to give. He replied, “I gave you victuals when you were hungry. Have you forgot the man who brought you milk at Karrankalla? But,” added he with a sigh, “the irons were not then upon my legs!” I immediately recollected him, and begged some ground nuts from Karfa to give him, as a return for his former kindness.
In the meantime, many of the slatees living in Kamalia, having spent all their money and becoming quite dependent on Karfa's hospitality, looked at me with envy and came up with a bunch of silly stories to tarnish my reputation in Karfa's eyes. Then, at the beginning of December, a Serawoolli slatee with five slaves arrived from Sego; this guy also spread a lot of nasty rumors about me, but Karfa ignored them and continued to treat me with the same kindness as before. One day, while I was talking to the slaves this slatee had brought, one of them asked me for some food. I told him I was a stranger and didn’t have anything to give. He replied, “I gave you food when you were hungry. Have you forgotten the man who brought you milk at Karrankalla? But,” he added with a sigh, “the irons were not then upon my legs!” I immediately remembered him and asked Karfa for some ground nuts to give him as a thank you for his past kindness.
In the beginning of December, Karfa proposed to complete his purchase of slaves, and for this purpose collected all the debts which were owing to him in his own country; and on the 19th, being accompanied by three slatees, he departed for Kancaba, a large town on the banks of the Niger and a great slave-market. Most of the slaves who are sold at Kancaba come from Bambarra; for Mansong, to avoid the expense and danger of keeping all his prisoners at Sego, commonly sends them in small parties to be sold at the different trading towns; and as Kancaba is much resorted to by merchants it is always well supplied with slaves, which are sent thither up the Niger in canoes. When Karfa departed from Kamalia he proposed to return in the course of a month, and during his absence I was left to the care of a good old bushreen, who acted as schoolmaster to the young people of Kamalia.
At the beginning of December, Karfa decided to finalize his purchase of slaves, so he gathered all the debts owed to him in his home country. On the 19th, he left for Kancaba, a large town along the Niger River and a major slave market, accompanied by three slatees. Most of the slaves sold in Kancaba come from Bambarra; to save the cost and risk of keeping all his prisoners in Sego, Mansong typically sends them in small groups to be sold at various trading towns. Kancaba is a popular destination for merchants, so it always has a good supply of slaves transported up the Niger in canoes. When Karfa left Kamalia, he intended to return within a month, and during his time away, I was looked after by a kind old bushreen, who served as the schoolmaster for the young people of Kamalia.
CHAPTER XX.
Black customs.
The whole of my route, both in going and returning, having been confined to a tract of country bounded nearly by the 12th and 15th parallels of latitude, the reader must imagine that I found the climate in most places extremely hot, but nowhere did I feel the heat so intense and oppressive as in the camp at Benowm, of which mention has been made in a former place. In some parts, where the country ascends into hills, the air is at all times, comparatively cool; yet none of the districts which I traversed could properly be called mountainous. About the middle of June the hot and sultry atmosphere is agitated by violent gusts of wind (called tornadoes), accompanied with thunder and rain. These usher in what is denominated “the rainy season,” which continues until the month of November. During this time the diurnal rains are very heavy, and the prevailing winds are from the south-west. The termination of the rainy season is likewise attended with violent tornadoes, after which the wind shifts to the north-east, and continues to blow from that quarter during the rest of the year.
The entire route I took, both going and coming back, was limited to an area nearly between the 12th and 15th parallels of latitude, so it's safe to say that the climate in most places was extremely hot. However, I experienced the most intense and oppressive heat at the camp in Benowm, which I mentioned earlier. In some areas where the land rises into hills, the air is generally cooler, but none of the regions I passed through could truly be called mountainous. Around the middle of June, the hot and humid atmosphere is disturbed by strong gusts of wind (known as tornadoes), along with thunder and rain. These mark the beginning of what’s called “the rainy season,” which lasts until November. During this time, the daily rains are quite heavy, and the winds primarily come from the southwest. The end of the rainy season also brings strong tornadoes, after which the wind shifts to the northeast and continues blowing from that direction for the rest of the year.
When the wind sets in from the north-east it produces a wonderful change in the face of the country. The grass soon becomes dry and withered, the rivers subside very rapidly, and many of the trees shed their leaves. About this period is commonly felt the harmattan, a dry and parching wind blowing from the north-east, and accompanied by a thick smoky haze, through which the sun appears of a dull red colour. This wind in passing over the great desert of Sahara acquires a very strong attraction for humidity, and parches up everything exposed to its current. It is, however, reckoned very salutary, particularly to Europeans, who generally recover their health during its continuance. I experienced immediate relief from sickness, both at Dr. Laidley’s and at Kamalia, during the harmattan. Indeed, the air during the rainy season is so loaded with moisture that clothes, shoes, trunks, and everything that is not close to the fire becomes damp and mouldy, and the inhabitants may be said to live in a sort of vapour-bath; but this dry wind braces up the solids, which were before relaxed, gives a cheerful flow of spirits, and is even pleasant to respiration. Its ill effects are, that it produces chaps in the lips, and afflicts many of the natives with sore eyes.
When the wind comes in from the northeast, it brings a dramatic change to the landscape. The grass quickly dries up and wilts, the rivers recede rapidly, and many trees lose their leaves. Around this time, people typically experience the harmattan, a hot and dry wind coming from the northeast, accompanied by a thick, smoky haze that makes the sun look dull red. As this wind passes over the vast Sahara Desert, it picks up a strong attraction for moisture and dries out everything in its path. However, it is considered quite beneficial, especially for Europeans, who often regain their health while it lasts. I felt an immediate relief from illness, both at Dr. Laidley's and in Kamalia, during the harmattan. In fact, during the rainy season, the air is so heavy with moisture that clothes, shoes, and anything not next to the fire become damp and moldy, making it feel like the residents live in a kind of steam room. But this dry wind toughens up what was once relaxed, lifts spirits, and is even nice to breathe. Its downsides are that it cracks lips and causes sore eyes for many locals.
Whenever the grass is sufficiently dry the negroes set it on fire; but in Ludamar and other Moorish countries this practice is not allowed, for it is upon the withered stubble that the Moors feed their cattle until the return of the rains. The burning the grass in Manding exhibits a scene of terrific grandeur. In the middle of the night I could see the plains and mountains, as far as my eye could reach, variegated with lines of fire, and the light, reflected on the sky, made the heavens appear in a blaze. In the daytime pillars of smoke were seen in every direction, while the birds of prey were observed hovering round the conflagration, and pouncing down upon the snakes, lizards, and other reptiles which attempted to escape from the flames. This annual burning is soon followed by a fresh and sweet verdure, and the country is thereby rendered more healthful and pleasant.
Whenever the grass is dry enough, the Black people set it on fire; however, in Ludamar and other Moorish areas, this practice is prohibited, as the Moors rely on the dried stubble to feed their cattle until the rains come back. The grass burning in Manding presents a scene of incredible grandeur. In the middle of the night, I could see the plains and mountains, as far as I could see, marked by lines of fire, and the light reflected in the sky made the heavens look like they were on fire. During the day, pillars of smoke were visible in every direction, while birds of prey circled the fire and swooped down on snakes, lizards, and other reptiles trying to escape the flames. This annual burning is soon followed by fresh and lush greenery, making the area healthier and more pleasant.
Of the most remarkable and important of the vegetable productions mention has already been made; and they are nearly the same in all the districts through which I passed. It is observable, however, that although many species of the edible roots which grow in the West India Islands are found in Africa, yet I never saw, in any part of my journey, either the sugar-cane, the coffee, or the cocoa-tree, nor could I learn, on inquiry, that they were known to the natives. The pine-apple and the thousand other delicious fruits which the industry of civilised man (improving the bounties of nature) has brought to so great perfection in the tropical climates of America, are here equally unknown. I observed, indeed, a few orange and banana trees near the mouth of the Gambia, but whether they were indigenous, or were formerly planted there by some of the white traders, I could not positively learn. I suspect that they were originally introduced by the Portuguese.
Of the most notable and significant vegetable products I’ve mentioned before, they’re mostly similar in all the areas I traveled through. However, it's interesting to note that while many types of edible roots found in the West Indies also grow in Africa, I never came across sugarcane, coffee, or cocoa trees during my journey, nor could I find out if the locals were familiar with them. The pineapple and countless other delicious fruits that civilized people have cultivated to great perfection in the tropical climates of the Americas are also unknown here. I did see a few orange and banana trees near the mouth of the Gambia, but I couldn’t confirm whether they were native or if they had been planted by some white traders. I suspect they were originally brought in by the Portuguese.
Concerning property in the soil, it appeared to me that the lands in native woods were considered as belonging to the king, or (where the government was not monarchical) to the state. When any individual of free condition had the means of cultivating more land than he actually possessed, he applied to the chief man of the district, who allowed him an extension of territory, on condition of forfeiture if the lands were not brought into cultivation by a given period. The condition being fulfilled, the soil became vested in the possessor, and, for ought that appeared to me, descended his heirs.
Regarding land ownership, it seemed to me that areas covered by native forests were seen as belonging to the king or, in non-monarchical governments, to the state. When a free individual had the ability to farm more land than they owned, they would request permission from the chief of the district, who would grant them an extension of territory, with the understanding that if the land wasn’t cultivated within a specified time frame, they would lose it. Once the condition was met, the land became the property of the individual, and, as far as I could tell, it could be inherited by their heirs.
The population, however, considering the extent and fertility of the soil, and the ease with which lands are obtained, is not very great in the countries which I visited. I found many extensive and beautiful districts entirely destitute of inhabitants, and, in general, the borders of the different kingdoms were either very thinly peopled or entirely deserted. Many places are likewise unfavourable to population from being unhealthful. The swampy banks of the Gambia, the Senegal, and other rivers towards the coast, are of this description. Perhaps it is on this account chiefly that the interior countries abound more with inhabitants than the maritime districts; for all the negro nations that fell under my observation, though divided into a number of petty independent states, subsist chiefly by the same means, live nearly in the same temperature, and possess a wonderful similarity of disposition. The Mandingoes, in particular, are a very gentle race, cheerful in their dispositions, inquisitive, credulous, simple, and fond of flattery. Perhaps the most prominent defect in their character was that insurmountable propensity, which the reader must have observed to prevail in all classes of them, to steal from me the few effects I was possessed of. For this part of their conduct no complete justification can be offered, because theft is a crime in their own estimation; and it must be observed that they are not habitually and generally guilty of it towards each other.
The population, however, considering the quality and fertility of the land, and how easy it is to acquire land, is not very large in the countries I visited. I found many vast and beautiful areas completely empty of people, and generally, the borders of the different kingdoms were either very sparsely populated or entirely deserted. Many places are also unsuitable for settlement due to health issues. The swampy banks of the Gambia, the Senegal, and other coastal rivers fall into this category. Perhaps this is mainly why the inland areas have more inhabitants than the coastal regions; for all the African nations I observed, although divided into many small independent states, mostly rely on the same resources, live in nearly the same climate, and share a remarkable similarity in temperament. The Mandingoes, in particular, are a very gentle people, cheerful in nature, curious, gullible, straightforward, and fond of flattery. Perhaps the most prominent flaw in their character is that overwhelming tendency, which you've likely noticed in all levels of society, to steal from me the few possessions I had. There can be no complete justification for this behavior, as they consider theft a crime themselves; it's worth noting that they are not typically and generally guilty of it towards one another.
On the other hand, as some counterbalance to this depravity in their nature, allowing it to be such, it is impossible for me to forget the disinterested charity and tender solicitude with which many of these poor heathens (from the sovereign of Sego to the poor women who received me at different times into their cottages when I was perishing of hunger) sympathised with me in my sufferings, relieved my distresses, and contributed to my safety. This acknowledgment, however, is perhaps more particularly due to the female part of the nation. Among the men, as the reader must have seen, my reception, though generally kind, was sometimes otherwise. It varied according to the various tempers of those to whom I made application. The hardness of avarice in some, and the blindness of bigotry in others, had closed up the avenues to compassion; but I do not recollect a single instance of hard-heartedness towards me in the women. In all my wanderings and wretchedness I found them uniformly kind and compassionate; and I can truly say, as my predecessor Mr. Ledyard has eloquently said before me, “To a woman I never addressed myself in the language of decency and friendship without receiving a decent and friendly answer. If I was hungry or thirsty, wet or sick, they did not hesitate, like the men, to perform a generous action. In so free and so kind a manner did they contribute to my relief, that if I was dry, I drank the sweetest draught, and if hungry, I ate the coarsest morsel with a double relish.”
On the other hand, as a counterbalance to this inherent depravity, it's impossible for me to overlook the selfless kindness and caring attention that many of these poor heathens— from the king of Sego to the women who welcomed me into their homes when I was starving— showed me during my hardships. They empathized with my suffering, helped ease my distress, and played a key role in my safety. This recognition, however, is especially owed to the women of the nation. Among the men, as you must have noticed, my reception was generally kind but sometimes not. It varied with the different attitudes of those I approached. The harshness of greed in some and the blindness of prejudice in others blocked their compassion; however, I can’t recall a single instance of unkindness from the women. Throughout my struggles and misery, I found them consistently kind and caring, and I can genuinely say, as my forerunner Mr. Ledyard eloquently stated, “To a woman I never spoke in the language of decency and friendship without getting a decent and friendly response. If I was hungry or thirsty, wet or sick, they didn’t hesitate, unlike the men, to act generously. They helped me in such a warm and kind way that if I was thirsty, I drank the sweetest liquid, and if I was hungry, I enjoyed even the simplest food twice as much.”
It is surely reasonable to suppose that the soft and amiable sympathy of nature, which was thus spontaneously manifested towards me in my distress, is displayed by these poor people, as occasion requires, much more strongly towards persons of their own nation and neighbourhood, and especially when the objects of their compassion are endeared to them by the ties of consanguinity. Accordingly the maternal affection (neither suppressed by the restraints nor diverted by the solicitudes of civilised life) is everywhere conspicuous among them, and creates a correspondent return of tenderness in the child. An illustration of this has been already given. “Strike me,” said my attendant, “but do not curse my mother.” The same sentiment I found universally to prevail, and observed in all parts of Africa that the greatest affront which could be offered to a negro was to reflect on her who gave him birth.
It's reasonable to believe that the gentle and kind sympathy of nature, which was so freely shown to me in my time of trouble, is expressed by these poor people even more strongly towards their fellow countrymen and neighbors, especially when the people they feel sorry for are connected to them by family ties. As a result, maternal love (untouched by the pressures or worries of civilized life) is always evident among them, and it inspires a similar affection in the child. An example of this has already been provided. “Strike me,” my helper said, “but don’t curse my mother.” I found this sentiment to be common, and I noticed throughout Africa that the biggest insult you could give to a Black person was to speak poorly of the woman who gave him life.
It is not strange that this sense of filial duty and affection among the negroes should be less ardent towards the father than the mother. The system of polygamy, while it weakens the father’s attachment by dividing it among the children of different wives, concentrates all the mother’s jealous tenderness to one point—the protection of her own offspring. I perceived with great satisfaction, too, that the maternal solicitude extended, not only to the growth and security of the person, but also, in a certain degree, to the improvement of the mind of the infant; for one of the first lessons in which the Mandingo women instruct their children is the practice of truth. The reader will probably recollect the case of the unhappy mother whose son was murdered by the Moorish banditti at Funingkedy. Her only consolation in her uttermost distress was the reflection that the poor boy, in the course of his blameless life, had never told a lie. Such testimony from a fond mother on such an occasion must have operated powerfully on the youthful part of the surrounding spectators. It was at once a tribute of praise to the deceased and a lesson to the living.
It's not surprising that this sense of duty and affection among Black people is usually stronger for mothers than for fathers. The practice of polygamy weakens the father's bond by spreading it among the children from different wives, while it focuses all of the mother's protective love on her own kids. I was also pleased to see that maternal care didn't just cover the child's physical well-being but also, to some extent, their mental development; one of the first lessons Mandingo women teach their children is the practice of truth. The reader might remember the tragic story of the mother whose son was killed by Moorish bandits at Funingkedy. Her only comfort in her deepest sorrow was the thought that her child, throughout his innocent life, had never told a lie. Such a statement from a loving mother at such a moment must have had a profound impact on the young people standing by. It served as a powerful tribute to the deceased and a valuable lesson for the living.
The negro women suckle their children until they are able to walk of themselves. Three years’ nursing is not uncommon, and during this period the husband devotes his whole attention to his other wives. To this practice it is owing, I presume, that the family of each wife is seldom very numerous. Few women have more than five or six children. As soon as an infant is able to walk it is permitted to run about with great freedom. The mother is not over solicitous to preserve it from slight falls and other trifling accidents. A little practice soon enables a child to take care of itself, and experience acts the part of a nurse. As they advance in life the girls are taught to spin cotton and to beat corn, and are instructed in other domestic duties; and the boys are employed in the labours of the field. Both sexes, whether bushreens or kafirs, on attaining the age of puberty, are circumcised. This painful operation is not considered by the kafirs so much in the light of a religious ceremony as a matter of convenience and utility. They have, indeed, a superstitious notion that it contributes to render the marriage state prolific. The operation is performed upon several young people at the same time, all of whom are exempted from every sort of labour for two months afterwards. During this period they form a society called solimana. They visit the towns and villages in the neighbourhood, where they dance and sing, and are well treated by the inhabitants. I had frequently, in the course of my journey, observed parties of this description, but they were all males. I had, however, an opportunity of seeing a female solimana at Kamalia.
The Black women breastfeed their children until they can walk on their own. It’s not uncommon for nursing to last three years, and during this time, the husband focuses all his attention on his other wives. I believe that’s why each wife’s family is usually not very large. Few women have more than five or six children. Once a child can walk, they’re allowed to run around freely. The mother isn’t overly concerned about minor falls and other small accidents. A little practice quickly helps a child learn to take care of themselves, and experiences serve as their guide. As they grow up, girls learn to spin cotton and pound corn, along with other household tasks, while the boys work in the fields. Both girls and boys, whether bushren or kafi, are circumcised when they reach puberty. The kafi people don’t see this painful procedure mainly as a religious rite but more as a practical and useful matter. They have a superstitious belief that it helps make marriages fruitful. The circumcision is done for several young people at once, and all are exempt from any kind of work for two months afterward. During this time, they form a group called solimana. They visit nearby towns and villages, where they dance, sing, and are well treated by the locals. Throughout my journey, I often saw groups like this, but they were all male. However, I did have the chance to see a female solimana in Kamalia.
In the course of this celebration it frequently happens that some of the young women get married. If a man takes a fancy to any one of them, it is not considered as absolutely necessary that he should make an overture to the girl herself. The first object is to agree with the parents concerning the recompense to be given them for the loss of the company and services of their daughter. The value of two slaves is a common price, unless the girl is thought very handsome, in which case the parents will raise their demand very considerably. If the lover is rich enough, and willing to give the sum demanded, he then communicates his wishes to the damsel; but her consent is by no means necessary to the match, for if the parents agree to it and eat a few kolla-nuts, which are represented by the suitor as an earnest of the bargain, the young lady must either have the man of their choice or continue unmarried, for she cannot afterwards be given to another. If the parents should attempt it, the lover is then authorised by the laws of the country to seize upon the girl as his slave. When the day for celebrating the nuptials is fixed on, a select number of people are invited to be present at the wedding—a bullock or goat is killed, and great plenty of victuals is dressed for the occasion. As soon as it is dark the bride is conducted into a hut, where a company of matrons assist in arranging the wedding-dress, which is always white cotton, and is put on in such a manner as to conceal the bride from head to foot. Thus arrayed, she is seated upon a mat in the middle of the floor, and the old women place themselves in a circle round her. They then give her a series of instructions, and point out, with great propriety, what ought to be her future conduct in life. This scene of instruction, however, is frequently interrupted by girls, who amuse the company with songs and dances, which are rather more remarkable for their gaiety than delicacy. While the bride remains within the hut with the women the bridegroom devotes his attention to the guests of both sexes, who assemble without doors, and by distributing among them small presents of kolla-nuts, and seeing that every one partakes of the good cheer which is provided, he contributes much to the general hilarity of the evening. When supper is ended, the company spend the remainder of the night in singing and dancing, and seldom separate until daybreak. About midnight the bride is privately conducted by the women into the hut which is to be her future residence, and the bridegroom, upon a signal given, retires from his company.
During this celebration, it's common for some of the young women to get married. If a man becomes interested in one of them, it's not really necessary for him to directly approach the girl. The first step is to negotiate with her parents about the compensation they'll receive for losing their daughter’s company and help. Usually, two slaves are the going rate, unless the girl is considered very pretty, in which case the parents will significantly raise their asking price. If the suitor is wealthy enough and agrees to the amount demanded, he then expresses his intentions to the young woman; however, her consent isn't essential for the marriage. If her parents approve and eat a few kolla-nuts, which the suitor presents as a sign of the agreement, the young woman must either marry the chosen man or remain single, as she can't be offered to anyone else afterward. If the parents try to do so, the lover is legally allowed to take the girl as his slave. When the wedding day is set, a select group of people is invited to the ceremony—a bull or goat is slaughtered, and a large amount of food is prepared for the event. Once night falls, the bride is brought into a hut, where a group of older women helps her get ready in a wedding dress, which is always made of white cotton and is designed to cover her completely. Dressed this way, she sits on a mat in the center of the room, while the older women form a circle around her. They then provide her with a series of instructions and properly outline how she should conduct herself in the future. This moment of guidance is often interrupted by young girls who entertain the guests with lively songs and dances that are more cheerful than subtle. While the bride stays in the hut with the women, the groom engages with the male and female guests outside, handing out small gifts of kolla-nuts and ensuring that everyone enjoys the food provided, which adds to the festivities. After dinner, the guests spend the night singing and dancing, usually not leaving until dawn. Around midnight, the bride is quietly taken by the women to the hut where she will live, and upon a signal, the groom steps away from his guests.
The negroes, as hath been frequently observed, whether Mohammedan or pagan, allow a plurality of wives. The Mohammedans alone are by their religion confined to four, and as the husband commonly pays a great price for each, he requires from all of them the utmost deference and submission, and treats them more like hired servants than companions. They have, however, the management of domestic affairs, and each in rotation is mistress of the household, and has the care of dressing the victuals, overlooking the female slaves, etc. But though the African husbands are possessed of great authority over their wives I did not observe that in general they treat them with cruelty, neither did I perceive that mean jealousy in their dispositions which is so prevalent among the Moors. They permit their wives to partake of all public diversions, and this indulgence is seldom abused, for though the negro women are very cheerful and frank in their behaviour, they are by no means given to intrigue—I believe that instances of conjugal infidelity are not common. When the wives quarrel among themselves—a circumstance which, from the nature of their situation, must frequently happen—the husband decides between them, and sometimes finds it necessary to administer a little corporal chastisement before tranquillity can be restored. But if any one of the ladies complains to the chief of the town that her husband has unjustly punished her, and shown an undue partiality to some other of his wives, the affair is brought to a public trial. In these palavers, however, which are conducted chiefly by married men, I was informed that the complaint of the wife is not always considered in a very serious light, and the complainant herself is sometimes convicted of strife and contention and left without remedy. If she murmurs at the decision of the court the magic rod of Mumbo Jumbo soon puts an end to the business.
The Black individuals, as has often been noted, whether Muslim or non-religious, have multiple wives. Muslims are limited by their religion to four wives, and since husbands typically pay a high bride price for each, they expect complete respect and obedience from them, treating them more like hired help than partners. However, they manage household affairs, with each wife taking turns as the head of the home, overseeing meal preparation and supervising female slaves, etc. Although African husbands have significant authority over their wives, I did not generally notice cruelty in their treatment, nor the jealousy that is so common among the Moors. They allow their wives to enjoy all public festivities, and this freedom is rarely misused; even though Black women are very cheerful and open in their behavior, they are not known for being unfaithful—I believe instances of marital infidelity are uncommon. When the wives argue among themselves—a situation that must happen frequently due to their circumstances—the husband mediates between them and sometimes feels it's necessary to physically discipline one to restore peace. However, if one of the wives complains to the town chief that her husband has unjustly punished her or favored another wife, the issue is brought to a public trial. In these discussions, often led by married men, I was told that the wife's complaints are not usually taken very seriously, and she may be deemed a source of conflict and left without resolution. If she protests the court's decision, the mysterious authority of Mumbo Jumbo quickly settles the matter.
The children of the Mandingoes are not always named after their relations, but frequently in consequence of some remarkable occurrence. Thus my landlord at Kamalia was called Karfa, a word signifying to replace, because he was born shortly after the death of one of his brothers. Other names are descriptive of good or bad qualities—as Modi, a good man; Fadibba, father of the town, etc. Indeed, the very names of their towns have something descriptive in them, as Sibidooloo, the town of ciboa-trees; Kenneyeto, victuals here; Dosita, lift your spoon. Others appear to be given by way of reproach—as Bammakoo, wash a crocodile; Karrankalla, no cup to drink from, etc. A child is named when it is seven or eight days old. The ceremony commences by shaving the infant’s head; and a dish called dega, made of pounded corn and sour milk, is prepared for the guests. If the parents are rich, a sheep or goat is commonly added. This feast is called ding koon lee (the child’s head-shaving). During my stay at Kamalia I was present at four different feasts of this kind, and the ceremony was the same in each, whether the child belonged to a bushreen or a kafir. The schoolmaster, who officiated as priest on those occasions, and who is necessarily a bushreen, first said a long prayer over the dega, during which every person present took hold of the brim of the calabash with his right hand. After this the schoolmaster took the child in his arms and said a second prayer, in which he repeatedly solicited the blessing of God upon the child and upon all the company. When this prayer was ended he whispered a few sentences in the child’s ear and spat three times in its face, after which he pronounced its name aloud, and returned the infant to the mother. [80] This part of the ceremony being ended, the father of the child divided the dega into a number of balls, one of which he distributed to every person present; and inquiry was then made if any person in the town was dangerously sick, it being usual in such cases to send the party a large portion of the dega, which is thought to possess great medical virtues.
The children of the Mandingoes aren't always named after their relatives; often their names come from some significant event. For example, my landlord in Kamalia was named Karfa, which means to replace, because he was born shortly after one of his brothers passed away. Other names describe positive or negative traits—like Modi, a good man; Fadibba, the father of the town; and so on. In fact, even the names of their towns are descriptive, such as Sibidooloo, the town of ciboa trees; Kenneyeto, food here; Dosita, lift your spoon. Some seem to be given as a form of insult—like Bammakoo, wash a crocodile; Karrankalla, no cup to drink from; etc. A child gets named when it's seven or eight days old. The ceremony starts with shaving the baby’s head, and a dish called dega, made of pounded corn and sour milk, is prepared for the guests. If the parents are wealthy, a sheep or goat is usually added. This feast is called ding koon lee (the child's head-shaving). While I was in Kamalia, I attended four different feasts like this, and the ceremony was the same regardless of whether the child belonged to a bushreen or a kafir. The schoolmaster, who acted as the priest during these ceremonies, and who has to be a bushreen, first offered a lengthy prayer over the dega, during which everyone present held the edge of the calabash with their right hand. After this, the schoolmaster took the child in his arms and said another prayer, repeatedly asking for God's blessing on the child and everyone there. Once the prayer was over, he whispered a few words in the child's ear and spat three times on its face, after which he announced the child’s name out loud and returned the baby to the mother. [80] After this part of the ceremony, the child's father divided the dega into several balls, giving one to each person present; then he asked if anyone in the town was seriously ill, as it’s common to send a large portion of the dega to that person, which is believed to have significant healing properties.
Among the negroes every individual, besides his own proper name, has likewise a kontong, or surname, to denote the family or clan to which he belongs. Some of these families are very numerous and powerful. It is impossible to enumerate the various kontongs which are found in different parts of the country, though the knowledge of many of them is of great service to the traveller; for as every negro plumes himself upon the importance or the antiquity of his clan, he is much flattered when he is addressed by his kontong.
Among Black people, each individual, in addition to their own name, has a kontong, or surname, to indicate the family or clan they belong to. Some of these families are quite large and influential. It's impossible to list all the different kontongs found in various regions of the country, although knowing many of them is very helpful for travelers. This is because every Black person takes pride in the significance or history of their clan, and they feel flattered when addressed by their kontong.
Salutations among the negroes to each other when they meet are always observed, but those in most general use among the kafirs are, “Abbe haeretto,” “’E ning seni,” “Anawari,” etc., all of which have nearly the same meaning, and signify “Are you well?” or to that effect. There are likewise salutations which are used at different times of the day, as “E ning somo” (“Good morning”), etc. The general answer to all salutations is to repeat the kontong of the person who salutes, or else to repeat the salutation itself, first pronouncing the word marhaba (“My friend”).
Greetings among Black people when they meet are always acknowledged, but the most commonly used ones among the Kafirs are, “Abbe haeretto,” “E ning seni,” “Anawari,” etc., all of which have nearly the same meaning and signify “Are you well?” or something similar. There are also greetings that are used at different times of the day, like “E ning somo” (“Good morning”), etc. The standard response to all greetings is to repeat the phrase of the person who greets you or to echo the greeting itself, prefacing it with the word marhaba (“My friend”).
CHAPTER XXI.
RELIGIOUS BELIEFS AND INDUSTRIES OF THE MANDINGOES.
The Mandingoes and, I believe, the negroes in general, have no artificial method of dividing time. They calculate the years by the number of rainy seasons. They portion the year into moons, and reckon the days by so many suns. The day they divide into morning, midday, and evening; and farther subdivide it, when necessary, by pointing to the sun’s place in the heavens. I frequently inquired of some of them what became of the sun during the night, and whether we should see the same sun, or a different one, in the morning; but I found that they considered the question as very childish. The subject appeared to them as placed beyond the reach of human investigation—they had never indulged a conjecture, nor formed any hypothesis, about the matter. The moon, by varying her form, has more attracted their attention. On the first appearance of the new moon, which they look upon to be newly created, the pagan natives, as well as Mohammedans, say a short prayer; and this seems to be the only visible adoration which the kafirs offer up to the Supreme Being. This prayer is pronounced in a whisper, the party holding up his hands before his face: its purport (as I have been assured by many different people) is to return thanks to God for His kindness through the existence of the past moon, and to solicit a continuation of His favour during that of the new one. At the conclusion they spit upon their hands and rub them over their faces. This seems to be nearly the same ceremony which prevailed among the heathens in the days of Job. [82]
The Mandingoes, and I think all black people generally, don’t have a specific way to track time. They measure the years by the number of rainy seasons. They divide the year into moons and count the days based on how many suns have risen. Their day is split into morning, midday, and evening, and they further break it down when needed by pointing to the sun's position in the sky. I often asked some of them where the sun goes at night, and if we see the same sun in the morning or a different one. They found my questions rather silly. To them, this was a topic beyond human understanding—they had never thought about it or made any guesses. The moon, which changes its shape, caught their attention more. When the new moon first appears, which they see as newly created, both the pagan natives and Mohammedans say a short prayer; this seems to be the only public worship that the kafirs offer to the Supreme Being. The prayer is said quietly, with the person holding their hands up in front of their face. Its meaning (as various people have told me) is to thank God for His kindness during the past moon and to ask for His continued favor during the new one. At the end, they spit on their hands and rub them on their faces. This seems to be similar to a ceremony that was practiced among the pagans in the days of Job. [82]
Great attention, however, is paid to the changes of this luminary in its monthly course, and it is thought very unlucky to begin a journey, or any other work of consequence, in the last quarter. An eclipse, whether of the sun or moon, is supposed to be effected by witchcraft. The stars are very little regarded; and the whole study of astronomy appears to them as a useless pursuit, and attended to by such persons only as deal in magic.
A lot of attention is given to the changes of this celestial body in its monthly cycle, and it's considered very unlucky to start a journey or any significant task in the last quarter. An eclipse, whether of the sun or moon, is thought to be caused by witchcraft. The stars are barely noticed, and studying astronomy seems pointless to them, something only those involved in magic concern themselves with.
Their notions of geography are equally puerile. They imagine that the world is an extended plain, the termination of which no eye has discovered—it being, they say, overhung with clouds and darkness. They describe the sea as a large river of salt water, on the farther shore of which is situated a country called Tobaubo doo (the land of the white people). At a distance from Tobaubo doo they describe another country, which they allege as inhabited by cannibals of gigantic size, called komi. This country they call Jong sang doo (the land where the slaves are sold). But of all countries in the world their own appears to them as the best, and their own people as the happiest, and they pity the fate of other nations, who have been placed by Providence in less fertile and less fortunate districts.
Their ideas about geography are just as childish. They think the world is a huge flat land that no one has ever seen the end of, saying it’s covered by clouds and darkness. They describe the sea as a giant river of salt water, and on the other side is a place called Tobaubo doo (the land of the white people). Far from Tobaubo doo, they talk about another land that they claim is home to giant cannibals, called komi. They name this place Jong sang doo (the land where the slaves are sold). But out of all the countries in the world, they believe their own is the best, and their people the happiest, feeling sorry for other nations that have been placed by Providence in less fertile and less fortunate areas.
Some of the religious opinions of the negroes, though blended with the weakest credulity and superstition, are not unworthy attention. I have conversed with all ranks and conditions upon the subject of their faith, and can pronounce, without the smallest shadow of doubt, that the belief of one God and of a future state of reward and punishment is entire and universal among them. It is remarkable, however, that except on the appearance of a new moon, as before related, the pagan natives do not think it necessary to offer up prayers and supplications to the Almighty. They represent the Deity, indeed, as the creator and preserver of all things, but in general they consider Him as a being so remote and of so exalted a nature that it is idle to imagine the feeble supplications of wretched mortals can reverse the decrees and change the purposes of unerring wisdom. If they are asked for what reason then do they offer up a prayer on the appearance of the new moon, the answer is, that custom has made it necessary, they do it because their fathers did it before them. Such is the blindness of unassisted nature! The concerns of this world, they believe, are committed by the Almighty to the superintendence and direction of subordinate spirits, over whom they suppose that certain magical ceremonies have great influence. A white fowl suspended to the branch of a particular tree, a snake’s head or a few handfuls of fruit are offerings which ignorance and superstition frequently present, to deprecate the wrath, or to conciliate the favour, of these tutelary agents. But it is not often that the negroes make their religious opinions the subject of conversation; when interrogated in particular concerning their ideas of a future state, they express themselves with great reverence, but endeavour to shorten the discussion by observing, “Mo o mo inta allo” (“No man knows anything about it”). They are content, they say, to follow the precepts and examples of their forefathers through the various vicissitudes of life, and when this world presents no objects of enjoyment or of comfort they seem to look with anxiety towards another, which they believe will be better suited to their natures, but concerning which they are far from indulging vain and delusive conjectures.
Some of the religious beliefs of Black people, although mixed with naivety and superstition, deserve attention. I have talked with people from all walks of life about their faith and can say, without a doubt, that the belief in one God and a future state of reward and punishment is widespread among them. However, it’s interesting that except for the sighting of a new moon, as mentioned earlier, the indigenous people don’t feel the need to pray or make requests to the Almighty. They do see God as the creator and sustainer of everything, but generally believe He is so distant and exalted that it's pointless to think the weak pleas of suffering humans can change the decisions of perfect wisdom. When asked why they pray at the sight of the new moon, their response is that it’s just a tradition, something their ancestors did before them. Such is the blindness of unassisted nature! They believe that matters of this world are overseen by lower spirits, and they think that certain magical rituals have significant influence over them. They often offer a white chicken hung from a specific tree branch, a snake’s head, or a handful of fruits to appease these guardian spirits or win their favor. However, Black people don't often discuss their religious beliefs. When asked about their views on an afterlife, they respond with great respect but try to end the conversation quickly, saying, “Mo o mo inta allo” (“No man knows anything about it”). They consider it enough to follow the teachings and examples of their ancestors through the ups and downs of life, and when this world offers no joy or comfort, they seem anxious about a better afterlife that they believe will suit them more, yet they don't entertain empty or misleading speculations about it.
The Mandingoes seldom attain extreme old age. At forty most of them become grey-haired and covered with wrinkles, and but few of them survive the age of fifty-five or sixty. They calculate the years of their lives, as I have already observed, by the number of rainy seasons (there being but one such in the year), and distinguish each year by a particular name, founded on some remarkable occurrence which happened in that year. Thus they say the year of the Farbanna war—the year of the Kaarta war—the year on which Gadou was plundered, etc., etc.; and I have no doubt that the year 1796 will in many places be distinguished by the name of tobaubo tambi sang (the year the white man passed), as such an occurrence would naturally form an epoch in their traditional history.
The Mandingoes rarely live to an old age. By the time they reach forty, most have grey hair and wrinkles, and only a few make it past fifty-five or sixty. They measure their age, as I’ve mentioned before, by the number of rainy seasons (there’s only one each year) and name each year based on notable events that occurred during that time. For example, they refer to the year of the Farbanna war, the year of the Kaarta war, the year when Gadou was plundered, and so on. I have no doubt that the year 1796 will be remembered in many places as tobaubo tambi sang (the year the white man passed), since that event would naturally mark a significant moment in their history.
But notwithstanding that longevity is uncommon among them, it appeared to me that their diseases are but few in number. Their simple diet and active way of life preserve them from many of those disorders which embitter the days of luxury and idleness. Fevers and fluxes are the most common and the most fatal. For these they generally apply saphies to different parts of the body, and perform a great many other superstitious ceremonies—some of which are indeed well calculated to inspire the patient with the hope of recovery, and divert his mind from brooding over his own danger—but I have sometimes observed among them a more systematic mode of treatment. On the first attack of a fever, when the patient complains of cold, he is frequently placed in a sort of vapour-bath. This is done by spreading branches of the nauclea orientalis upon hot wood embers, and laying the patient upon them, wrapped up in a large cotton cloth. Water is then sprinkled upon the branches, which, descending to the hot embers, soon covers the patient with a cloud of vapour, in which he is allowed to remain until the embers are almost extinguished. This practice commonly produces a profuse perspiration, and wonderfully relieves the sufferer.
But even though people don't usually live long, it seems to me that they don't suffer from many diseases. Their simple diet and active lifestyle protect them from a lot of the ailments that ruin the lives of those who indulge in luxury and laziness. Fevers and diarrheal diseases are the most common and the deadliest. For these, they often use saps on various parts of the body and perform many other superstitious rituals—some of which really do help inspire hope in the patient and distract them from worrying about their own situation—but I’ve also noticed that they sometimes use a more organized approach to treatment. When someone first gets a fever and complains of feeling cold, they are often placed in a kind of steam bath. This is done by laying branches of the nauclea orientalis on hot embers, and then the patient is laid on them, wrapped in a large cotton cloth. Water is then sprinkled on the branches, which, falling onto the hot embers, soon envelops the patient in a cloud of steam, where they stay until the embers are almost out. This method usually causes heavy sweating and provides great relief to the person suffering.
For the dysentery they use the bark of different trees reduced to powder and mixed with the patient’s food; but this practice is in general very unsuccessful.
For dysentery, they use the bark of different trees ground into a powder and mixed with the patient's food; however, this method is usually not very effective.
The other diseases which prevail among the negroes are the yaws, the elephantiasis, and a leprosy of the very worst kind. This last-mentioned complaint appears at the beginning in scurfy spots upon different parts of the body, which finally settle upon the hands or feet, where the skin becomes withered, and, cracks in many places. At length the ends of the fingers swell and ulcerate, the discharge is acrid and fetid, the nails drop off, and the bones of the fingers become carious, and separate at the joints. In this manner the disease continues to spread, frequently until the patient loses all his fingers and toes. Even the hands and feet are sometimes destroyed by this inveterate malady, to which the negroes give the name of balla ou (incurable).
The other diseases that commonly affect Black people include yaws, elephantiasis, and a very severe type of leprosy. This last disease starts with scabby spots on various parts of the body, which eventually settle on the hands or feet, causing the skin to become dry and crack in many areas. Over time, the tips of the fingers swell and develop sores, with the discharge being bitter and foul-smelling; the nails fall off, and the bones in the fingers become decayed and separate at the joints. The disease often continues to spread, frequently leading to the loss of all fingers and toes. Sometimes, even the hands and feet are severely damaged by this stubborn illness, which Black people refer to as balla ou (incurable).
The guinea worm is likewise very common in certain places, especially at the commencement of the rainy season. The negroes attribute this disease, which has been described by many writers, to bad water, and allege that the people who drink from wells are more subject to it than those who drink from streams. To the same cause they attribute the swelling of the glands of the neck (goitres), which are very common in some parts of Bambarra. I observed also, in the interior countries, a few instances of simple gonorrhœa, but never the confirmed lues. On the whole, it appeared to me that the negroes are better surgeons than physicians. I found them very successful in their management of fractures and dislocations, and their splints and bandages are simple and easily removed. The patient is laid upon a soft mat, and the fractured limb is frequently bathed with cold water. All abscesses they open with the actual cautery, and the dressings are composed of either soft leaves, shea butter, or cow’s dung, as the case seems in their judgment to require. Towards the coast, where a supply of European lancets can be procured, they sometimes perform phlebotomy, and in cases of local inflammation a curious sort of cupping is practised. This operation is performed by making incisions in the part, and applying to it a bullock’s horn with a small hole in the end. The operator then takes a piece of bee’s wax in his mouth, and, putting his lips to the hole, extracts the air from the horn, and by a dexterous use of his tongue stops up the hole with the wax. This method is found to answer the purpose, and in general produces a plentiful discharge.
The guinea worm is also quite common in some areas, especially at the start of the rainy season. The local people believe this disease, which has been described by various authors, is caused by contaminated water and claim that those who drink from wells are at higher risk than those who drink from streams. They also link the swelling of neck glands (goitres), which are common in some regions of Bambarra, to the same issue. I also noticed a few cases of simple gonorrhœa in the interior areas, but never the advanced lues. Overall, it seemed to me that the local people are better at surgery than at medicine. I found them very effective in treating fractures and dislocations, and their splints and bandages are simple and easy to remove. The patient lies on a soft mat, and the broken limb is often soaked in cold water. They treat all abscesses using actual cautery, and the dressings are made from either soft leaves, shea butter, or cow dung, depending on what they think is needed. Along the coast, where they can get European lancets, they sometimes perform bloodletting, and for local inflammation, they use a unique method of cupping. This procedure involves making incisions in the area and placing a bullock’s horn with a small hole at the end. The practitioner then takes a piece of beeswax in his mouth, puts his lips to the hole, and removes the air from the horn while skillfully using his tongue to seal the hole with the wax. This method is effective and generally leads to significant discharge.
When a person of consequence dies, the relations and neighbours meet together and manifest their sorrow by loud and dismal howlings. A bullock or goat is killed for such persons as come to assist at the funeral, which generally takes place in the evening of the same day on which the party died. The negroes have no appropriate burial-places, and frequently dig the grave in the floor of the deceased’s hut, or in the shade of a favourite tree. The body is dressed in white cotton, and wrapped up in a mat. It is carried to the grave in the dusk of the evening by the relations. If the grave is without the walls of the town a number of prickly bushes are laid upon it to prevent the wolves from digging up the body; but I never observed that any stone was placed over the grave as a monument or memorial.
When an important person dies, family and neighbors gather together to express their grief with loud and mournful cries. A cow or goat is sacrificed for those who come to help with the funeral, which usually happens on the evening of the same day the person passed away. The locals don’t have designated burial sites and often dig the grave in the floor of the deceased’s hut or under the shade of a favorite tree. The body is dressed in white cotton and wrapped in a mat. It is carried to the grave at dusk by family members. If the grave is outside the town's walls, some thorny branches are placed on it to keep wolves from disturbing the body; however, I never saw any stones used as a marker or memorial for the grave.
Of their music and dances some account has incidentally been given in different parts of my journal. On the first of these heads I have now to add a list of their musical instruments, the principal of which are—the koonting, a sort of guitar with three strings; the korro, a large harp with eighteen strings; the simbing, a small harp with seven strings; the balafou, an instrument composed of twenty pieces of hard wood of different lengths, with the shells of gourds hung underneath to increase the sound; the tangtang, a drum open at the lower end; and, lastly, the tabala, a large drum, commonly used to spread an alarm through the country. Besides these, they make use of small flutes, bow-strings, elephants’ teeth and bells; and at all their dances and concerts clapping of hands appears to constitute a necessary part of the chorus.
Some details about their music and dances have been shared throughout my journal. Now, I want to add a list of their musical instruments, the main ones being—the koonting, a type of guitar with three strings; the korro, a large harp with eighteen strings; the simbing, a smaller harp with seven strings; the balafou, an instrument made of twenty pieces of hard wood of various lengths, with the shells of gourds hung underneath to amplify the sound; the tangtang, a drum that’s open at one end; and finally, the tabala, a large drum traditionally used to send out an alarm across the land. In addition to these, they use small flutes, bow-strings, elephants’ tusks, and bells; and at all their dances and concerts, clapping of hands seems to be an essential part of the performance.
With the love of music is naturally connected a taste for poetry; and fortunately for the poets of Africa they are in a great measure exempted from that neglect and indigence which in more polished countries commonly attend the votaries of the Muses. They consist of two classes; the most numerous are the singing men, called jilli kea, mentioned in a former part of my narrative. One or more of these may be found in every town. They sing extempore songs in honour of their chief men, or any other persons who are willing to give “solid pudding for empty praise.” But a nobler part of their office is to recite the historical events of their country; hence in war they accompany the soldiers to the field, in order, by reciting the great actions of their ancestors, to awaken in them a spirit of glorious emulation. The other class are devotees of the Mohammedan faith, who travel about the country singing devout hymns and performing religious ceremonies, to conciliate the favour of the Almighty, either in averting calamity or insuring success to any enterprise. Both descriptions of these itinerant bards are much employed and respected by the people, and very liberal contributions are made for them.
With a love for music naturally comes an appreciation for poetry, and thankfully, the poets of Africa mostly avoid the neglect and poverty that often plague artists in more refined countries. They fall into two main groups; the larger group is comprised of the singing men, known as jilli kea, mentioned earlier in my account. You can find one or more of these singers in every town. They perform impromptu songs to honor influential figures or anyone willing to provide “solid pudding for empty praise.” A more important part of their role is to recount the historical events of their nation; thus, in times of war, they accompany soldiers to the battlefield, inspiring them with tales of their ancestors' great deeds to ignite a spirit of glorious competition. The other group consists of followers of the Mohammedan faith, who travel across the land singing hymns and conducting religious ceremonies to gain the favor of the Almighty, whether to avert disasters or ensure success in any venture. Both types of these traveling bards are widely valued and well-supported by the community, receiving generous contributions for their work.
The usual diet of the negroes is somewhat different in different districts; in general the people of free condition breakfast about daybreak upon gruel made of meal and water, with a little of the fruit of the tamarind to give it an acid taste. About two o’clock in the afternoon a sort of hasty pudding, with a little shea butter, is the common meal; but the supper constitutes the principal repast, and is seldom ready before midnight. This consists almost universally of kouskous, with a small portion of animal food or shea butter mixed with it. In eating, the kafirs, as well as Mohammedans, use the right hand only.
The typical diet of Black people varies in different areas. Generally, free individuals have breakfast around dawn, which consists of gruel made from meal and water, with a bit of tamarind fruit to add a sour flavor. Around two in the afternoon, they usually eat a type of hasty pudding with a little shea butter. However, dinner is the main meal and often isn’t ready until midnight. This meal typically includes couscous, served with a small amount of meat or mixed with shea butter. Both Kafirs and Muslims eat using only their right hand.
The beverages of the pagan negroes are beer and mead, of each of which they frequently drink to excess. The Mohammedan convert drinks nothing but water. The natives of all descriptions take snuff and smoke tobacco; their pipes are made of wood, with an earthen bowl of curious workmanship. But in the interior countries the greatest of all luxuries is salt. It would appear strange to a European to see a child suck a piece of rock salt as if it were sugar. This, however, I have frequently seen, although, in the inland parts, the poorer class of inhabitants are so very rarely indulged with this precious article that to say a man ate salt with his victuals is the same as saying he is a very rich man. I have myself suffered great inconvenience from the scarcity of this article. The long use of vegetable food creates so painful a longing for salt that no words can sufficiently describe it.
The drinks of the pagan Africans are beer and mead, and they often drink too much of both. The Muslim converts only drink water. People from all backgrounds use snuff and smoke tobacco; their pipes are made from wood, with an intricately designed clay bowl. But in the interior regions, salt is considered the greatest luxury. It might seem odd to a European to see a child sucking on a piece of rock salt like it’s candy. However, I’ve seen this often, even though in the inland areas, the poorer people rarely get to enjoy this precious item, so saying someone ate salt with their food is like saying they are very wealthy. I have personally experienced a lot of discomfort from the lack of this ingredient. Prolonged consumption of plant-based food creates such an intense longing for salt that no words can truly capture it.
The negroes in general, and the Mandingoes in particular, are considered by the whites on the coast as an indolent and inactive people—I think without reason. The nature of the climate is, indeed, unfavourable to great exertion; but surely a people cannot justly be denominated habitually indolent whose wants are supplied, not by the spontaneous productions of nature, but by their own exertions. Few people work harder, when occasion requires, than the Mandingoes; but not having many opportunities of turning to advantage the superfluous produce of their labour, they are content with cultivating as much ground only as is necessary for their own support. The labours of the field give them pretty full employment during the rains; and in the dry season the people who live in the vicinity of large rivers employ themselves in fishing. The fish are taken in wicker baskets or with small cotton nets, and are preserved by being first dried in the sun and afterwards rubbed with shea butter, to prevent them from contracting fresh moisture. Others of the natives employ themselves in hunting. Their weapons are bows and arrows; but the arrows in common use are not poisoned. [92] They are very dexterous marksmen, and will hit a lizard on a tree, or any other small object, at an amazing distance. They likewise kill guinea-fowls, partridges, and pigeons, but never on the wing. While the men are occupied in these pursuits the women are very diligent in manufacturing cotton cloth. They prepare the cotton for spinning by laying it in small quantities at a time upon a smooth stone or piece of wood, and rolling the seeds out with a thick iron spindle; and they spin it with the distaff. The thread is not fine, but well twisted, and makes a very durable cloth. A woman with common diligence will spin from six to nine garments of this cloth in one year, which, according to its fineness, will sell for a minkalli and a half or two minkallies each. [93] The weaving is performed by the men. The loom is made exactly upon the same principle as that of Europe, but so small and narrow that the web is seldom more than four inches broad. The shuttle is of the common construction, but as the thread is coarse the chamber is somewhat larger than the European.
The Black people in general, and the Mandingoes in particular, are viewed by the white people on the coast as lazy and inactive—though I believe that's unfair. The climate does make it tough to exert a lot of effort; however, it’s not right to label a group as habitually lazy when their needs are met not by the natural abundance around them, but through their own hard work. Few groups work harder when necessary than the Mandingoes; but since they don’t have many chances to benefit from excess produce, they’re satisfied with farming just enough to sustain themselves. Their farming keeps them quite busy during the rainy season, and in the dry season, those who live near large rivers spend their time fishing. They catch fish using wicker baskets or small cotton nets, drying them in the sun first and then rubbing them with shea butter to prevent moisture. Others in the community go hunting. They use bows and arrows, although the commonly used arrows aren't poisoned. [92] They are skilled marksmen, able to hit a lizard on a tree or other small targets from an impressive distance. They also hunt guinea fowl, partridges, and pigeons, but never while they're flying. While the men are engaged in these activities, the women work diligently to produce cotton cloth. They prepare the cotton for spinning by placing small amounts at a time on a smooth stone or piece of wood and rolling out the seeds with a thick iron spindle; then, they spin it with a distaff. The thread isn’t fine but is well twisted, creating very durable cloth. A diligent woman can spin between six to nine garments of this cloth in a year, selling for a minkalli and a half to two minkallies each, depending on its fineness. [93] The men handle the weaving. The loom is constructed similarly to European looms, but it’s small and narrow, so the woven fabric is rarely more than four inches wide. The shuttle is made in a standard way, but because the thread is coarse, the chamber is a bit larger than that of European looms.
The women dye this cloth of a rich and lasting blue colour by the following simple process:—The leaves of the indigo, when fresh gathered, are pounded in a wooden mortar, and mixed in a large earthen jar with a strong ley of wood-ashes; chamber-ley is sometimes added. The cloth is steeped in this mixture, and allowed to remain until it has acquired the proper shade. In Kaarta and Ludamar, where the indigo is not plentiful, they collect the leaves and dry them in the sun; and when they wish to use them they reduce a sufficient quantity to powder and mix it with the ley, as before mentioned. Either way the colour is very beautiful, with a fine purple gloss, and equal in my opinion to the best Indian or European blue. This cloth is cut into various pieces and sewed into garments with needles of the natives’ own making.
The women dye this fabric a rich and long-lasting blue using a simple process: First, they pound fresh indigo leaves in a wooden mortar and mix them in a large clay jar with a strong lye made from wood ashes; sometimes they add chamber lye. The cloth is soaked in this mixture and left until it reaches the desired shade. In Kaarta and Ludamar, where indigo is scarce, they gather the leaves and dry them in the sun. When they want to use them, they grind enough dried leaves into powder and mix it with the lye, just like before. Either way, the color is vibrant, with a lovely purple sheen, and in my opinion, it's as good as the best blue from India or Europe. This fabric is cut into different pieces and sewn into clothing using needles made by the locals themselves.
As the arts of weaving, dyeing, sewing, etc., may easily be acquired, those who exercise them are not considered in Africa as following any particular profession, for almost every slave can weave, and every boy can sew. The only artists who are distinctly acknowledged as such by the negroes, and who value themselves on exercising appropriate and peculiar trades, are the manufacturers of leather and of iron. The first of these are called karrankea (or, as the word is sometimes pronounced, gaungay). They are to be found in almost every town, and they frequently travel through the country in the exercise of their calling. They tan and dress leather with very great expedition, by steeping the hide first in a mixture of wood-ashes and water until it parts with the hair, and afterwards by using the pounded leaves of a tree called goo as an astringent. They are at great pains to render the hide as soft and pliant as possible, by rubbing it frequently between their hands and beating it upon a stone. The hides of bullocks are converted chiefly into sandals, and therefore require less care in dressing than the skins of sheep and goats, which are used for covering quivers and saphies, and in making sheaths for swords and knives, belts, pockets, and a variety of ornaments. These skins commonly are dyed of a red or yellow colour—the red by means of millet stalks reduced to powder; and the yellow by the root of a plant the name of which I have forgotten.
As the skills of weaving, dyeing, sewing, etc., can be easily learned, people in Africa don’t really view those who practice them as having a specific profession; almost every slave can weave, and every boy can sew. The only artists who are clearly recognized as such by the people, and who take pride in their unique trades, are the makers of leather and iron. The leather workers are called karrankea (or, as the word is sometimes pronounced, gaungay). They are found in nearly every town and often travel around the country for their work. They tan and finish leather very quickly by soaking the hide in a mixture of wood ashes and water until the hair comes off, and then using the crushed leaves of a tree called goo as an astringent. They go to great lengths to make the hide as soft and flexible as possible by frequently rubbing it between their hands and beating it against a stone. The hides of bulls are mainly turned into sandals, requiring less care compared to sheep and goat skins, which are used for covering quivers and saphies and for making sheaths for swords and knives, belts, pockets, and various ornaments. These skins are typically dyed red or yellow—the red using powdered millet stalks, and the yellow from the root of a plant whose name I’ve forgotten.
The manufacturers in iron are not so numerous as the karrankeas, but they appear to have studied their business with equal diligence. The negroes on the coast being cheaply supplied with iron from the European traders, never attempt the manufacturing of this article themselves; but in the inland parts the natives smelt this useful metal in such quantities not only to supply themselves from it with all necessary weapons and instruments, but even to make it a article of commerce with some of the neighbouring states. During my stay at Kamalia there was a smelting furnace at a short distance from the hut where I lodged, and the owner and his workmen made no secret about the manner of conducting the operation, and readily allowed me to examine the furnace, and assist them in breaking the ironstone. The furnace was a circular tower of clay, about ten feet high and three feet in diameter, surrounded in two places with withes, to prevent the clay from cracking and falling to pieces by the violence of the heat. Round the lower part, on a level with the ground—but not so low as the bottom of the furnace, which was somewhat concave—were made seven openings, into every one of which were placed three tubes of clay, and the openings again plastered up in such a manner that no air could enter the furnace but through the tubes, by the opening and shutting of which they regulated the fire. These tubes were formed by plastering a mixture of clay and grass round a smooth roller of wood, which, as soon as the clay began to harden, was withdrawn, and the tube left to dry in the sun. The ironstone which I saw was very heavy, of a dull red colour with greyish specks; it was broken into pieces about the size of a hen’s egg. A bundle of dry wood was first put into the furnace, and covered with a considerable quantity of charcoal, which was brought, ready burnt, from the woods. Over this was laid a stratum of ironstone, and then another of charcoal, and so on, until the furnace was quite full. The fire was applied through one of the tubes, and blown for some time with bellows made of goats’ skins. The operation went on very slowly at first, and it was some hours before the flame appeared above the furnace; but after this it burnt with great violence all the first night, and the people who attended put in at times more charcoal. On the day following the fire was not so fierce, and on the second night some of the tubes were withdrawn and the air allowed to have freer access to the furnace; but the heat was still very great, and a bluish flame rose some feet above the top of the furnace. On the third day from the commencement of the operation, all the tubes were taken out, the ends of many of them being vitrified with the heat; but the metal was not removed until some days afterwards, when the whole was perfectly cool. Part of the furnace was then taken down, and the iron appeared in the form of a large irregular mass, with pieces of charcoal adhering to it. It was sonorous; and when any portion was broken off, the fracture exhibited a granulated appearance, like broken steel. The owner informed me that many parts of this cake were useless, but still there was good iron enough to repay him for his trouble. This iron, or rather steel, is formed into various instruments by being repeatedly heated in a forge, the heat of which is urged by a pair of double bellows of a very simple construction, being made of two goats’ skins the tubes from which unite before they enter the forge, and supply a constant and very regular blast. The hammer, forceps, and anvil are all very simple, and the workmanship (particularly in the formation of knives and spears) is not destitute of merit. The iron, indeed, is hard and brittle, and requires much labour before it can be made to answer the purpose.
The iron manufacturers are not as numerous as the karrankeas, but they seem to have studied their craft just as diligently. The locals on the coast get iron cheaply from European traders and never try to manufacture it themselves; however, inland, the natives smelt this valuable metal in large quantities—not only to make necessary weapons and tools for themselves but also to trade with neighboring states. While I was in Kamalia, there was a smelting furnace not far from where I stayed. The owner and his workers were open about how they conducted their operations and happily let me observe the furnace and help them break the ironstone. The furnace was a circular clay tower about ten feet high and three feet wide, reinforced with branches in two spots to prevent the clay from cracking and breaking under the intense heat. Around the bottom, level with the ground—but not as low as the concave base—there were seven openings, each fitted with three clay tubes, which were sealed off to ensure that air could enter only through the tubes. They controlled the fire by opening and closing these tubes. The tubes were made by layering a mix of clay and grass around a smooth wooden roller, which was pulled out once the clay started to set, leaving the tubes to dry in the sun. The ironstone I saw was quite heavy, dull red with grayish flecks, broken into pieces about the size of a hen’s egg. A bundle of dry wood was placed in the furnace and covered with a good amount of charcoal, which had been pre-burned from the woods. Then they added a layer of ironstone followed by another layer of charcoal, continuing this until the furnace was completely full. They lit the fire through one of the tubes and used bellows made of goat skins to fan the flames. The process began slowly, and it took hours before flames appeared above the furnace; but once they did, the fire burned fiercely all through the first night, with the workers occasionally adding more charcoal. The following day, the fire wasn’t as intense, and on the second night, some tubes were removed to allow more air into the furnace; yet the heat remained substantial, sending a bluish flame several feet above the top. On the third day, all the tubes were taken out, many of their ends melted by the heat; however, they didn't remove the metal until several days later when everything had cooled down completely. After taking down part of the furnace, the iron was revealed as a large irregular mass with bits of charcoal sticking to it. It rang out when struck, and any broken pieces showed a grainy texture, similar to broken steel. The owner told me that parts of this mass were not usable, but there was still enough good iron to make it worth his effort. This iron, or more accurately, steel, is shaped into various tools by being repeatedly heated in a forge, which uses double bellows made of goat skins; the tubes join before entering the forge to provide a steady and regular blast of air. The hammer, tongs, and anvil are quite simple, and the craftsmanship (especially for knives and spears) is commendable. The iron is tough and brittle, requiring considerable effort to work it effectively.
Such is the chief information I obtained concerning the present state of arts and manufactures in those regions of Africa which I explored in my journey. I might add, though it is scarce worthy observation, that in Bambarra and Kaarta the natives make very beautiful baskets, hats, and other articles, both for use and ornament, from rushes, which they stain of different colours; and they contrive also to cover their calabashes with interwoven cane, dyed in the same manner.
This is the main information I gathered about the current state of arts and crafts in the regions of Africa that I explored during my journey. I should mention, though it’s not particularly noteworthy, that in Bambarra and Kaarta, the local people create very beautiful baskets, hats, and other items for practical use and decoration from rushes, which they dye different colors. They also manage to cover their calabashes with woven cane, dyed in the same way.
CHAPTER XXII.
War and Slavery.
A state of subordination and certain inequalities of rank and condition are inevitable in every stage of civil society; but when the subordination is carried to so great a length that the persons and services of one part of the community are entirely at the disposal of another part, it may then be denominated a state of slavery, and in this condition of life a great body of the negro inhabitants of Africa have continued from the most early period of their history, with this aggravation, that their children are born to no other inheritance.
A situation where some people are subordinate and there are certain inequalities in social rank and status is unavoidable in every phase of civil society. However, when this subordination reaches a point where one group’s people and labor are completely under the control of another group, it can be called a state of slavery. A significant number of the black inhabitants of Africa have been in this condition since the earliest times in their history, with the added burden that their children inherit this same status.
The slaves in Africa, I suppose, are nearly in the proportion of three to one to the freemen. They claim no reward for their services except food and clothing, and are treated with kindness or severity, according to the good or bad disposition of their masters. Custom, however, has established certain rules with regard to the treatment of slaves, which it is thought dishonourable to violate. Thus the domestic slaves, or such as are born in a man’s own house, are treated with more lenity than those which are purchased with money. The authority of the master over the domestic slave, as I have elsewhere observed, extends only to reasonable correction; for the master cannot sell his domestic, without having first brought him to a public trial before the chief men of the place. But these restrictions on the power of the master extend not to the case of prisoners taken in war, nor to that of slaves purchased with money. All these unfortunate beings are considered as strangers and foreigners, who have no right to the protection of the law, and may be treated with severity, or sold to a stranger, according to the pleasure of their owners. There are, indeed, regular markets, where slaves of this description are bought and sold, and the value of a slave, in the eye of an African purchaser, increases in proportion to his distance from his native kingdom: for when slaves are only a few days’ journey from the place of their nativity they frequently effect their escape; but when one or more kingdoms intervene, escape being more difficult, they are more readily reconciled to their situation. On this account the unhappy slave is frequently transferred from one dealer to another, until he has lost all hopes of returning to his native kingdom. The slaves which are purchased by the Europeans on the coast are chiefly of this description. A few of them are collected in the petty wars, hereafter to be described, which take place near the coast, but by far the greater number are brought down in large caravans from the inland countries, of which many are unknown, even by name, to the Europeans. The slaves which are thus brought from the interior may be divided into two distinct classes—first, such as were slaves from their birth, having been born of enslaved mothers; secondly, such as were born free, but who afterwards, by whatever means, became slaves. Those of the first description are by far the most numerous, for prisoners taken in war (at least such as are taken in open and declared war, when one kingdom avows hostilities against another) are generally of this description. The comparatively small proportion of free people to the enslaved throughout Africa has already been noticed: and it must be observed that men of free condition have many advantages over the slaves, even in war time. They are in general better armed, and well mounted, and can either fight or escape with some hopes of success; but the slaves, who have only their spears and bows, and of whom great numbers are loaded with baggage, become an easy prey. Thus when Mansong, king of Bambarra, made war upon Kaarta (as I have related in a former chapter), he took in one day nine hundred prisoners, of which number not more than seventy were freemen. This account I received from Daman Jumma, who had thirty slaves at Kemmoo, all of whom were made prisoners by Mansong. Again, when a freeman is taken prisoner his friends will sometimes ransom him by giving two slaves in exchange; but when a slave is taken, he has no hopes of such redemption. To these disadvantages, it is to be added that the slatees, who purchase slaves in the interior countries and carry them down to the coast for sale, constantly prefer such as have been in that condition of life from their infancy, well knowing that these have been accustomed to hunger and fatigue, and are better able to sustain the hardships of a long and painful journey than freemen; and on their reaching the coast, if no opportunity offers of selling them to advantage, they can easily be made to maintain themselves by their labour; neither are they so apt to attempt making their escape as those who have once tasted the blessings of freedom.
The slaves in Africa, I believe, are roughly three times more numerous than the free people. They ask for no payment for their labor aside from food and clothing, and they're treated with kindness or harshness depending on their masters' attitudes. However, customs have established certain rules for how slaves should be treated, which people generally consider dishonorable to ignore. Domestic slaves, or those born in a person's household, are treated more leniently than those bought with money. The authority of the master over a domestic slave, as I've stated before, only allows for reasonable punishment; the master cannot sell his domestic slave without first bringing him to a public trial in front of the local leaders. But these restrictions do not apply to war captives or to slaves bought with money. These unfortunate individuals are treated as outsiders and do not have legal protections. They can face harsh treatment or be sold to someone else, depending on their owners' wishes. There are actually regular markets where these slaves are bought and sold, and for an African buyer, a slave's value increases the farther he is from his home kingdom; when slaves are within a few days’ journey from where they were born, they often manage to escape. But when one or more kingdoms separate them from home, making escape harder, they become more resigned to their situation. This often leads to the tragic transfer of slaves from one dealer to another until they lose all hope of returning to their homeland. The slaves Europeans purchase on the coast mostly fall into this category. A few are captured in minor wars near the coast, but most are transported in large groups from the interior regions, many of which are unknown to Europeans, even by name. The slaves brought from inland can be divided into two groups: first, those who were enslaved from birth, being born to enslaved mothers; second, those who were born free but later became slaves for various reasons. The first group is far more numerous, as prisoners of war (especially from openly declared conflicts) usually belong to this category. The small number of free people compared to enslaved individuals throughout Africa has been noted, and it should be mentioned that free men have several advantages over slaves, even during wartime. They are generally better armed and mounted, better able to fight or escape with a chance of success; however, slaves, armed only with spears and bows, and often burdened with baggage, are an easy target. For example, when Mansong, the king of Bambarra, waged war against Kaarta (as I mentioned in a previous chapter), he captured nine hundred prisoners in one day, of which only seventy were free individuals. I learned this from Daman Jumma, who had thirty slaves at Kemmoo, all of whom were captured by Mansong. Furthermore, when a free man is taken captive, his friends might sometimes ransom him by offering two slaves in return; however, a slave has no chance of such redemption. Additionally, slatees, who buy slaves from the interior and transport them to the coast for sale, consistently prefer those who have been slaves since infancy because these individuals are used to hunger and hard work, making them better suited for the long and grueling journey. Upon reaching the coast, if there’s no chance to sell them profitably, they can easily be put to work to support themselves, and they are less likely to try to escape compared to those who have previously experienced freedom.
Slaves of the second description generally become such by one or other of the following causes:—1, captivity; 2, famine; 3, insolvency; 4, crimes. A freeman may, by the established customs of Africa, become a slave by being taken in war. War is of all others the most productive source, and was probably the origin, of slavery; for when one nation had taken from another a greater number of captives than could be exchanged on equal terms, it is natural to suppose that the conquerors, finding it inconvenient to maintain their prisoners, would compel them to labour—at first, perhaps, only for their own support, but afterwards to support their masters. Be this as it may, it is a known fact that prisoners of war in Africa are the slaves of the conquerors; and when the weak or unsuccessful warrior begs for mercy beneath the uplifted spear of his opponent, he gives up at the same time his claim to liberty, and purchases his life at the expense of his freedom.
Slaves of the second type usually become such due to one of the following reasons: 1, being captured; 2, famine; 3, bankruptcy; 4, crimes. A free person can, according to established customs in Africa, become a slave if they are taken in war. War is by far the most common source of slavery and likely its origin; when one nation captures more people from another than can be exchanged fairly, it’s reasonable to assume that the conquerors, finding it difficult to care for their captives, would force them to work—initially, perhaps, just to meet their own needs, but eventually to support their masters. Regardless, it’s a well-known fact that prisoners of war in Africa become the slaves of their captors, and when a defeated or weak warrior pleads for mercy under the threat of their opponent’s weapon, they simultaneously give up their claim to freedom and trade their liberty for the chance to stay alive.
In a country divided into a thousand petty states, mostly independent and jealous of each other, where every freeman is accustomed to arms and fond of military achievements, where the youth, who has practised the bow and spear from his infancy, longs for nothing so much as an opportunity to display his valour, it is natural to imagine that wars frequently originate from very frivolous provocation. When one nation is more powerful than another, pretext is seldom wanting for commencing hostilities. Thus the war between Kajaaga and Kasson was occasioned by the detention of a fugitive slave; that between Bambarra and Kaarta by the loss of a few cattle. Other cases of the same nature perpetually occur in which the folly or mad ambition of their princes and the zeal of their religious enthusiasts give full employment to the scythe of desolation.
In a country split into a thousand small states, mostly independent and wary of each other, where every free citizen is trained in combat and loves military success, where the youth, who have practiced with the bow and spear since childhood, crave nothing more than a chance to show their bravery, it's understandable that wars often start from very trivial reasons. When one nation is stronger than another, there's usually no shortage of excuses to start fighting. For example, the war between Kajaaga and Kasson was triggered by the capture of a runaway slave; the conflict between Bambarra and Kaarta started over the loss of some cattle. Similar situations regularly arise where the foolishness or reckless ambition of their leaders and the fervor of their religious fanatics keep the forces of destruction busy.
The wars of Africa are of two kinds, which are distinguished by different appellations; that species which bears the greatest resemblance to our European contests is denominated killi, a word signifying “to call out,” because such wars are openly avowed and previously declared. Wars of this description in Africa commonly terminate, however, in the course of a single campaign. A battle is fought—the vanquished seldom think of rallying again—the whole inhabitants become panic-struck, and the conquerors have only to bind the slaves and carry off their plunder and their victims. Such of the prisoners as, through age or infirmity, are unable to endure fatigue, or are found unfit for sale, are considered as useless, and, I have no doubt, are frequently put to death. The same fate commonly awaits a chief or any other person who has taken a very distinguished part in the war. And here it may be observed that, notwithstanding this exterminating system, it is surprising to behold how soon an African town is rebuilt and repeopled. The circumstance arises probably from this: that their pitched battles are few—the weakest know their own situation, and seek safety in flight. When their country has been desolated, and their ruined towns and villages deserted by the enemy, such of the inhabitants as have escaped the sword and the chain generally return, though with cautious steps, to the place of their nativity—for it seems to be the universal wish of mankind to spend the evening of their days where they passed their infancy. The poor negro feels this desire in its full force. To him no water is sweet but what is drawn from his own well, and no tree has so cool and pleasant a shade as the tabba tree [104] of his native village. When war compels him to abandon the delightful spot in which he first drew his breath, and seek for safety in some other kingdom, his time is spent in talking about the country of his ancestors; and no sooner is peace restored than he turns his back upon the land of strangers, rebuilds with haste his fallen walls, and exults to see the smoke ascend from his native village.
The wars in Africa come in two forms, which are known by different names; the type that resembles our European conflicts is called killi, which means "to call out," because these wars are openly acknowledged and announced in advance. These kinds of wars in Africa usually wrap up after just one campaign. A battle happens—the defeated rarely think of regrouping—the entire population panics, and the winners just need to capture the slaves and take their loot and captives. Those prisoners who, due to age or illness, can't endure the strain or are deemed unfit for sale are seen as worthless, and I'm sure they are often executed. The same fate often befalls a chief or anyone else who played a significant role in the war. It’s worth noting that, despite this brutal system, it's surprising how quickly an African town can be rebuilt and repopulated. This likely happens because their major battles are infrequent—the weaker ones know their position and flee for safety. When their land has been ravaged and their destroyed towns and villages abandoned by the enemy, those survivors who have escaped the sword and the chain usually return, albeit cautiously, to their birthplace—it's a common human desire to spend one’s later years where one grew up. This feeling is especially strong for the African. For him, no water tastes as sweet as that from his own well, and no tree provides cooler, more pleasant shade than the tabba tree [104] of his hometown. When war forces him to leave the cherished place of his birth in search of safety in another land, he spends his time reminiscing about his ancestors' country; and as soon as peace returns, he turns away from foreign lands, quickly rebuilds his fallen walls, and rejoices to see the smoke rising from his village once more.
The other species of African warfare is distinguished by the appellation of tegria (plundering, or stealing). It arises from a sort of hereditary feud which the inhabitants of one nation or district bear towards another. No immediate cause of hostility is assigned, or notice of attack given, but the inhabitants of each watch every opportunity to plunder and distress the objects of their animosity by predatory excursions. These are very common, particularly about the beginning of the dry season, when the labour of the harvest is over and provisions are plentiful. Schemes of vengeance are then meditated. The chief man surveys the number and activity of his vassals as they brandish their spears at festivals, and, elated with his own importance, turns his whole thoughts towards revenging some depredation or insult which either he or his ancestors may have received from a neighbouring state.
The other type of African warfare is called tegria (plundering or stealing). It comes from a kind of long-standing feud that the people of one nation or area have against another. There isn't a specific reason for their hostility or any warning before an attack, but each group looks for every chance to loot and harm their rivals through surprise raids. This is especially common around the start of the dry season when the harvest is complete and food is abundant. Plans for revenge are then formed. The leader observes the number and energy of his followers as they wave their spears at festivals, feeling proud and focused entirely on avenging some theft or insult that he or his ancestors may have suffered from a neighboring state.
Wars of this description are generally conducted with great secrecy. A few resolute individuals, headed by some person of enterprise and courage, march quietly through the woods, surprise in the night some unprotected village, and carry off the inhabitants and their effects before their neighbours can come to their assistance. One morning during my stay at Kamalia we were all much alarmed by a party of this kind. The king of Fooladoo’s son, with five hundred horsemen, passed secretly through the woods a little to the southward of Kamalia, and on the morning following plundered three towns belonging to Madigai, a powerful chief in Jallonkadoo.
Wars like this are typically carried out with a lot of secrecy. A small group of determined individuals, led by someone brave and resourceful, quietly move through the woods, and under the cover of night, they surprise an unprotected village, taking the residents and their belongings before anyone can help. One morning while I was in Kamalia, we were all quite alarmed by a group like this. The son of the king of Fooladoo, with five hundred horsemen, secretly passed through the woods just south of Kamalia, and the following morning, they raided three towns belonging to Madigai, a powerful chief in Jallonkadoo.
The success of this expedition encouraged the governor of Bangassi, a town in Fooladoo, to make a second inroad upon another part of the same country. Having assembled about two hundred of his people, he passed the river Kokoro in the night, and carried off a great number of prisoners. Several of the inhabitants who had escaped these attacks were afterwards seized by the Mandingoes as they wandered about in the woods or concealed themselves in the glens and strong places of the mountains.
The success of this expedition encouraged the governor of Bangassi, a town in Fooladoo, to launch a second assault on another part of the same country. After gathering around two hundred of his people, he crossed the Kokoro River at night and took a large number of prisoners. Several of the locals who managed to escape these attacks were later captured by the Mandingoes as they roamed the woods or hid in the valleys and strongholds of the mountains.
These plundering excursions always produced speedy retaliation: and when large parties cannot be collected for this purpose, a few friends will combine together and advance into the enemy’s country, with a view to plunder or carry off the inhabitants. A single individual has been known to take his bow and quiver and proceed in like manner. Such an attempt is doubtless in him an act of rashness; but when it is considered that in one of these predatory wars he has probably been deprived of his child or his nearest relation, his situation will rather call for pity than censure. The poor sufferer, urged on by the feelings of domestic or paternal attachment and the ardour of revenge, conceals himself among the bushes until some young or unarmed person passes by. He then, tiger-like, springs upon his prey, drags his victim into the thicket, and in the night carries him off as a slave.
These raiding trips always led to quick retaliation: and when large groups can’t be gathered for this purpose, a few friends will team up and venture into enemy territory, aiming to steal or capture the locals. One person has been known to grab his bow and quiver and do the same. This kind of action might seem reckless, but considering that he might have lost a child or close relative in one of these predatory wars, his situation deserves sympathy rather than judgment. The poor victim, driven by feelings of family ties or a desire for revenge, hides in the bushes until a young or unarmed person walks by. Then, like a tiger, he pounces on his target, drags them into the underbrush, and under the cover of night, takes them away as a slave.
When a negro has, by means like these, once fallen into the hands of his enemies, he is either retained as the slave of his conqueror, or bartered into a distant kingdom; for an African, when he has once subdued his enemy, will seldom give him an opportunity of lifting up his hand against him at a future period. A conqueror commonly disposes of his captives according to the rank which they held in their native kingdom. Such of the domestic slaves as appear to be of a mild disposition, and particularly the young women, are retained as his own slaves. Others that display marks of discontent are disposed of in a distant country; and such of the freemen or slaves as have taken an active part in the war are either sold to the slatees or put to death. War, therefore, is certainly the most general and most productive source of slavery, and the desolations of war often (but not always) produce the second cause of slavery, famine; in which case a freeman becomes a slave to avoid a greater calamity.
When a Black person has, through means like these, fallen into the hands of their enemies, they are either kept as the slave of their conqueror or sold off to a distant land. An African, once they have defeated their enemy, will rarely give them a chance to retaliate in the future. A conqueror usually decides what to do with their captives based on the status they held in their home kingdom. Those domestic slaves who seem to have a gentle nature, especially the young women, are kept as personal slaves. Others who show signs of discontent are sold to a faraway place, while freemen or slaves who actively participated in the war are either sold to the traders or executed. Therefore, war is clearly the most widespread and significant source of slavery, and the destruction brought by war often (but not always) leads to the second cause of slavery, famine; in this situation, a freeman becomes a slave to escape a worse disaster.
Perhaps, by a philosophic and reflecting mind, death itself would scarcely be considered as a greater calamity than slavery; but the poor negro, when fainting with hunger, thinks like Esau of old, “Behold, I am at the point to die, and what profit shall this birthright do to me?” There are many instances of freemen voluntarily surrendering up their liberty to save their lives. During a great scarcity, which lasted for three years, in the countries of the Gambia, great numbers of people became slaves in this manner. Dr. Laidley assured me that at that time many freemen came and begged, with great earnestness, to be put upon his slave-chain, to save them from perishing of hunger. Large families are very often exposed to absolute want; and as the parents have almost unlimited authority over their children, it frequently happens, in all parts of Africa, that some of the latter are sold to purchase provisions for the rest of the family. When I was at Jarra, Daman Jumma pointed out to me three young slaves whom he had purchased in this manner. I have already related another instance which I saw at Wonda; and I was informed that in Fooladoo, at that time, it was a very common practice.
Perhaps, for a thoughtful and reflective person, death itself wouldn’t be seen as a worse fate than slavery; however, the struggling Black person, when weak from hunger, thinks like Esau of old, “Look, I’m about to die, and what good is this birthright to me?” There are many cases of free people willingly giving up their freedom to save their lives. During a severe shortage that lasted three years in the Gambia region, many people became slaves this way. Dr. Laidley told me that at that time, many free individuals came and earnestly begged to be put on his slave-chain to avoid starving. Large families often face extreme hunger; and since parents have almost limitless control over their children, it frequently happens, in all parts of Africa, that some children are sold to buy food for the rest of the family. When I was at Jarra, Daman Jumma pointed out to me three young slaves he had bought this way. I have already shared another example I witnessed at Wonda; and I was told that in Fooladoo, it was a very widespread practice at that time.
The third cause of slavery is insolvency. Of all the offences (if insolvency may be so called) to which the laws of Africa have affixed the punishment of slavery, this is the most common. A negro trader commonly contracts debts on some mercantile speculation, either from his neighbours, to purchase such articles as will sell to advantage in a distant market, or from the European traders on the coast—payment to be made in a given time. In both cases the situation of the adventurer is exactly the same. If he succeeds, he may secure an independency: if he is unsuccessful, his person and services are at the disposal of another; for in Africa, not only the effects of the insolvent, but even the insolvent himself, is sold to satisfy the lawful demands of his creditors. [109]
The third cause of slavery is insolvency. Of all the offenses (if you can call insolvency that) that the laws of Africa have deemed punishable by slavery, this is the most common. A Black trader often takes on debt for a business opportunity, either borrowing from his neighbors to buy goods that can be sold profitably in a distant market or from European traders on the coast, with payment due at a specific time. In both situations, the trader's circumstances are exactly the same. If he succeeds, he may achieve independence; if he fails, his person and labor are controlled by someone else, because in Africa, not only the assets of the insolvent but even the insolvent individual themselves are sold to meet the legitimate claims of their creditors. [109]
The fourth cause above enumerated is, the commission of crimes on which the laws of the country affix slavery as a punishment. In Africa the only offences of this class are murder, adultery, and witchcraft, and I am happy to say that they did not appear to me to be common. In cases of murder, I was informed that the nearest relation of the deceased had it in his power, after conviction, either to kill the offender with his own hand or sell him into slavery. When adultery occurs, it is generally left to the option of the person injured either to sell the culprit or accept such a ransom for him as he may think equivalent to the injury he has sustained. By witchcraft is meant pretended magic, by which the lives or healths of persons are affected; in other words, it is the administering of poison. No trial for this offence, however, came under my observation while I was in Africa, and I therefore suppose that the crime and its punishment occur but very seldom.
The fourth reason listed is, the commission of crimes for which the country’s laws impose slavery as punishment. In Africa, the only offenses that fall into this category are murder, adultery, and witchcraft, and I'm pleased to say that they didn't seem to be common. In murder cases, I was told that the closest relative of the victim could either kill the offender themselves after the conviction or sell them into slavery. When adultery happens, it's usually up to the wronged person to either sell the offender or accept a ransom they think is fair for the harm they've suffered. Witchcraft refers to fake magic that affects people's lives or health; in other words, it's the act of poisoning someone. However, I didn’t witness any trials for this offense while I was in Africa, so I assume that the crime and its punishment are very rare.
When a freeman has become a slave by any one of the causes before mentioned, he generally continues so for life, and his children (if they are born of an enslaved mother) are brought up in the same state of servitude. There are, however, a few instances of slaves obtaining their freedom, and sometimes even with the consent of their masters, as by performing some singular piece of service, or by going to battle and bringing home two slaves as a ransom; but the common way of regaining freedom is by escape, and when slaves have once set their minds on running away they often succeed. Some of them will wait for years before an opportunity presents itself, and during that period show no signs of discontent. In general, it may be remarked that slaves who come from a hilly country and have been much accustomed to hunting and travel, are more apt to attempt to make their escape than such as are born in a flat country and have been employed in cultivating the land.
When a free person becomes a slave for any of the reasons mentioned earlier, they usually remain a slave for life, and their children (if born to an enslaved mother) are raised in the same condition of servitude. However, there are a few cases where slaves gain their freedom, sometimes even with their masters' approval, such as by performing an extraordinary service or by going into battle and bringing back two slaves as a ransom. The most common way to regain freedom is through escape, and once slaves decide to run away, they often succeed. Some will wait for years for the right opportunity to present itself, showing no signs of unhappiness during that time. Generally, it's noted that slaves from hilly regions who are used to hunting and traveling are more likely to try to escape than those born in flat areas who have worked the land.
Such are the general outlines of that system of slavery which prevails in Africa, and it is evident, from its nature and extent, that it is a system of no modern date. It probably had its origin in the remote ages of antiquity, before the Mohammedans explored a path across the desert. How far it is maintained and supported by the slave traffic which for two hundred years the nations of Europe have carried on with the natives of the coast, it is neither within my province nor in my power to explain. If my sentiments should be required concerning the effect which a discontinuance of that commerce would produce on the manners of the natives, I should have no hesitation in observing that, in the present unenlightened state of their minds, my opinion is, the effect would neither be so extensive nor beneficial as many wise and worthy persons fondly expect.
These are the general outlines of the system of slavery that exists in Africa, and it's clear from its nature and extent that it's not a recent development. It likely originated in ancient times, long before the Muslims traveled across the desert. How much it is maintained and supported by the slave trade that European nations have conducted with the coastal natives for two hundred years is beyond my scope or ability to explain. If asked about the impact that ending this trade would have on the behavior of the natives, I would confidently assert that, given their current unenlightened mindset, I believe the impact would not be as significant or beneficial as many wise and well-meaning individuals hope for.
CHAPTER XXIII.
Gold and ivory.
Those valuable commodities, gold and ivory (the next objects of our inquiry), have probably been found in Africa from the first ages of the world. They are reckoned among its most important productions in the earliest records of its history.
Those valuable commodities, gold and ivory (the next items we’ll explore), have likely been discovered in Africa since the dawn of time. They are considered some of the most significant products in the earliest accounts of its history.
It has been observed that gold is seldom or never discovered except in mountainous and barren countries—nature, it is said, thus making amends in one way for her penuriousness in the other. This, however, is not wholly true. Gold is found in considerable quantities throughout every part of Manding, a country which is indeed hilly, but cannot properly be called mountainous, much less barren. It is also found in great plenty in Jallonkadoo (particularly about Boori), another hilly, but by no means an unfertile, country. It is remarkable that in the place last mentioned (Boori), which is situated about four days’ journey to the south-west of Kamalia, the salt market is often supplied at the same time with rock-salt from the Great Desert and sea-salt from the Rio Grande; the price of each, at this distance from its source, being nearly the same. And the dealers in each, whether Moors from the north or negroes from the west, are invited thither by the same motives—that of bartering their salt for gold.
It has been noted that gold is rarely or never found except in mountainous and barren areas—nature, it seems, compensates for poverty in one way by providing wealth in another. However, this isn't entirely accurate. Gold can be found in significant amounts throughout Manding, a country that is indeed hilly, but can't really be described as mountainous, let alone barren. It is also abundant in Jallonkadoo (especially around Boori), another hilly area, but certainly not an infertile one. Notably, in the aforementioned place (Boori), located about four days' journey southwest of Kamalia, the salt market is often supplied simultaneously with rock salt from the Great Desert and sea salt from the Rio Grande; the price of each, despite their distance from the source, is nearly the same. The merchants involved, whether they are Moors from the north or Africans from the west, are drawn there by the same reason—that is, to trade their salt for gold.
The gold of Manding, so far as I could learn, is never found in any matrix or vein, but always in small grains nearly in a pure state, from the size of a pin’s head to that of a pea, scattered through a large body of sand or clay, and in this state it is called by the Mandingoes sanoo munko (gold powder). It is, however, extremely probable, by what I could learn of the situation of the ground, that most of it has originally been washed down by repeated torrents from the neighbouring hills. The manner in which it is collected is nearly as follows:—
The gold of Manding, from what I could gather, is never found in any rock or vein, but always in small grains that are almost pure, ranging in size from a pin’s head to a pea, scattered through a large amount of sand or clay. In this form, the Mandingoes call it sanoo munko (gold powder). However, it’s very likely, based on what I discovered about the area, that most of it has been washed down by heavy rains from the nearby hills. The method for collecting it is generally as follows:—
About the beginning of December, when the harvest is over and the streams and torrents have greatly subsided, the mansa or chief of the town appoints a day to begin sanoo koo (gold-washing), and the women are sure to have themselves in readiness by the time appointed. A hoe or spade for digging up the sand, two or three calabashes for washing it in, and a few quills for containing the gold dust, are all the implements necessary for the purpose. On the morning of their departure a bullock is killed for the first day’s entertainment, and a number of prayers and charms are used to insure success, for a failure on that day is thought a bad omen.
About the beginning of December, when the harvest is wrapped up and the streams and rivers have calmed down, the mansa, or leader of the town, picks a day to start sanoo koo (gold-washing), and the women make sure they are ready by then. All they need are a hoe or spade for digging up sand, two or three calabashes for washing it in, and a few quills for holding the gold dust. On the morning of their departure, a bullocks is slaughtered for the first day's festivities, and a bunch of prayers and charms are performed to ensure success because a failure that day is seen as a bad sign.
The mansa of Kamalia, with fourteen of his people, were, I remember, so much disappointed in their first day’s washing that very few of them had resolution to persevere, and the few that did had but very indifferent success: which indeed is not much to be wondered at, for instead of opening some untried place they continued to dig and wash in the same spot where they had dug and washed for years, and where, of course, but few large grains could be left.
The mansa of Kamalia and fourteen of his people were, as I recall, really disappointed with their first day of washing. Very few of them had the determination to keep going, and those who did didn’t have much success. It’s not surprising, though, because instead of trying a new location, they kept digging and washing in the same spot where they had been for years, where, naturally, there were hardly any large grains left.
The washing of the sands of the streams is by far the easiest way of obtaining the gold dust; but in most places the sands have been so narrowly searched before, that unless the stream takes some new course the gold is found but in small quantities. While some of the party are busied in washing the sands, others employ themselves farther up the torrent, where the rapidity of the stream has carried away all the clay, sand, etc., and left nothing but small pebbles. The search among these is a very troublesome task. I have seen women who have had the skin worn off the tops of their fingers in this employment. Sometimes, however, they are rewarded by finding pieces of gold, which they call sanoo birro (gold stones), that amply repay them for their trouble. A woman and her daughter, inhabitants of Kamalia, found in one day two pieces of this kind; one of five drachms and the other of three drachms weight. But the most certain and profitable mode of washing is practised in the height of the dry season, by digging a deep pit, like a draw-well, near some hill which has previously been discovered to contain gold. The pit is dug with small spades or corn-hoes, and the earth is drawn up in large calabashes. As the negroes dig through the different strata of clay or sand, a calabash or two of each is washed by way of experiment; and in this manner the labourers proceed, until they come to a stratum containing gold, or until they are obstructed by rocks, or inundated by water. In general, when they come to a stratum of fine reddish sand, with small black specks therein, they find gold in some proportion or other, and send up large calabashes full of the sand for the women to wash; for though the pit is dug by the men, the gold is always washed by the women, who are accustomed from their infancy to a similar operation in separating the husks of corn from the meal.
Washing the sands of the streams is definitely the easiest way to get gold dust; however, in most places, the sands have been searched so thoroughly before that unless the stream changes its course, the gold is typically found in only small amounts. While some members of the group are busy washing the sands, others work further up the stream, where the fast-moving water has washed away all the clay, sand, and so on, leaving just small pebbles. Searching through these is a really challenging task. I’ve seen women who have worn the skin off the tops of their fingers doing this work. Sometimes, though, they’re rewarded with pieces of gold, which they call sanoo birro (gold stones), that definitely make it worth their effort. One day, a woman and her daughter from Kamalia found two pieces like this; one weighed five drachms and the other three drachms. But the most reliable and profitable method of washing happens during the peak of the dry season, where they dig a deep pit, like a well, near a hill that’s been discovered to have gold. The pit is dug with small spades or corn hoes, and the earth is pulled up in large calabashes. As the workers dig through different layers of clay or sand, they wash a calabash or two from each layer as a test; this way, they work until they reach a layer with gold or until they hit rocks or are flooded with water. Generally, when they reach a layer of fine reddish sand with small black specks in it, they find gold to some degree and send up large calabashes full of sand for the women to wash; even though the men dig the pit, the women always wash the gold, as they’ve been doing similar tasks since childhood to separate corn husks from the meal.
As I never descended into any one of these pits, I cannot say in what manner they are worked underground. Indeed, the situation in which I was placed made it necessary for me to be cautious not to incur the suspicion of the natives by examining too far into the riches of their country; but the manner of separating the gold from the sand is very simple, and is frequently performed by the women in the middle of the town; for when the searchers return, from the valleys in the evening, they commonly bring with them each a calabash or two of sand, to be washed by such of the females as remain at home. The operation is simply as follows:—
As I never went down into any of these pits, I can't say how they work underground. In fact, my situation required me to be careful not to raise the suspicions of the locals by probing too deeply into the wealth of their land. However, the way they separate gold from sand is quite straightforward, and it's often done by the women in the town center. When the miners come back from the valleys in the evening, they usually bring one or two calabashes of sand to be washed by the women who are at home. The process is simply as follows:—
A portion of sand or clay (for the gold is sometimes found in a brown-coloured clay) is put into a large calabash and mixed with a sufficient quantity of water. The woman whose office it is, then shakes the calabash in such a manner as to mix the sand and water together, and give the whole a rotatory motion—at first gently, but afterwards more quickly, until a small portion of sand and water, at every revolution, flies over the brim of the calabash. The sand thus separated is only the coarsest particles mixed with a little muddy water. After the operation has been continued for some time, the sand is allowed to subside, and the water poured off; a portion of coarse sand, which is now uppermost in the calabash, is removed by the hand, and, fresh water being added, the operation is repeated until the water comes off almost pure. The woman now takes a second calabash, and shakes the sand and water gently from the one to the other, reserving that portion of sand which is next the bottom of the calabash, and which is most likely to contain the gold. This small quantity is mixed with some pure water, and, being moved about in the calabash, is carefully examined. If a few particles of gold are picked out, the contents of the other calabash are examined in the same manner, but in general the party is well contented if she can obtain three or four grains from the contents of both calabashes. Some women, however, by long practice, become so well acquainted with the nature of the sand, and the mode of washing it, that they will collect gold where others cannot find a single particle. The gold dust is kept in quills stopped up with cotton; and the washers are fond of displaying a number of these quills in their hair. Generally speaking, if a person uses common diligence in a proper soil, it is supposed that as much gold may be collected by him in the course of the dry season as is equal to the value of two slaves.
A portion of sand or clay (since gold is sometimes found in a brownish clay) is placed into a large calabash and mixed with enough water. The woman in charge then shakes the calabash to combine the sand and water, giving it a rotary motion—starting slowly and then speeding up, until some sand and water splash over the edge of the calabash with each turn. The sand that separates is just the coarsest particles mixed with a bit of muddy water. After this process continues for a while, the sand is left to settle, and the water is poured off; a portion of coarse sand that is now on top of the calabash is removed by hand. Fresh water is added, and the process is repeated until the water is almost clear. The woman then takes a second calabash and gently shakes the sand and water from one to the other, keeping the sand that’s closest to the bottom of the first calabash, as it’s most likely to contain gold. This small quantity is mixed with some clean water, and while being moved around in the calabash, is carefully inspected. If a few gold particles are found, the contents of the second calabash are checked in the same way. Generally, the woman is satisfied if she can collect three or four grains from both calabashes. Some women, however, become so skilled through practice that they can find gold where others can't find a single speck. The gold dust is stored in quills sealed with cotton, and the washers like to show off a number of these quills in their hair. Overall, if someone puts in a decent amount of effort in the right kind of soil, it's believed that they can collect as much gold during the dry season as would be worth two slaves.
Thus simple is the process by which the negroes obtain gold in Manding; and it is evident from this account that the country contains a considerable portion of this precious metal, for many of the smaller particles must necessarily escape the observation of the naked eye; and as the natives generally search the sands of streams at a considerable distance from the hills, and consequently far removed from the mines where the gold was originally produced, the labourers are sometimes but ill-paid for their trouble. Minute particles only of this heavy metal can be carried by the current to any considerable distance; the larger must remain deposited near the original source from whence they came. Were the gold-bearing streams to be traced to their fountains, and the hills from whence they spring properly examined, the sand in which the gold is there deposited would no doubt be found to contain particles of a much larger size; and even the small grains might be collected to considerable advantage by the use of quicksilver and other improvements, with which the natives are at present unacquainted.
The process by which the people in Manding get gold is quite simple. It's clear from this description that the area has a lot of this valuable metal, as many small pieces likely escape the notice of the naked eye. Since the locals usually search the riverbanks far from the hills, they end up far away from the original mines where the gold comes from, so sometimes the workers don't get paid well for their efforts. Only tiny bits of this heavy metal can be carried away by the current over long distances; larger pieces tend to stay close to their original source. If the gold-bearing rivers were traced back to their sources, and the hills where they start were properly examined, the sand there would likely include much larger particles. Even the small grains could be collected more effectively with the use of mercury and other advancements that the locals aren't familiar with yet.
Part of this gold is converted into ornaments for the women, but in general these ornaments are more to be admired for their weight than their workmanship. They are massy and inconvenient, particularly the earrings, which are commonly so heavy as to pull down and lacerate the lobe of the ear; to avoid which, they are supported by a thong of red leather, which passes over the crown of the head from one ear to the other. The necklace displays greater fancy, and the proper arrangement of the different beads and plates of gold is the great criterion of taste and elegance. When a lady of consequence is in full dress, her gold ornaments may be worth altogether from fifty to eighty pounds sterling.
Part of this gold is turned into jewelry for the women, but overall, these pieces are appreciated more for their weight than for their craftsmanship. They are bulky and uncomfortable, especially the earrings, which are often so heavy that they stretch and damage the earlobe. To prevent this, they are held up by a strap of red leather that goes over the top of the head from one ear to the other. The necklace shows more creativity, and the proper arrangement of different beads and gold plates is a big indicator of style and sophistication. When an important woman is fully dressed, her gold jewelry can be worth anywhere from fifty to eighty pounds sterling.
A small quantity of gold is likewise employed by the slatees in defraying the expenses of their journeys to and from the coast, but by far the greater proportion is annually carried away by the Moors in exchange for salt and other merchandise. During my stay at Kamalia, the gold collected by the different traders at that place for salt alone was nearly equal to one hundred and ninety-eight pounds sterling; and as Kamalia is but a small town, and not much resorted to by the trading Moors, this quantity must have borne a very small proportion to the gold collected at Kancaba, Kankaree, and some other large towns. The value of salt in this part of Africa is very great. One slab, about two feet and a half in length, fourteen inches in breadth, and two inches in thickness, will sometimes sell for about two pounds ten shillings sterling; and from one pound fifteen shillings to two pounds may be considered as the common price. Four of these slabs are considered as a load for an ass, and six for a bullock. The value of European merchandise in Manding varies very much according to the supply from the coast, or the dread of war in the country; but the return for such articles is commonly made in slaves. The price of a prime slave, when I was at Kamalia, was from twelve to nine minkallies, and European commodities had then nearly the following value:—
A small amount of gold is also used by the traders to cover their travel costs to and from the coast, but the majority is taken away each year by the Moors in exchange for salt and other goods. While I was in Kamalia, the gold collected by the various traders just for salt was almost equal to one hundred ninety-eight pounds sterling; and considering Kamalia is a small town not often visited by the trading Moors, this amount must be a small fraction of the gold collected in Kancaba, Kankaree, and a few other larger towns. The value of salt in this region of Africa is significant. One slab, roughly two and a half feet long, fourteen inches wide, and two inches thick, can sometimes sell for about two pounds ten shillings sterling; and one pound fifteen shillings to two pounds is generally the typical price. Four of these slabs are considered a load for a donkey, and six for an ox. The value of European goods in Manding varies greatly depending on the supply from the coast or the fear of war in the area; but returns for such items are usually made in slaves. The price for a prime slave when I was in Kamalia ranged from twelve to nine minkallies, and at that time, European goods had nearly the following value:—
18 gun-flints, 18 gun flints, 48 leaves of tobacco, 48 tobacco leaves, 20 charges of gunpowder, 20 charges of gunpowder, A cutlass, A machete, |
one minkalli. one minkalli. |
A musket, A firearm, |
from three to four minkallies. from three to four minks. |
The produce of the country and the different necessaries of life, when exchanged for gold, sold as follows:—
The country's produce and various necessities of life, when exchanged for gold, sold like this:—
Common provisions for one day, the weight of one teeleekissi (a black bean, six of which make the weight of one minkalli); a chicken, one teeleekissi; a sheep, three teeleekissi; a bullock, one minkalli; a horse, from ten to seventeen minkallies.
Common provisions for one day include the weight of one teeleekissi (a black bean, six of which equal the weight of one minkalli); a chicken weighs one teeleekissi; a sheep weighs three teeleekissi; a bullock weighs one minkalli; and a horse weighs between ten to seventeen minkallies.
The negroes weigh the gold in small balances, which they always carry about them. They make no difference, in point of value, between gold dust and wrought gold. In bartering one article for another, the person who receives the gold always weighs it with his own teeleekissi. These beans are sometimes fraudulently soaked in shea-butter to make them heavy, and I once saw a pebble ground exactly into the form of one of them; but such practices are not very common.
The Black people weigh gold with small scales that they always carry with them. They don’t distinguish between gold dust and solid gold in terms of value. When trading one item for another, the person receiving the gold always weighs it with their own scales. Sometimes, these weights are fraudulently soaked in shea butter to make them heavier, and I once saw a pebble shaped exactly like one of them; but such practices aren’t very common.
Having now related the substance of what occurs to my recollection concerning the African mode of obtaining gold from the earth, and its value in barter, I proceed to the next article of which I proposed to treat—namely, ivory.
Having now shared what I remember about how Africans extract gold from the ground and its value for trade, I’ll move on to the next topic I intended to discuss—specifically, ivory.
Nothing creates a greater surprise among the negroes on the sea-coast than the eagerness displayed by the European traders to procure elephants’ teeth, it being exceedingly difficult to make them comprehend to what use it is applied. Although they are shown knives with ivory handles, combs and toys of the same material, and are convinced that the ivory thus manufactured was originally parts of a tooth, they are not satisfied. They suspect that this commodity is more frequently converted in Europe to purposes of far greater importance, the true nature of which is studiously concealed from them, lest the price of ivory should be enhanced. They cannot, they say, easily persuade themselves that ships would be built and voyages undertaken to procure an article which had no other value than that of furnishing handles to knives, etc., when pieces of wood would answer the purpose equally well.
Nothing surprises the people on the coast more than the eagerness shown by European traders to get elephant tusks, as it's really hard for them to understand what they're used for. Even when they see knives with ivory handles, combs, and toys made from the same material, and realize that the ivory comes from a tooth, they're still not convinced. They suspect that this material is often used in Europe for much more significant purposes, which are carefully hidden from them to prevent the price of ivory from going up. They can't easily believe that ships are built and voyages are taken just to obtain something that only serves as handles for knives, etc., when pieces of wood would work just as well.
Elephants are very numerous in the interior of Africa, but they appear to be a distinct species from those found in Asia. Blumenbach, in his figures of objects of natural history, has given good drawings of a grinder of each, and the variation is evident. M. Cuvier also has given in the Magasin Encyclopédique a clear account of the difference between them. As I never examined the Asiatic elephant, I have chosen rather to refer to those writers than advance this as an opinion of my own. It has been said that the African elephant is of a less docile nature than the Asiatic, and incapable of being tamed. The negroes certainly do not at present tame them; but when we consider that the Carthaginians had always tame elephants in their armies, and actually transported some of them to Italy in the course of the Punic wars, it seems more likely that they should have possessed the art of taming their own elephants than have submitted to the expense of bringing such vast animals from Asia. Perhaps the barbarous practice of hunting the African elephants for the sake of their teeth has rendered them more untractable and savage than they were found to be in former times.
Elephants are quite common in the interior of Africa, but they seem to be a different species from those in Asia. Blumenbach, in his illustrations of natural history objects, has provided accurate drawings of a grinder from each, and the differences are clear. M. Cuvier also provides a detailed explanation of their distinctions in the Magasin Encyclopédique. Since I haven't examined the Asian elephant myself, I prefer to refer to those authors instead of putting forward my own opinion. It's been said that the African elephant is less docile than its Asian counterpart and not capable of being tamed. Currently, the locals don't tame them, but when we consider that the Carthaginians always had tamed elephants in their armies and even transported some to Italy during the Punic Wars, it seems more plausible that they had the skill to tame their own elephants rather than deal with the cost of bringing such large animals from Asia. Perhaps the cruel practice of hunting African elephants for their tusks has made them more untamed and aggressive than they used to be.
The greater part of the ivory which is sold on the Gambia and Senegal rivers is brought from the interior country. The lands towards the coast are too swampy and too much intersected with creeks and rivers for so bulky an animal as the elephant to travel through without being discovered; and when once the natives discern the marks of his feet in the earth, the whole village is up in arms. The thoughts of feasting on his flesh, making sandals of his hide, and selling the teeth to the Europeans, inspire every one with courage, and the animal seldom escapes from his pursuers; but in the plains of Bambarra and Kaarta, and the extensive wilds of Jallonkadoo, the elephants are very numerous, and, from the great scarcity of gunpowder in those districts, they are less annoyed by the natives.
Most of the ivory sold along the Gambia and Senegal rivers comes from the inland areas. The lands near the coast are too swampy and crisscrossed with creeks and rivers for a large animal like the elephant to move without being noticed. Once the locals spot elephant tracks in the ground, the whole village rallies together. The idea of feasting on its meat, making shoes from its hide, and selling its tusks to Europeans fires everyone up, and the elephant usually doesn't escape its hunters. However, in the plains of Bambarra and Kaarta, and the vast wilderness of Jallonkadoo, elephants are quite common, and due to the limited availability of gunpowder in those regions, they face less trouble from the locals.
Scattered teeth are frequently picked up in the woods, and travellers are very diligent in looking for them. It is a common practice with the elephant to thrust his teeth under the roots of such shrubs and bushes as grow in the more dry and elevated parts of the country, where the soil is shallow. These bushes he easily overturns, and feeds on the roots, which are in general more tender and juicy than the hard, woody branches or the foliage; but when the teeth are partly decayed by age, and the roots more firmly fixed, the great exertions of the animal in this practice frequently cause them to break short. At Kamalia I saw two teeth, one a very large one, which were found in the woods, and which were evidently broken off in this manner. Indeed, it is difficult otherwise to account for such a large proportion of broken ivory as is daily offered for sale at the different factories, for when the elephant is killed in hunting, unless he dashes himself over a precipice, the teeth are always extracted entire.
Scattered teeth are often found in the woods, and travelers are very careful in searching for them. Elephants commonly push their teeth under the roots of shrubs and bushes that grow in the drier, higher areas of the land, where the soil is shallow. They easily uproot these bushes and eat the roots, which are generally softer and juicier than the tough, woody branches or the leaves. However, when the teeth are partially decayed from age and the roots are more firmly anchored, the elephant’s efforts in this behavior often cause the teeth to break off. In Kamalia, I came across two teeth, one of which was quite large, found in the woods and clearly broken in this way. In fact, it’s hard to explain the significant amount of broken ivory that's available for sale at various factories unless the elephants are killed in hunting; unless they throw themselves off a cliff, their teeth are always found intact.
There are certain seasons of the year when the elephants collect into large herds, and traverse the country in quest of food or water; and as all that part of the country to the north of the Niger is destitute of rivers, whenever the pools in the woods are dried up the elephants approach towards the banks of that river. Here they continue until the commencement of the rainy season, in the months of June or July, and during this time they are much hunted by such of the Bambarrans as have gunpowder to spare. The elephant-hunters seldom go out singly—a party of four or five join together, and having each furnished himself with powder and ball, and a quantity of corn-meal in a leather bag sufficient for five or six days’ provision, they enter the most unfrequented parts of the wood, and examine with great care everything that can lead to the discovery of the elephants. In this pursuit, notwithstanding the bulk of the animal, very great nicety of observation is required. The broken branches, the scattered dung of the animal, and the marks of his feet are carefully inspected; and many of the hunters have, by long experience and attentive observation, become so expert in their search that as soon as they observe the foot-marks of an elephant they will tell almost to a certainty at what time it passed and at what distance it will be found.
There are certain times of the year when elephants gather in large herds and roam the land looking for food or water. Since the area north of the Niger has no rivers, when the waterholes in the woods dry up, the elephants move toward the riverbanks. They stay there until the rainy season starts in June or July, and during this time, they are heavily hunted by the Bambarrans who have spare gunpowder. Elephant hunters rarely go out alone; usually, a group of four or five comes together. Each one brings along powder and bullets, as well as a supply of cornmeal in a leather bag that lasts five or six days. They head into the remote parts of the woods, paying close attention to anything that might lead them to the elephants. Despite the size of the animals, keen observation is essential in this pursuit. They closely examine broken branches, the scattered dung, and the footprints left behind. Many hunters, through extensive experience and careful observation, have become so skilled in tracking that they can often determine exactly when an elephant passed by and how far away it is.
When they discover a herd of elephants, they follow them at a distance, until they perceive some one stray from the rest and come into such a situation as to be fired at with advantage. The hunters then approach with great caution, creeping amongst the long grass, until they have got near enough to be sure of their aim. They then discharge all their pieces at once, and throw themselves on their faces among the grass; the wounded elephant immediately applies his trunk to the different wounds, but being unable to extract the balls, and seeing nobody near him, he becomes quite furious and runs about amongst the bushes until by fatigue and loss of blood he has exhausted himself, and affords the hunters an opportunity of firing a second time at him, by which he is generally brought to the ground.
When they find a herd of elephants, they follow them from a distance until they notice one stray away from the rest and get into a position where they can shoot at it effectively. The hunters then approach very quietly, sneaking through the tall grass until they’re close enough to take a good shot. They all fire their weapons at once and drop to the ground among the grass. The injured elephant uses its trunk to inspect its wounds, but unable to remove the bullets and seeing that no one is around, it becomes enraged and starts running through the bushes. Eventually, it tires out from exhaustion and blood loss, giving the hunters another chance to shoot at it, which usually brings it down.
The skin is now taken off, and extended on the ground with pegs to dry; and such parts of the flesh as are most esteemed are cut up into thin slices, and dried in the sun, to serve for provisions on some future occasion. The teeth are struck out with a light hatchet which the hunters always carry along with them, not only for that purpose, but also to enable them to cut down such trees as contain honey; for though they carry with them only five or six days’ provisions, they will remain in the woods for months if they are successful, and support themselves upon the flesh of such elephants as they kill and wild honey.
The skin is now removed and spread out on the ground with pegs to dry. The most prized parts of the meat are sliced into thin pieces and dried in the sun, so they can be saved for future use. The teeth are taken out with a light hatchet that the hunters always bring along, not just for that purpose, but also to help them cut down trees that have honey. Even though they only bring enough food for five or six days, they'll stay in the woods for months if they’re successful, living off the meat of any elephants they kill and wild honey.
The ivory thus collected is seldom brought down to the coast by the hunters themselves. They dispose of it to the itinerant merchants who come annually from the coast with arms and ammunition to purchase this valuable commodity. Some of these merchants will collect ivory in the course of one season sufficient to load four or five asses. A great quantity of ivory is likewise brought from the interior by the slave coffles; there are, however, some slatees of the Mohammedan persuasion who, from motives of religion, will not deal in ivory, nor eat of the flesh of the elephant, unless it has been killed with a spear.
The ivory that gets collected is rarely taken to the coast by the hunters themselves. Instead, they sell it to traveling merchants who come from the coast each year with weapons and ammunition to buy this valuable resource. Some of these merchants can gather enough ivory in a single season to fill four or five donkeys. A large amount of ivory also comes from the interior carried by groups of enslaved people; however, there are some Muslims who, for religious reasons, won’t trade in ivory or eat elephant meat unless it’s been killed with a spear.
The quantity of ivory collected in this part of Africa is not so great, nor are the teeth in general so large, as in the countries nearer the Line: few of them weigh more than eighty or one hundred pounds, and upon an average a bar of European merchandise may be reckoned as the price of a pound of ivory.
The amount of ivory collected in this part of Africa isn't very large, and the tusks are generally smaller than those found in countries closer to the equator: few weigh more than eighty to one hundred pounds, and on average, a bar of European goods can be considered the price for a pound of ivory.
I have now, I trust, in this and the preceding chapters explained with sufficient minuteness the nature and extent of the commercial connection which at present prevails, and has long subsisted, between the negro natives of those parts of Africa which I visited and the nations of Europe; and it appears that slaves, gold, and ivory, together with the few articles enumerated in the beginning of my work—viz., bees’ wax and honey, hides, gums, and dye-woods—constitute the whole catalogue of exportable commodities. Other productions, however, have been incidentally noticed as the growth of Africa, such as grain of different kinds, tobacco, indigo, cotton-wool and perhaps a few others; but of all these (which can only be obtained by cultivation and labour) the natives raise sufficient only for their own immediate expenditure; nor, under the present system of their laws, manners, trade, and government, can anything further be expected from them. It cannot, however, admit of a doubt that all the rich and valuable productions both of the East and West Indies might easily be naturalised and brought to the utmost perfection in the tropical parts of this immense continent. Nothing is wanting to this end but example to enlighten the minds of the natives, and instruction to enable them to direct their industry to proper objects. It was not possible for me to behold the wonderful fertility of the soil, the vast herds of cattle, proper both for labour and food, and a variety of other circumstances favourable to colonisation and agriculture—and reflect, withal, on the means which presented themselves of a vast inland navigation without—lamenting that a country so abundantly gifted and favoured by nature should remain in its present savage and neglected state. Much more did I lament that a people of manners and disposition so gentle and benevolent should either be left as they now are, immersed in the gross and uncomfortable blindness of pagan superstition, or permitted to become converts to a system of bigotry and fanaticism which, without enlightening the mind, often debases the heart. On this subject many observations might be made, but the reader will probably think that I have already digressed too largely; and I now, therefore, return to my situation at Kamalia.
I hope that in this and the previous chapters, I have clearly explained the nature and extent of the commercial ties that currently exist, and have long existed, between the Black natives of the regions of Africa I visited and the nations of Europe. It seems that slaves, gold, and ivory, along with the few items mentioned at the beginning of my work—beeswax and honey, hides, gums, and dye-woods—make up the entire list of exportable goods. Other products have also been mentioned as being grown in Africa, such as different types of grain, tobacco, indigo, and cotton, among a few others. However, all of these (which can only be obtained through cultivation and labor) are produced in just enough quantity for the natives' own immediate needs. Under the current system of their laws, customs, trade, and governance, no more can be expected from them. It's undeniable that all the rich and valuable products of both the East and West Indies could be easily cultivated and perfected in the tropical regions of this vast continent. All that’s needed for this is examples to inspire the natives and education to help them focus their efforts on the right pursuits. I couldn’t help but notice the incredible fertility of the soil, the large herds of livestock suitable for both work and food, and various other factors that favor colonization and agriculture. I reflected on the potential for extensive inland navigation and lamented that a country so richly blessed by nature should remain in its current neglected and primitive condition. I was even more saddened that a people with such gentle and kind nature should either stay as they are, stuck in the uncomfortable ignorance of pagan superstition, or be allowed to adopt a system of bigotry and fanaticism that often degrades the heart without enlightening the mind. Many observations could be made on this topic, but you might think I have already strayed too far from my point, so I will now return to my situation in Kamalia.
CHAPTER XXIV.
MUSLIM CUSTOMS; ARRIVAL AT KINYTAKOORO.
The schoolmaster to whose care I was entrusted during the absence of Karfa was a man of a mild disposition and gentle manners; his name was Fankooma, and although he himself adhered strictly to the religion of Mohammed, he was by no means intolerant in his principles towards others who differed from him. He spent much of his time in reading, and teaching appeared to be his pleasure as well as employment. His school consisted of seventeen boys, most of whom were sons of Kafirs, and two girls, one of whom was Karfa’s own daughter. The girls received their instruction in the daytime, but the boys always had their lessons, by the light of a large fire, before day break and again late in the evening; for, being considered, during their scholarship, as the domestic slaves of the master, they were employed in planting corn, bringing firewood, and in other servile offices through the day.
The schoolmaster I was assigned to while Karfa was away was a kind and gentle man named Fankooma. Although he strictly followed the teachings of Mohammed, he was open-minded and tolerant towards others with different beliefs. He dedicated much of his time to reading, and teaching seemed to bring him joy as well as serve as his job. His school had seventeen boys, mostly sons of Kafirs, along with two girls, one of whom was Karfa’s daughter. The girls received their lessons during the day, while the boys studied by the light of a large fire before dawn and again late at night. This was because, during their time in school, they were considered the household servants of the master, working during the day planting corn, collecting firewood, and doing other menial tasks.
Exclusive of the Koran, and a book or two of commentaries thereon, the schoolmaster possessed a variety of manuscripts, which had partly been purchased from the trading Moors, and partly borrowed from bushreens in the neighbourhood and copied with great care. Other manuscripts had been produced to me at different places in the course of my journey; and on recounting those I had before seen, and those which were now shown to me, and interrogating the schoolmaster on the subject, I discovered that the negroes are in possession (among others) of an Arabic version of the Pentateuch of Moses, which they call Taureta la Moosa. This is so highly esteemed that it is often sold for the value of one prime slave. They have likewise a version of the Psalms of David (Zabora Dawidi); and, lastly, the Book of Isaiah, which they call Lingeeli la Isa, and it is in very high esteem. I suspect, indeed, that in all these copies there are interpolations of some of the peculiar tenets of Mohammed, for I could distinguish in many passages the name of the Prophet. It is possible, however, that this circumstance might otherwise have been accounted for if my knowledge of the Arabic had been more extensive. By means of those books many of the converted negroes have acquired an acquaintance with some of the remarkable events recorded in the Old Testament. The account of our first parents, the death of Abel, the Deluge, the lives of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the story of Joseph and his brethren, the history of Moses, David, Solomon, etc.; all these have been related to me, in the Mandingo language, with tolerable exactness by different people; and my surprise was not greater, on hearing these accounts from the lips of the negroes, than theirs on finding that I was already acquainted with them; for although the negroes in general have a very great idea of the wealth and power of the Europeans, I am afraid that the Mohammedan converts among them think but very lightly of our superior attainments in religious knowledge. The white traders in the maritime districts take no pains to counteract this unhappy prejudice, always performing their own devotions in secret, and seldom condescending to converse with the negroes in a friendly and instructive manner. To me, therefore, it was not so much the subject of wonder as matter of regret to observe that, while the superstition of Mohammed has in this manner scattered a few faint beams of learning among these poor people, the precious light of Christianity is altogether excluded. I could not but lament that, although the coast of Africa has now been known and frequented by the Europeans for more than two hundred years, yet the negroes still remain entire strangers to the doctrines of our holy religion. We are anxious to draw from obscurity the opinions and records of antiquity, the beauties of Arabian and Asiatic literature, etc.; but while our libraries are thus stored with the learning of various countries, we distribute with a parsimonious hand the blessings of religious truth to the benighted nations of the earth. The natives of Asia derive but little advantage in this respect from an intercourse with us; and even the poor Africans, whom we affect to consider as barbarians, look upon us, I fear, as little better than a race of formidable but ignorant heathens. When I produced Richardson’s Arabic Grammar to some slatees on the Gambia, they were astonished to think that any European should understand and write the sacred language of their religion. At first they suspected that it might have been written by some of the slaves carried from the coast, but on a closer examination they were satisfied that no bushreen could write such beautiful Arabic, and one of them offered to give me an ass and sixteen bars of goods if I would part with the book. Perhaps a short and easy introduction to Christianity, such as is found in some of the catechisms for children, elegantly printed in Arabic, and distributed on different parts of the coast, might have a wonderful effect. The expense would be but trifling; curiosity would induce many to read it; and the evident superiority which it would possess over their present manuscripts, both in point of elegance and cheapness, might at last obtain it a place among the school-books of Africa.
Aside from the Koran and a couple of commentary books, the schoolmaster had a variety of manuscripts. Some were bought from trading Moors and others were borrowed from local bushreens and copied very carefully. Other manuscripts were shown to me at different stops during my journey; as I recalled what I had seen before and asked the schoolmaster about them, I found out that the Africans possess, among other works, an Arabic version of the Pentateuch of Moses, which they call Taureta la Moosa. This text is so valued that it can be sold for the price of a prime slave. They also have a version of the Psalms of David (Zabora Dawidi); and finally, the Book of Isaiah, which they refer to as Lingeeli la Isa, and it is held in very high regard. I suspect that these copies include some elements of Mohammed's unique beliefs, as I could identify the Prophet's name in several passages. However, it's possible that I might have understood this differently if I had more extensive knowledge of Arabic. Through these books, many of the converted Africans have learned about some of the notable events in the Old Testament. The stories of our first parents, the death of Abel, the Flood, the lives of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, the tale of Joseph and his brothers, and the history of Moses, David, Solomon, and so on were all shared with me in the Mandingo language with reasonable accuracy by different individuals. I was not more surprised to hear these accounts from the Africans than they were to learn that I was already familiar with them; even though Africans generally have a high opinion of Europeans' wealth and power, I fear that the Muslim converts among them think very little of our greater religious knowledge. The white traders in the coastal areas make no effort to change this unfortunate belief, as they conduct their own religious practices in secret and rarely engage in friendly, informative conversation with the Africans. Therefore, I found it not so much surprising as regrettable to see that while Mohammedanism has spread a few faint rays of learning among these unfortunate people, the beautiful light of Christianity is completely shut out. I couldn't help but lament that although the coast of Africa has been known to and visited by Europeans for over two hundred years, Africans still remain largely unaware of the teachings of our holy religion. We are eager to uncover the thoughts and writings of ancient times, the masterpieces of Arab and Asian literature, etc.; but while our libraries are filled with knowledge from various lands, we share the blessings of religious truth with great reluctance to the unaware nations of the world. The natives of Asia gain little benefit in this regard from interacting with us; and even the poor Africans, whom we claim to view as barbarians, see us, I fear, as little more than a group of formidable yet ignorant heathens. When I showed Richardson’s Arabic Grammar to some slatees on the Gambia, they were astonished that any European could understand and write the sacred language of their religion. Initially, they suspected it might have been written by some of the slaves taken from the coast, but upon closer inspection, they were convinced that no bushreen could write such beautiful Arabic, and one of them even offered me a donkey and sixteen bars of goods if I would part with the book. Perhaps a brief and straightforward introduction to Christianity, like those found in some children’s catechisms, elegantly printed in Arabic and distributed in various parts of the coast, could have a significant impact. The cost would be minimal; many would be curious enough to read it; and the clear superiority it would have over their existing manuscripts in terms of both elegance and cost could eventually secure it a place among the school materials of Africa.
The reflections which I have thus ventured to submit to my readers on this important subject naturally suggested themselves to my mind on perceiving the encouragement which was thus given to learning (such as it is) in many parts of Africa. I have observed that the pupils at Kamalia were most of them the children of pagans; their parents, therefore, could have had no predilection for the doctrines of Mohammed. Their aim was their children’s improvement; and if a more enlightened system had presented itself, it would probably have been preferred. The children, too, wanted not a spirit of emulation, which it is the aim of the tutor to encourage. When any one of them has read through the Koran, and performed a certain number of public prayers, a feast is prepared by the schoolmaster, and the scholar undergoes an examination, or (in European terms) takes out his degree. I attended at three different inaugurations of this sort, and heard with pleasure the distinct and intelligent answers which the scholars frequently gave to the bushreens, who assembled on those occasions and acted as examiners. When the bushreens had satisfied themselves respecting the learning and abilities of the scholar, the last page of the Koran was put into his hand, and he was desired to read it aloud. After the boy had finished this lesson, he pressed the paper against his forehead and pronounced the word Amen, upon which all the bushreens rose, and, shaking him cordially by the hand, bestowed upon him the title of bushreen.
The thoughts I’ve shared with my readers on this important topic came to mind when I noticed the support being given to education (as it stands) in various parts of Africa. I’ve seen that most of the students at Kamalia were the children of pagans; their parents likely had no preference for the teachings of Mohammed. Their goal was the improvement of their children, and if a more progressive system had been available, it would probably have been chosen. The children also lacked a sense of competition, which the teacher aims to promote. When one of them has finished reading the Koran and completed a set number of public prayers, a celebration is organized by the schoolmaster, and the student undergoes an examination, or in European terms, takes out his degree. I attended three different ceremonies of this nature and was pleased to hear the clear and intelligent responses that the students often gave to the bushreens who gathered as examiners. Once the bushreens were satisfied with the student’s knowledge and skills, the last page of the Koran was handed to him, and he was asked to read it aloud. After the boy completed this lesson, he pressed the paper to his forehead and said Amen, upon which all the bushreens stood up, warmly shook his hand, and awarded him the title of bushreen.
When a scholar has undergone this examination, his parents are informed that he has completed his education, and that it is incumbent on them to redeem their son by giving to the schoolmaster a slave or the price of a slave in exchange, which is always done if the parents can afford to do it; if not, the boy remains the domestic slave of the schoolmaster until he can, by his own industry, collect goods sufficient to ransom himself.
When a student has completed this examination, his parents are told that he has finished his education, and it's their responsibility to free their son by giving the schoolmaster a slave or the equivalent amount of money for a slave, which is usually done if the parents can afford it; if not, the boy remains the household servant of the schoolmaster until he can work hard enough to gather enough goods to buy his freedom.
About a week after the departure of Karfa three Moors arrived at Kamalia with a considerable quantity of salt and other merchandise, which they had obtained on credit from a merchant of Fezzan, who had lately arrived at Kancaba. Their engagement was to pay him his price when the goods were sold, which they expected would be in the course of a month. Being rigid bushreens, they were accommodated with two of Karfa’s huts, and sold their goods to very great advantage.
About a week after Karfa left, three Moors arrived in Kamalia with a large amount of salt and other merchandise, which they had borrowed on credit from a merchant from Fezzan who had recently come to Kancaba. Their agreement was to pay him once they sold the goods, which they expected to do within a month. Being strict bushreens, they were given two of Karfa’s huts and sold their goods at a significant profit.
On the 24th of January Karfa returned to Kamalia with a number of people and thirteen prime slaves whom he had purchased. He likewise brought with him a young girl whom he had married at Kancaba, as his fourth wife, and had given her parents three prime slaves for her. She was kindly received at the door of the baloon by Karfa’s other wives, who conducted their new acquaintance and co-partner into one of the best huts, which they had caused to be swept and whitewashed on purpose to receive her.
On January 24th, Karfa came back to Kamalia with several people and thirteen top-quality slaves he had bought. He also brought a young girl he had married in Kancaba, making her his fourth wife, and gave her parents three prime slaves as part of the arrangement. She was warmly welcomed at the entrance of the baloon by Karfa’s other wives, who took their new friend and co-wife into one of the best huts they had cleaned and painted specifically for her.
My clothes were by this time become so very ragged that I was almost ashamed to appear out of doors, but Karfa, on the day after his arrival, generously presented me with such a garment and trousers as are commonly worn in the country.
My clothes had become so ragged by this point that I was almost embarrassed to go outside, but Karfa, the day after he arrived, kindly gave me a garment and pants that are typically worn in the country.
The slaves which Karfa had brought with him were all of them prisoners of war; they had been taken by the Bambarra army in the kingdoms of Wassela and Kaarta, and carried to Sego, where some of them had remained three years in irons. From Sego they were sent, in company with a number of other captives, up the Niger in two large canoes, and offered for sale at Yamina, Bammakoo, and Kancaba; at which places the greater number of the captives were bartered for gold dust, and the remainder sent forward to Kankaree.
The slaves that Karfa brought with him were all prisoners of war; they had been captured by the Bambarra army in the kingdoms of Wassela and Kaarta, and taken to Sego, where some of them had spent three years in chains. From Sego, they were sent, along with several other captives, up the Niger in two large canoes and offered for sale at Yamina, Bammakoo, and Kancaba; at those places, most of the captives were traded for gold dust, and the rest were sent on to Kankaree.
Eleven of them confessed to me that they had been slaves from their infancy, but the other two refused to give any account of their former condition. They were all very inquisitive, but they viewed me at first with looks of horror, and repeatedly asked if my countrymen were cannibals. They were very desirous to know what became of the slaves after they had crossed the salt water. I told them that they were employed in cultivating the land; but they would not believe me, and one of them, putting his hand upon the ground, said, with great simplicity, “Have you really got such ground as this to set your feet upon?” A deeply-rooted idea that the whites purchase negroes for the purpose of devouring them, or of selling them to others that they may be devoured hereafter, naturally makes the slaves contemplate a journey towards the coast with great terror, insomuch that the slatees are forced to keep them constantly in irons, and watch them very closely, to prevent their escape. They are commonly secured by putting the right leg of one and the left of another into the same pair of fetters. By supporting the fetters with a string, they can walk, though very slowly. Every four slaves are likewise fastened together by the necks with a strong rope of twisted thongs, and in the night an additional pair of fetters is put on their hands, and sometimes a light iron chain passed round their necks.
Eleven of them told me they had been slaves since childhood, but the other two wouldn’t share anything about their past. They were all very curious, but at first, they looked at me in horror and kept asking if my fellow countrymen were cannibals. They were eager to find out what happened to the slaves after they crossed the ocean. I told them they worked on farms, but they wouldn’t believe me. One of them, placing his hand on the ground, simply asked, “Do you really have land like this to stand on?” The deeply ingrained belief that white people buy Black people to eat them or to sell them to others for that purpose makes slaves dread the journey to the coast. Because of this fear, the slave traders have to keep them in chains constantly and watch them closely to prevent escape. They are often secured by connecting the right leg of one slave to the left leg of another with the same pair of shackles. By tying the shackles together with a string, they can walk, although very slowly. Additionally, every four slaves are tied together by their necks with a strong twisted rope, and at night, an extra set of handcuffs is placed on them, sometimes with a light iron chain wrapped around their necks.
Such of them as evince marks of discontent are secured in a different manner. A thick billet of wood is cut about three feet long, and, a smooth notch being made upon one side of it, the ankle of the slave is bolted to the smooth part by means of a strong iron staple, one prong of which passes on each side of the ankle. All these fetters and bolts are made from native iron; in the present case they were put on by the blacksmith as soon as the slaves arrived from Kancaba, and were not taken off until the morning on which the coffle departed for Gambia.
Those who show signs of discontent are restrained in a different way. A thick piece of wood, about three feet long, is cut, and a smooth notch is made on one side. The slave's ankle is secured to the smooth part with a strong iron staple, with one prong on each side of the ankle. All these restraints and bolts are made from local iron; in this case, they were put on by the blacksmith as soon as the slaves arrived from Kancaba, and they weren't removed until the morning the group left for Gambia.
In other respects the treatment of the slaves during their stay at Kamalia was far from being harsh or cruel. They were led out in their fetters every morning to the shade of the tamarind-tree, where they were encouraged to play at games of hazard, and sing diverting songs, to keep up their spirits; for, though some of them sustained the hardships of their situation with amazing fortitude, the greater part were very much dejected, and would sit all day in a sort of sullen melancholy, with their eyes fixed upon the ground. In the evening their irons were examined, and their hand-fetters put on, after which they were conducted into two large huts, where they were guarded during the night by Karfa’s domestic slaves. But, notwithstanding all this, about a week after their arrival, one of the slaves had the address to procure a small knife, with which he opened the rings of his fetters, cut the rope, and made his escape; more of them would probably have got off had they assisted each other, but the slave no sooner found himself at liberty than he refused to stop and assist in breaking the chain which was fastened round the necks of his companions.
In other ways, the treatment of the slaves during their time at Kamalia was far from harsh or cruel. Each morning, they were taken out in their chains to the shade of the tamarind tree, where they were encouraged to play games of chance and sing cheerful songs to lift their spirits; because, although some of them handled the difficulties of their situation with incredible resilience, most were quite downcast and would sit all day in a sort of gloomy silence, staring at the ground. In the evening, their chains were checked, and their handcuffs were reattached, after which they were taken into two large huts, where they were watched over during the night by Karfa’s household slaves. However, about a week after their arrival, one of the slaves managed to get a small knife, with which he freed himself from his shackles, cut the rope, and escaped; more of them likely would have gotten away if they had helped each other, but once the slave found himself free, he refused to stop and help break the chain around the necks of his companions.
As all the slatees and slaves belonging to the coffle were now assembled either at Kamalia or at some of the neighbouring villages, it might have been expected that we should set out immediately for Gambia; but though the day of our departure was frequently fixed, it was always found expedient to change it. Some of the people had not prepared their dry provisions; others had gone to visit their relations; or collect some trifling debts; and, last of all, it was necessary to consult whether the day would be a lucky one. On account of one of these, or other such causes, our departure was put off, day after day, until the month of February was far advanced, after which all the slatees agreed to remain in their present quarters until the fast moon was over. And here I may remark that loss of time is an object of no great importance in the eyes of a negro. If he has anything of consequence to perform, it is a matter of indifference to him whether he does it to-day or to-morrow, or a month or two hence; so long as he can spend the present moment with any degree of comfort, he gives himself very little concern about the future.
As all the slatees and slaves in the coffle had gathered either in Kamalia or nearby villages, you might think we would head to Gambia right away; however, while we often set a departure date, it was always sensible to change it. Some people hadn't prepared their dried food, others went to visit family or collect small debts, and finally, we needed to check if the day would be lucky. Because of these and other reasons, our departure was delayed day after day until February was well underway, after which all the slatees decided to stay in their current location until the fast moon was over. I should also point out that for a negro, wasting time isn't a big deal. If he has something important to do, it doesn't matter to him whether he does it today, tomorrow, or even a month or two later; as long as he can enjoy the present moment with some comfort, he worries very little about the future.
The fast of Ramadan was observed with great strictness by all the bushreens, but instead of compelling me to follow their example, as the Moors did on a similar occasion, Karfa frankly told me that I was at liberty to pursue my own inclination. In order, however, to manifest a respect for their religious opinions, I voluntarily fasted three days, which was thought sufficient to screen me from the reproachful epithet of kafir. During the fast all the slatees belonging to the coffle assembled every morning in Karfa’s house, where the schoolmaster read to them some religious lessons from a large folio volume, the author of which was an Arab of the name of Sheiffa. In the evening such of the women as had embraced Mohammedanism assembled and said their prayers publicly at the missura. They were all dressed in white, and went through the different prostrations prescribed by their religion with becoming solemnity. Indeed, during the whole fast of Ramadan the negroes behaved themselves with the greatest meekness and humility, forming a striking contrast to the savage intolerance and brutal bigotry which at this period characterise the Moors.
The Ramadan fast was strictly observed by all the bushreens, but instead of insisting that I follow their example like the Moors did on a similar occasion, Karfa openly told me that I was free to do as I wished. However, to show respect for their beliefs, I willingly fasted for three days, which was considered enough to shield me from being called a kafir. During the fast, all the slatees in the coffle gathered every morning at Karfa’s house, where the schoolmaster read religious lessons from a large book written by an Arab named Sheiffa. In the evening, women who had converted to Islam came together to pray publicly at the missura. They were all dressed in white and performed the various prostrations required by their faith with appropriate solemnity. Throughout the entire Ramadan fast, the black community exhibited the utmost meekness and humility, standing in stark contrast to the savage intolerance and brutal bigotry that characterized the Moors at this time.
When the fast month was almost at an end, the bushreens assembled at the missura to watch for the appearance of the new moon, but, the evening being rather cloudy, they were for some time disappointed, and a number of them had gone home with a resolution to fast another day, when on a sudden this delightful object showed her sharp horns from behind a cloud, and was welcomed with the clapping of hands, beating of drums, firing of muskets, and other marks of rejoicing. As this moon is reckoned extremely lucky, Karfa gave orders that all the people belonging to the coffle should immediately pack up their dry provisions and hold themselves in readiness; and on the 16th of April the slatees held a consultation and fixed on the 19th of the same month as the day on which the coffle should depart from Kamalia. This resolution freed me from much uneasiness, for our departure had already been so long deferred that I was apprehensive it might still be put off until the commencement of the rainy season; and although Karfa behaved towards me with the greatest kindness, I found my situation very unpleasant. The slatees were unfriendly to me, and the trading Moors who were at this time at Kamalia continued to plot mischief against me from the first day of their arrival. Under these circumstances I reflected that my life in a great measure depended on the good opinion of an individual who was daily hearing malicious stories concerning the Europeans, and I could hardly expect that he would always judge with impartiality between me and his countrymen. Time had, indeed, reconciled me in some degree to their mode of life, and a smoky hut or a scanty supper gave me no great uneasiness; but I became at last wearied out with a constant state of alarm and anxiety, and felt a painful longing for the manifold blessings of civilised society.
When the month of fasting was almost over, the locals gathered at the missura to look for the new moon. However, since the evening was quite cloudy, they felt disappointed for a while, and many decided to head home resolved to fast for another day. Suddenly, though, the beautiful moon peeked out from behind a cloud and was greeted with applause, drumbeats, gunfire, and other signs of celebration. As this moon is considered very lucky, Karfa instructed everyone in the coffle to pack up their dry provisions and be ready. On April 16th, the slatees held a meeting and decided that the coffle would leave Kamalia on the 19th of the same month. This decision relieved me of much worry, as our departure had already been delayed so long that I feared it might be postponed until the rainy season began. Even though Karfa treated me with great kindness, my situation was quite uncomfortable. The slatees were unfriendly to me, and the trading Moors who were in Kamalia had been plotting against me since their arrival. Given these circumstances, I realized that my safety largely depended on the opinion of someone who was constantly hearing negative stories about Europeans, and I couldn't expect him to always be fair in judging between me and his fellow countrymen. Time had somewhat adjusted me to their way of living; a smoky hut or a meager meal didn’t bother me much. However, I eventually grew tired of being in a constant state of fear and anxiety, and I felt a painful yearning for the many comforts of civilized society.
April 19.—The long-wished-for day of our departure was at length arrived; and the slatees, having taken the irons from their slaves, assembled with them at the door of Karfa’s house, where the bundles were all tied up, and every one had his load assigned him. The coffle, on its departure from Kamalia, consisted of twenty-seven slaves for sale, the property of Karfa and four other slatees; but we were afterwards joined by five at Maraboo and three at Bala—making in all thirty-five slaves. The freemen were fourteen in number, but most of them had one or two wives and some domestic slaves; and the schoolmaster, who was now upon his return for Woradoo, the place of his nativity, took with him eight of his scholars, so that the number of free people and domestic slaves amounted to thirty-eight, and the whole amount of the coffle was seventy-three. Among the freemen were six jillikeas (singing men), whose musical talents were frequently exerted either to divert our fatigue or obtain us a welcome from strangers. When we departed from Kamalia, we were followed for about half a mile by most of the inhabitants of the town, some of them crying and others shaking hands with their relations who were now about to leave them; and when we had gained a piece of rising ground, from which we had a view of Kamalia, all the people belonging to the coffle were ordered to sit down in one place with their faces towards the west, and the townspeople were desired to sit down in another place with their faces towards Kamalia. In this situation the schoolmaster, with two of the principal slatees, having taken their places between the two parties, pronounced a long and solemn prayer, after which they walked three times round the coffle, making an impression in the ground with the ends of their spears, and muttering something by way of charm. When this ceremony was ended, all the people belonging to the coffle sprang up and, without taking a formal farewell of their friends, set forwards. As many of the slaves had remained for years in irons, the sudden exertion of walking quick with heavy loads upon their heads occasioned spasmodic contractions of their legs; and we had not proceeded above a mile before it was found necessary to take two of them from the rope, and allow them to walk more slowly until we reached Maraboo, a walled village, where some people were waiting to join the coffle. Here we stopped about two hours, to allow the strangers time to pack up their provisions, and then continued our route to Bala, which town we reached about four in the afternoon. The inhabitants of Bala at this season of the year subsist chiefly on fish, which they take in great plenty from the streams in the neighbourhood. We remained here until the afternoon of the next day, the 20th, when we proceeded to Worumbang, the frontier village of Manding, towards Jallonkadoo. As we proposed shortly to enter the Jallonka Wilderness, the people of this village furnished us with great plenty of provisions, and on the morning of the 21st we entered the woods to the westward of Worumbang. After having travelled some little way, a consultation was held whether we should continue our route through the wilderness, or save one day’s provisions by going to Kinytakooro, a town in Jallonkadoo. After debating the matter for some time, it was agreed that we should take the road for Kinytakooro; but as that town was a long day’s journey distant, it was necessary to take some refreshment. Accordingly every person opened his provision-bag and brought a handful or two of meal to the place where Karfa and the slatees were sitting. When every one had brought his quota, and the whole was properly arranged in small gourd-shells, the schoolmaster offered up a short prayer, the substance of which was that God and the holy Prophet might preserve us from robbers and all bad people, that our provisions might never fail us, nor our limbs become fatigued. This ceremony being ended, every one partook of the meal and drank a little water, after which we set forward (rather running than walking) until we came to the river Kokoro, a branch of the Senegal, where we halted about ten minutes. The banks of this river are very high, and from the grass and brushwood which had been left by the stream it was evident that at this place the water had risen more than twenty feet perpendicular during the rainy season. At this time it was only a small stream, such as would turn a mill, swarming with fish; and on account of the number of crocodiles, and the danger of being carried past the ford by the force of the stream in the rainy season, it is called Kokoro (dangerous). From this place we continued to travel with the greatest expedition, and in the afternoon crossed two small branches of the Kokoro. About sunset we came in sight of Kinytakooro, a considerable town, nearly square, situated in the middle of a large and well-cultivated plain: before we entered the town, we halted until the people who had fallen behind came up. During this day’s travel two slaves, a woman and a girl, belonging to a slates of Bala, were so much fatigued that they could not keep up with the coffle; they were severely whipped, and dragged along until about three o’clock in the afternoon, when they were both affected with vomiting, by which it was discovered that they had eaten clay. This practice is by no means uncommon amongst the negroes; but whether it arises from a vitiated appetite, or from a settled intention to destroy themselves, I cannot affirm. They were permitted to lie down in the woods, and three people remained with them until they had rested themselves; but they did not arrive at the town until past midnight, and were then so much exhausted that the slatee gave up all thoughts of taking them across the woods in their present condition, and determined to return with them to Bala and wait for another opportunity.
April 19.—The long-awaited day of our departure finally arrived; the slatees took off the shackles from their slaves and gathered with them at the entrance of Karfa’s house, where all the bundles were tied, and everyone had their loads assigned. The group leaving Kamalia consisted of twenty-seven slaves for sale, owned by Karfa and four other slatees. We were later joined by five at Maraboo and three at Bala, bringing the total to thirty-five slaves. The freemen numbered fourteen, most with one or two wives and some domestic slaves. The schoolmaster, who was now returning to Woradoo, his hometown, brought along eight of his students, so the total number of free people and domestic slaves was thirty-eight, making the entire group seventy-three. Among the freemen were six jillikeas (singing men), whose musical skills were often used to ease our fatigue or to get a warm reception from strangers. When we left Kamalia, we were followed for about half a mile by most of the town residents, some crying and others shaking hands with their relatives who were leaving. When we reached a small hill that gave us a view of Kamalia, everyone in the group was instructed to sit together facing west, while the townspeople were asked to sit elsewhere facing Kamalia. In this position, the schoolmaster, along with two leading slatees, took their places between the two groups and offered a long, solemn prayer. After that, they walked three times around our group, marking the ground with the ends of their spears and muttering a charm. Once this ceremony was done, everyone in our group jumped up and, without saying a formal goodbye to their friends, started moving forward. Since many of the slaves had been in chains for years, suddenly walking quickly with heavy loads on their heads caused cramps in their legs. We had hardly gone a mile before it was necessary to take two of them off the rope so they could walk slower until we reached Maraboo, a walled village where some people were waiting to join us. We stopped here for about two hours to give the newcomers time to gather their provisions, then continued our journey to Bala, which we reached around four in the afternoon. The people of Bala mainly live on fish at this time of year, which they catch in abundance from the nearby streams. We stayed here until the afternoon of the next day, the 20th, when we moved on to Worumbang, the border village of Manding, toward Jallonkadoo. Knowing we would soon enter the Jallonka Wilderness, the villagers provided us with plenty of food, and on the morning of the 21st, we entered the woods to the west of Worumbang. After traveling a short distance, we had a discussion on whether to continue through the wilderness or save a day's worth of provisions by going to Kinytakooro, a town in Jallonkadoo. After some deliberation, we decided to head for Kinytakooro; however, since that town was a long day's journey away, we needed to take a break. So, everyone opened their provision bags and brought a handful or two of meal to the spot where Karfa and the slatees were sitting. Once everyone had contributed and the food was arranged in small gourd-shells, the schoolmaster offered a short prayer asking God and the holy Prophet to protect us from robbers and all bad people, that our supplies would never run out, and that our limbs wouldn’t tire. After the prayer, everyone shared the meal and drank a bit of water before we moved on (more like running than walking) until we reached the Kokoro River, a branch of the Senegal, where we took a ten-minute break. The riverbanks were very high, and the grass and brush left by the water made it clear that the water had risen more than twenty feet during the rainy season. At this time, it was just a small stream, enough to turn a mill, filled with fish; due to the number of crocodiles and the risk of being swept away by the current in the rainy season, it was named Kokoro (dangerous). From here, we continued traveling as fast as we could, crossing two small branches of the Kokoro in the afternoon. Around sunset, we spotted Kinytakooro, a sizable town almost square in shape, located in the middle of a large, well-cultivated plain. Before entering the town, we paused until those who had lagged behind caught up. During this day’s journey, two slaves—a woman and a girl owned by a slatee from Bala—became so exhausted that they couldn’t keep pace with the group. They were harshly whipped and dragged along until about three in the afternoon when both began to vomit, revealing that they had eaten clay. This behavior is not uncommon among people; I can't say whether it stems from a bad appetite or a desire to harm themselves. They were allowed to rest in the woods, and three people stayed with them until they felt better, but they didn't reach the town until after midnight and were so worn out that the slatee decided against taking them through the woods in their condition and resolved to return with them to Bala and wait for another opportunity.
As this was the first town beyond the limits of Manding, greater etiquette than usual was observed. Every person was ordered to keep in his proper station, and we marched towards the town in a sort of procession nearly as follows:—In front five or six singing men, all of them belonging to the coffle; these were followed by the other free people; then came the slaves, fastened in the usual way by a rope round their necks, four of them to a rope, and a man with a spear between each four; after them came the domestic slaves; and in the rear the women of free condition, wives of the slatees, etc. In this manner we proceeded until we came within a hundred yards of the gate, when the singing men began a loud song, well calculated to flatter the vanity of the inhabitants, by extolling their known hospitality to strangers and their particular friendship for the Mandingoes. When we entered the town we proceeded to the bentang, where the people gathered round us to hear our dentegi (history); this was related publicly by two of the singing men—they enumerated every little circumstance which had happened to the coffle, beginning with the events of the present day and relating everything in a backward series until they reached Kamalia. When this history was ended, the master of the town gave them a small present, and all the people of the coffle, both free and enslaved, were invited by some person or other and accommodated with lodging and provisions for the night.
As this was the first town beyond Manding, we followed more polite customs than usual. Everyone was instructed to stay in their designated place, and we marched toward the town in a sort of procession as follows:—In front were five or six singers, all part of the coffle; these were followed by the other free people; then came the enslaved individuals, tied together by a rope around their necks, four to a rope, with a man holding a spear between each group of four; behind them were the domestic slaves; and finally, at the back were the free women, including the wives of the slatees, etc. We moved along this way until we were about a hundred yards from the gate, when the singers started a loud song that flattered the locals by praising their well-known hospitality toward strangers and their particular friendship for the Mandingoes. Upon entering the town, we went to the bentang, where people gathered around us to hear our dentegi (history); this was shared publicly by two of the singers—they detailed every little thing that had happened to the coffle, starting with today's events and going backward until they reached Kamalia. After the story was finished, the town's leader gave them a small gift, and everyone in the coffle, both free and enslaved, was invited by someone to stay overnight and was provided with lodging and food.
CHAPTER XXV.
THE JALLONKA WILDERNESS: A WARRIOR'S STORY.
We continued at Kinytakooro until noon of the 22nd of April, when we removed to a village about seven miles to the westward, the inhabitants of which, being apprehensive of hostilities from the Foulahs of Fooladoo, were at this time employed in constructing small temporary huts among the rocks, on the side of a high hill close to the village. The situation was almost impregnable, being everywhere surrounded with high precipices, except on the eastern side, where the natives had left a pathway sufficient to allow one person at a time to ascend. Upon the brow of the hill, immediately over this path, I observed several heaps of large loose stones, which the people told me were intended to be thrown down upon the Foulahs if they should attempt the hill.
We stayed at Kinytakooro until noon on April 22nd, when we moved to a village about seven miles to the west. The villagers, worried about attacks from the Foulahs of Fooladoo, were busy building small temporary huts among the rocks on the side of a steep hill near the village. The location was nearly impossible to breach, surrounded by high cliffs on all sides except for the east, where the locals had left a narrow path that only allowed one person to climb at a time. At the top of the hill, right above this path, I saw several piles of large loose stones that the villagers told me were meant to be rolled down onto the Foulahs if they tried to approach the hill.
At daybreak on the 23rd we departed from this village and entered the Jallonka Wilderness. We passed in the course of the morning the ruins of two small towns which had lately been burnt by the Foulahs. The fire must have been very intense, for I observed that the walls of many of the huts were slightly vitrified, and appeared at a distance as if covered with a red varnish. About ten o’clock we came to the river Wonda, which is somewhat larger than the river Kokoro; but the stream was at this time rather muddy, which Karfa assured me was occasioned by amazing shoals of fish. They were indeed seen in all directions, and in such abundance that I fancied the water itself tasted and smelt fishy. As soon as we had crossed the river, Karfa gave orders that all the people of the coffle should in future keep close together, and travel in their proper station. The guides and young men were accordingly placed in the van, the women and slaves in the centre, and the freemen in the rear. In this order we travelled with uncommon expedition through a woody but beautiful country, interspersed with a pleasing variety of hill and dale, and abounding with partridges, guinea-fowl, and deer, until sunset, when we arrived at a most romantic stream, called Co-meissang. My arms and neck having been exposed to the sun during the whole day, and irritated by the rubbing of my dress in walking, were now very much inflamed and covered with blisters, and I was happy to embrace the opportunity, while the coffle rested on the bank of the river, to bathe myself in the stream. This practice, together with the cool of the evening, much diminished the inflammation. About three miles to the westward of the Co-meissang we halted in a thick wood and kindled our fires for the night. We were all by this time very much fatigued, having, as I judged, travelled this day thirty miles, but no person was heard to complain. Whilst supper was preparing, Karfa made one of the slaves break some branches from the trees for my bed. When we had finished our supper of kouskous, moistened with some boiling water, and put the slaves in irons, we all lay down to sleep; but we were frequently disturbed in the night by the howling of wild beasts, and we found the small brown ants very troublesome.
At dawn on the 23rd, we left this village and entered the Jallonka Wilderness. During the morning, we passed the ruins of two small towns that had recently been burned by the Foulahs. The fire must have been intense, as I noticed that the walls of many huts were slightly vitrified and looked like they were covered in a red varnish from a distance. Around ten o'clock, we reached the Wonda River, which is larger than the Kokoro River; however, the water was quite muddy at that time, which Karfa said was due to massive shoals of fish. They were indeed visible in every direction, so abundantly that I thought the water itself smelled and tasted fishy. Once we crossed the river, Karfa instructed everyone in our group to stay close together and travel in their designated spots. The guides and young men were positioned at the front, the women and slaves in the middle, and the freemen at the back. In this order, we traveled quickly through a forested yet beautiful landscape, with a pleasing mix of hills and valleys, teeming with partridges, guinea-fowl, and deer, until sunset, when we arrived at a charming stream called Co-meissang. My arms and neck, having been exposed to the sun all day and irritated by my clothes while walking, were now quite inflamed and covered in blisters, so I was glad to take the chance to bathe in the stream while the group rested on the riverbank. This, along with the cool evening air, really helped reduce the inflammation. About three miles west of Co-meissang, we stopped in a thick wood and made our fires for the night. By this point, we were all very tired, having traveled, I estimated, about thirty miles that day, but no one complained. While dinner was being prepared, Karfa had one of the slaves break some branches from the trees to make my bed. After we finished our supper of kouskous, watered down with some boiling water, and put the slaves in irons, we all lay down to sleep; however, we were frequently disturbed during the night by the howling of wild animals and found the small brown ants very annoying.
April 24.—Before daybreak the bushreens said their morning prayers, and most of the free people drank a little moening (a sort of gruel), part of which was likewise given to such of the slaves as appeared least able to sustain the fatigues of the day. One of Karfa’s female slaves was very sulky, and when some gruel was offered to her she refused to drink it. As soon as day dawned we set out, and travelled the whole morning over a wild and rocky country, by which my feet were much bruised, and I was sadly apprehensive that I should not be able to keep up with the coffle during the day; but I was in a great measure relieved from this anxiety when I observed that others were more exhausted than myself. In particular, the woman slave who had refused victuals in the morning began now to lag behind, and complain dreadfully of pains in her legs. Her load was taken from her and given to another slave, and she was ordered to keep in the front of the coffle. About eleven o’clock, as we were resting by a small rivulet, some of the people discovered a hive of bees in a hollow tree, and they were proceeding to obtain the honey when the largest swarm I ever beheld flew out, and, attacking the people of the coffle, made us fly in all directions. I took the alarm first, and, I believe, was the only person who escaped with impunity. When our enemies thought fit to desist from pursuing us, and every person was employed in picking out the stings he had received, it was discovered that the poor woman above mentioned, whose name was Nealee, was not come up; and as many of the slaves in their retreat had left their bundles behind them, it became necessary for some persons to return and bring them. In order to do this with safety, fire was set to the grass a considerable way to the eastward of the hive, and, the wind driving the fire furiously along, the party pushed through the smoke and recovered the bundles. They likewise brought with them poor Nealee, whom they found lying by the rivulet. She was very much exhausted, and had crept to the stream in hopes to defend herself from the bees by throwing water over her body; but this proved ineffectual, for she was stung in the most dreadful manner.
April 24.—Before dawn, the bushreens said their morning prayers, and most of the free people drank a little moening (a type of gruel), part of which was also given to those slaves who seemed least able to handle the day’s exertions. One of Karfa’s female slaves was very sullen, and when some gruel was offered to her, she refused to drink it. As soon as daylight arrived, we set off and traveled the entire morning across a wild and rocky terrain, which bruised my feet, and I was worried that I wouldn’t be able to keep up with the group throughout the day. However, I felt somewhat relieved when I noticed that others were more exhausted than I was. In particular, the female slave who had turned down food in the morning began to fall behind and complained intensely of pains in her legs. Her load was taken from her and given to another slave, and she was ordered to stay at the front of the group. Around eleven o’clock, as we rested by a small stream, some people spotted a beehive in a hollow tree and were about to collect the honey when the biggest swarm I’ve ever seen swarmed out, attacking our group, making us scatter in all directions. I panicked first and, as far as I know, was the only one who escaped unscathed. When our attackers finally stopped chasing us, and everyone was busy removing the stings they’d received, we realized that the poor woman mentioned earlier, named Nealee, hadn’t come forward. Since many of the slaves had left their bundles behind during their retreat, some people needed to go back to retrieve them. To do this safely, a fire was set to the grass quite a way east of the hive, and, with the wind driving the fire quickly, the group pushed through the smoke to recover the bundles. They also brought back poor Nealee, whom they found lying by the stream. She was extremely worn out and had crawled to the water in hopes of protecting herself from the bees by splashing water on her body; but this didn’t help, as she was stung in the most terrible way.
When the slatees had picked out the stings as far as they could, she was washed with water and then rubbed with bruised leaves; but the wretched woman obstinately refused to proceed any farther, declaring that she would rather die than walk another step. As entreaties and threats were used in vain, the whip was at length applied; and after bearing patiently a few strokes she started up and walked with tolerable expedition for four or five hours longer, when she made an attempt to run away from the coffle, but was so very weak that she fell down in the grass. Though she was unable to rise, the whip was a second time applied, but without effect; upon which Karfa desired two of the slatees to place her upon the ass which carried our dry provisions; but she could not sit erect, and the ass being very refractory it was found impossible to carry her forward in that manner. The slatees, however, were unwilling to abandon her, the day’s journey being nearly ended; they therefore made a sort of litter of bamboo-canes, upon which she was placed, and tied on it with slips of bark. This litter was carried upon the heads of two slaves, one walking before the other, and they were followed by two others, who relieved them occasionally. In this manner the woman was carried forward until it was dark, when we reached a stream of water at the foot of a high hill called Gankaran-Kooro, and here we stopped for the night, and set about preparing our supper. As we had only ate one handful of meal since the preceding night, and travelled all day in a hot sun, many of the slaves who had loads upon their heads were very much fatigued, and some of them snapped their fingers, which among the negroes is a sure sign of desperation. The slatees immediately put them all in irons, and such of them as had evinced signs of great despondency were kept apart from the rest, and had their hands tied. In the morning they were found greatly recovered.
When the slatees had removed the stings as much as they could, she was washed with water and then rubbed with crushed leaves; however, the poor woman stubbornly refused to go any further, insisting that she would rather die than take another step. After pleas and threats proved fruitless, the whip was finally used; and after enduring a few strokes quietly, she jumped up and walked fairly quickly for another four or five hours, but then she tried to run away from the group, only to fall in the grass due to weakness. Though unable to get back up, the whip was used again, but it had no effect; at which point, Karfa asked two of the slatees to place her on the donkey carrying our dry provisions. She couldn’t sit up straight, and since the donkey was very stubborn, it was impossible to carry her like that. The slatees, however, didn’t want to leave her behind since the day’s journey was almost over; so they made a kind of stretcher out of bamboo sticks and placed her on it, securing her with strips of bark. This stretcher was carried on the heads of two slaves, one walking in front of the other, while two others followed behind to give them breaks. In this way, the woman was carried forward until it got dark, when we reached a stream at the base of a high hill called Gankaran-Kooro. We stopped for the night and started preparing our dinner. Since we had only eaten a handful of meal since the previous night, and had traveled all day under the hot sun, many of the slaves with loads on their heads were completely exhausted, and some of them snapped their fingers, which is a sure sign of desperation among the negroes. The slatees immediately put them all in chains, and those who showed signs of severe hopelessness were separated from the rest and had their hands tied. In the morning, they were found to be much improved.
April 25.—At daybreak poor Nealee was awakened, but her limbs were now become so stiff and painful that she could neither walk nor stand; she was therefore lifted, like a corpse, upon the back of the ass, and the slatees endeavoured to secure her in that situation by fastening her hands together under the ass’s neck, and her feet under the belly, with long slips of bark; but the ass was so very unruly that no sort of treatment could induce him to proceed with his load, and as Nealee made no exertion to prevent herself from falling she was quickly thrown off, and had one of her legs much bruised. Every attempt to carry her forward being thus found ineffectual, the general cry of the coffle was Kang-tegi, kang-tegi (“Cut her throat, cut her throat”)—an operation I did not wish to see performed, and therefore marched onwards with the foremost of the coffle. I had not walked above a mile, when one of Karfa’s domestic slaves came up to me, with poor Nealea’s garment upon the end of his bow, and exclaimed, Nealee affeeleeta (“Nealee is lost”)! I asked him whether the slatees had given him the garment as a reward for cutting her throat. He replied that Karfa and the schoolmaster would not consent to that measure, but had left her on the road, where undoubtedly she soon perished, and was probably devoured by wild beasts.
April 25.—At daybreak, poor Nealee was awakened, but her limbs had become so stiff and painful that she could neither walk nor stand. She was therefore lifted, like a lifeless body, onto the back of the donkey, and the captors tried to secure her by tying her hands together under the donkey’s neck and her feet under its belly with long strips of bark. But the donkey was so wild that no treatment could make him move with his load, and since Nealee made no effort to keep herself from falling, she was quickly thrown off and ended up with a badly bruised leg. Since every attempt to carry her forward was ineffective, the general outcry from the group was Kang-tegi, kang-tegi (“Cut her throat, cut her throat”)—a sight I did not want to witness, so I kept walking with the front of the group. I hadn’t walked more than a mile when one of Karfa’s domestic slaves approached me, holding poor Nealee’s garment on the end of his bow, and shouted, Nealee affeeleeta (“Nealee is lost”)! I asked him if the captors had given him the garment as a reward for killing her. He replied that Karfa and the schoolmaster would not agree to that plan but had left her on the road, where she undoubtedly perished and was likely eaten by wild animals.
The sad fate of this wretched woman, notwithstanding the outcry before mentioned, made a strong impression on the mind of the whole coffle, and the schoolmaster fasted the whole of the ensuing day in consequence of it. We proceeded in deep silence, and soon afterwards crossed the river Furkoomah, which was about as large as the river Wonda. We now travelled with great expedition, every one being apprehensive he might otherwise meet with the fate of poor Nealee. It was, however, with great difficulty that I could keep up, although I threw away my spear and everything that could in the least obstruct me. About noon we saw a large herd of elephants, but they suffered us to pass unmolested; and in the evening we halted near a thicket of bamboo, but found no water, so that we were forced to proceed four miles farther to a small stream, where we stopped for the night. We had marched this day, as I judged, about twenty-six miles.
The tragic fate of this unfortunate woman, despite the earlier outcry, deeply affected everyone in the group, and the schoolmaster fasted all day because of it. We moved along in silence, and soon crossed the Furkoomah River, which was about the same size as the Wonda River. We traveled quickly, with everyone fearing they might suffer the same fate as poor Nealee. However, I struggled to keep up, even after I threw away my spear and anything else that might slow me down. Around noon, we spotted a large herd of elephants, but they let us pass without bothering us. In the evening, we stopped near a bamboo thicket but found no water, so we had to continue four miles further to a small stream, where we camped for the night. I estimated that we had traveled about twenty-six miles that day.
April 26.—This morning two of the schoolmaster’s pupils complained much of pains in their legs, and one of the slaves walked lame, the soles of his feet being very much blistered and inflamed; we proceeded, notwithstanding, and about eleven o’clock began to ascend a rocky hill called Boki-Kooro, and it was past two in the afternoon before we reached the level ground on the other side. This was the most rocky road we had yet encountered, and it hurt our feet much. In a short time we arrived at a pretty large river, called Boki, which we forded; it ran smooth and clear over a bed of whinstone. About a mile to the westward of the river we came to a road which leads to the north-east towards Gadou, and seeing the marks of many horses’ feet upon the soft sand, the slatees conjectured that a party of plunderers had lately rode that way to fall upon some town of Gadou; and lest they should discover upon their return that we had passed, and attempt to pursue us by the marks of our feet, the coffle was ordered to disperse and travel in a loose manner through the high grass and bushes. A little before it was dark, having crossed the ridge of hills to the westward of the river Boki, we came to a well called Cullong Qui (White Sand Well), and here we rested for the night.
April 26.—This morning, two of the schoolmaster’s students complained a lot about pain in their legs, and one of the slaves was limping because the soles of his feet were badly blistered and inflamed. We moved on anyway, and around eleven o’clock, we started climbing a rocky hill called Boki-Kooro. It was past two in the afternoon when we finally reached the flat ground on the other side. This was the most rugged road we’d encountered so far, and it really hurt our feet. Not long after, we arrived at a fairly large river called Boki, which we crossed; it flowed smoothly and clearly over a bed of whinstone. About a mile west of the river, we came across a road leading northeast toward Gadou. Noticing the marks of many horses' hooves in the soft sand, the slatees suspected that a group of thieves had recently passed that way to attack a town in Gadou. To avoid being discovered upon their return and having them track us by our footprints, we decided to spread out and walk loosely through the tall grass and bushes. Just before dark, after crossing the ridge of hills west of the Boki River, we reached a well called Cullong Qui (White Sand Well), where we rested for the night.
April 27.—We departed from the well early in the morning, and walked on with the greatest alacrity, in hopes of reaching a town before night. The road during the forenoon led through extensive thickets of dry bamboos. About two o’clock we came to a stream called Nunkolo, where we were each of us regaled with a handful of meal, which, according to a superstitious custom, was not to be eaten until it was first moistened with water from this stream. About four o’clock we reached Sooseeta, a small Jallonka village, situated in the district of Kullo, which comprehends all that tract of country lying along the banks of the Black River, or main branch of the Senegal. These were the first human habitations we had seen since we left the village to the westward of Kinytakooro, having travelled in the course of the last five days upwards of one hundred miles. Here, after a great deal of entreaty, we were provided with huts to sleep in, but the master of the village plainly told us that he could not give us any provisions, as there had lately been a great scarcity in this part of the country. He assured us that, before they had gathered in their present crops, the whole inhabitants of Kullo had been for twenty-nine days without tasting corn, during which time they supported themselves entirely upon the yellow powder which is found in the pods of the nitta, so called by the natives, a species of mimosa, and upon the seeds of the bamboo-cane, which, when properly pounded and dressed, taste very much like rice. As our dry provisions were not yet exhausted, a considerable quantity of kouskous was dressed for supper, and many of the villagers were invited to take part of the repast; but they made a very bad return for this kindness, for in the night they seized upon one of the schoolmaster’s boys, who had fallen asleep under the bentang tree, and carried him away. The boy fortunately awoke before he was far from the village, and, setting up a loud scream, the man who carried him put his hand upon his mouth and ran with him into the woods; but afterwards understanding that he belonged to the schoolmaster, whose place of residence is only three days’ journey distant, he thought, I suppose, that he could not retain him as a slave without the schoolmaster’s knowledge, and therefore stripped off the boy’s clothes and permitted him to return.
April 27.—We left the well early in the morning and walked on with great eagerness, hoping to reach a town before nightfall. The road in the morning took us through vast thickets of dry bamboo. Around two o’clock, we arrived at a stream called Nunkolo, where each of us was given a handful of meal that, according to a superstitious custom, couldn’t be eaten until it was first wet with water from this stream. By four o’clock, we reached Sooseeta, a small Jallonka village, located in the Kullo district, which covers the area along the banks of the Black River, the main branch of the Senegal. These were the first human settlements we had seen since leaving the village west of Kinytakooro, having traveled over one hundred miles in the last five days. Here, after a lot of pleading, we were given huts to sleep in, but the village chief clearly told us he couldn’t provide us with any food, as there had recently been a severe shortage in this area. He assured us that before they harvested their current crops, all the people in Kullo had gone twenty-nine days without eating corn, during which time they survived entirely on the yellow powder found in the pods of the nitta, a type of mimosa, and on the seeds of the bamboo-cane, which, when properly ground and prepared, taste a lot like rice. Since our dry food wasn’t completely used up, a significant amount of kouskous was made for dinner, and many villagers were invited to join us; however, they repaid this kindness poorly, as during the night, they kidnapped one of the schoolmaster’s boys who had fallen asleep under the bentang tree. Fortunately, the boy woke up before he got far from the village, and when he screamed loudly, the man carrying him covered his mouth and fled into the woods; but later realizing the boy belonged to the schoolmaster, who lived just three days' journey away, he must have thought he couldn’t keep him as a slave without the schoolmaster knowing, so he took off the boy's clothes and let him go back.
April 28.—Early in the morning we departed from Sooseeta, and about ten o’clock came to an unwalled town, called Manna, the inhabitants of which were employed in collecting the fruit of the nitta-trees, which are very numerous in this neighbourhood. The pods are long and narrow, and contain a few black seeds, enveloped in the fine mealy powder before mentioned; the meal itself is of a bright yellow colour, resembling the flour of sulphur, and has a sweet mucilaginous taste. When eaten by itself it is clammy, but when mixed with milk or water it constitutes a very pleasant and nourishing article of diet.
April 28.—Early in the morning, we left Sooseeta and around ten o’clock arrived at an unprotected town called Manna. The locals were busy gathering the fruit from the numerous nitta trees in the area. The pods are long and narrow, containing a few black seeds wrapped in fine powder, as previously described. The powder itself is bright yellow, similar to sulfur flour, and has a sweet, sticky taste. Eating it on its own can be a bit gummy, but when mixed with milk or water, it makes for a tasty and nourishing food.
The language of the people of Manna is the same that is spoken all over that extensive and hilly country called Jallonkadoo. Some of the words have a great affinity to the Mandingo, but the natives themselves consider it as a distinct language. Their numerals are these:—
The language spoken by the people of Manna is the same one used throughout the vast and hilly region known as Jallonkadoo. Some of the words are closely related to Mandingo, but the locals see it as a separate language. Their numbers are as follows:—
One One |
Kidding. Just joking. |
Two Two |
Fidding. Fiddling. |
Three Three |
Sarra. Sarra. |
Four Four |
Nani. Nani. |
Five Five |
Soolo. Soolo. |
Six Six |
Seni. Seni. |
Seven Seven |
Soolo ma fidding. Soolo's online. |
Eight Eight |
Soolo ma sarra. Soolo, I'm sorry. |
Nine Nine |
Soolo ma nani. Soolo my friend. |
Ten Ten |
Nuff. Enough. |
The Jallonkas, like the Mandingoes, are governed by a number of petty chiefs, who are in a great measure independent of each other. They have no common sovereign, and the chiefs are seldom upon such terms of friendship as to assist each other even in war-time. The chief of Manna, with a number of his people, accompanied us to the banks of the Bafing, or Black River (a principal branch of the Senegal), which we crossed upon a bridge of bamboos of a very singular construction. The river at this place is smooth and deep, and has very little current. Two tall trees, when tied together by the tops, are sufficiently long to reach from one side to the other, the roots resting upon the rocks, and the tops floating in the water. When a few trees have been placed in this direction, they are covered with dry bamboos, so as to form a floating bridge, with a sloping gangway at each end, where the trees rest upon the rocks. This bridge is carried away every year by the swelling of the river in the rainy season, and is constantly rebuilt by the inhabitants of Manna, who, on that account, expect a small tribute from every passenger.
The Jallonkas, like the Mandingoes, are led by several local chiefs who are mostly independent from one another. They don’t have a common ruler, and the chiefs usually aren’t on friendly terms enough to support each other, even in times of war. The chief of Manna, along with some of his people, accompanied us to the banks of the Bafing, or Black River (a major branch of the Senegal), which we crossed on a uniquely constructed bamboo bridge. The river here is smooth and deep, with a very gentle current. Two tall trees, tied together at the tops, are long enough to reach from one side to the other, with their roots resting on the rocks and their tops floating in the water. Once a few trees are placed this way, they are covered with dry bamboos to create a floating bridge, with sloping ramps at each end where the trees touch the rocks. This bridge gets washed away every year when the river swells during the rainy season and is regularly rebuilt by the people of Manna, who, for this reason, expect a small fee from every passerby.
In the afternoon we passed several villages, at none of which we could procure a lodging, and in the twilight we received information that two hundred Jallonkas had assembled near a town called Melo, with a view to plunder the coffle. This induced us to alter our course, and we travelled with great secrecy until midnight, when we approached a town called Koba. Before we entered the town the names of all the people belonging to the coffle were called over, and a freeman and three slaves were found to be missing. Every person immediately concluded that the slaves had murdered the freeman and made their escape. It was therefore agreed that six people should go back as far as the last village, and endeavour to find his body, or collect some information concerning the slaves. In the meantime the coffle was ordered to lie concealed in a cotton-field near a large nitta-tree, and nobody to speak except in a whisper. It was towards morning before the six men returned, having heard nothing of the man or the slaves. As none of us had tasted victuals for the last twenty-four hours, it was agreed that we should go into Koba and endeavour to procure some provisions. We accordingly entered the town before it was quite day, and Karfa purchased from the chief man, for three strings of beads, a considerable quantity of ground nuts, which we roasted and ate for breakfast. We were afterwards provided with huts, and rested here for the day.
In the afternoon, we passed several villages, but we couldn’t find a place to stay. As twilight fell, we learned that two hundred Jallonkas had gathered near a town called Melo with plans to raid us. This made us change our route, and we traveled quietly until midnight when we got close to a town named Koba. Before entering the town, we called out the names of everyone in our group and found that one freeman and three slaves were missing. Everyone immediately assumed that the slaves had killed the freeman and fled. We decided that six people should go back to the last village to look for his body or gather information about the slaves. In the meantime, we ordered the rest of the group to hide in a cotton field next to a large nitta tree and to only speak in whispers. It was almost morning when the six men returned, having found nothing about the man or the slaves. Since none of us had eaten in the last twenty-four hours, we agreed to go into Koba to try to get some food. We entered the town before it was fully light, and Karfa bought a good amount of groundnuts from the chief man for three strings of beads. We roasted the nuts and ate them for breakfast. Afterwards, we were given huts and rested there for the day.
About eleven o’clock, to our great joy and surprise, the freeman and slaves who had parted from the coffle the preceding night entered the town. One of the slaves, it seems, had hurt his foot, and the night being very dark they soon lost sight of the coffle. The freeman, as soon as he found himself alone with the slaves was aware of his own danger, and insisted on putting them in irons. The slaves were at first rather unwilling to submit, but when he threatened to stab them one by one with his spear, they made no farther resistance; and he remained with them among the bushes until morning, when he let them out of irons, and came to the town in hopes of hearing which route the coffle had taken. The information that we received concerning the Jallonkas who intended to rob the coffle was this day confirmed, and we were forced to remain here until the afternoon of the 30th, when Karfa hired a number of people to protect us, and we proceeded to a village called Tinkingtang. Departing from this village on the day following, we crossed a high ridge of mountains to the west of the Black River, and travelled over a rough stony country until sunset, when we arrived at Lingicotta, a small village in the district of Woradoo. Here we shook out the last handful of meal from our dry provision-bags, this being the second day, since we crossed the Black River, that we had travelled from morning until night without tasting one morsel of food.
Around eleven o'clock, to our great joy and surprise, the freeman and the slaves who had separated from the group the night before entered the town. One of the slaves had hurt his foot, and since the night was very dark, they quickly lost sight of the group. The freeman, realizing his own danger as soon as he was alone with the slaves, insisted on putting them in chains. The slaves were initially reluctant to comply, but when he threatened to stab them one by one with his spear, they stopped resisting. He stayed with them in the bushes until morning, when he released them from the chains and went to the town in hopes of learning which way the group had gone. The news we received about the Jallonkas planning to rob the group was confirmed that day, and we had to stay here until the afternoon of the 30th, when Karfa hired several people to protect us, and we moved on to a village called Tinkingtang. After leaving that village the next day, we crossed a high ridge of mountains to the west of the Black River and traveled over a rough, stony area until sunset, when we reached Lingicotta, a small village in the district of Woradoo. Here, we finally shook out the last handful of meal from our dry provision bags, marking the second day since we crossed the Black River that we had traveled from morning until night without eating anything.
May 2.—We departed from Lingicotta; but the slaves being very much fatigued, we halted for the night at a village about nine miles to the westward, and procured some provisions through the interest of the schoolmaster, who now sent forward a messenger to Malacotta, his native town, to inform his friends of his arrival in the country, and to desire them to provide the necessary quantity of victuals to entertain the coffle for two or three days.
May 2.—We left Lingicotta, but the slaves were extremely tired, so we stopped for the night at a village about nine miles west. We managed to get some food thanks to the schoolmaster, who sent a messenger ahead to Malacotta, his hometown, to let his friends know he had arrived and to ask them to prepare enough supplies to feed the group for two or three days.
May 3.—We set out for Malacotta, and about noon arrived at a village near a considerable stream of water which flows to the westward. Here we determined to stop for the return of the messenger who had been sent to Malacotta the day before; and as the natives assured me there were no crocodiles in this stream, I went and bathed myself. Very few people here can swim, for they came in numbers to dissuade me from venturing into a pool where they said the water would come over my head. About two o’clock the messenger returned from Malacotta, and the schoolmaster’s elder brother, being impatient to see him, came along with the messenger to meet him at this village. The interview between the two brothers, who had not seen each other for nine years, was very natural and affecting. They fell upon each other’s neck, and it was some time before either of them could speak. At length, when the schoolmaster had a little recovered himself, he took his brother by the hand, and turning round, “This is the man,” said he, pointing to Karfa, “who has been my father in Manding. I would have pointed him out sooner to you, but my heart was too full.”
May 3.—We set out for Malacotta and arrived at a village near a large stream around noon that flows to the west. Here, we decided to wait for the messenger who had gone to Malacotta the day before; the locals assured me that there were no crocodiles in this stream, so I went for a swim. Very few people here can swim, as many came to try to convince me not to go into a pool they said was deep enough to cover my head. Around two o'clock, the messenger returned from Malacotta, and the schoolmaster's older brother, eager to see him, came along with the messenger to meet him in this village. The reunion between the two brothers, who hadn't seen each other in nine years, was very genuine and emotional. They embraced, and it took a while before either of them could say anything. Eventually, when the schoolmaster calmed down a bit, he took his brother’s hand and, turning to Karfa, said, “This is the man who has been like a father to me in Manding. I wanted to introduce you sooner, but I was too overwhelmed."
We reached Malacotta in the evening, where we were well received. This is an unwalled town. The huts for the most part are made of split cane, twisted into a sort of wicker-work, and plastered over with mud. Here we remained three days, and were each day presented with a bullock from the schoolmaster. We were likewise well entertained by the townspeople, who appear to be very active and industrious. They make very good soap by boiling ground nuts in water, and then adding a ley of wood-ashes. They likewise manufacture excellent iron, which they carry to Bondou to barter for salt. A party of the townspeople had lately returned from a trading expedition of this kind, and brought information concerning a war between Almami Abdulkader, king of Foota-Torra, and Damel, king of the Jaloffs. The events of this war soon became a favourite subject with the singing men and the common topic of conversation in all the kingdoms bordering upon the Senegal and Gambia; and, as the account is somewhat singular, I shall here abridge it for the reader’s information. The king of Foota-Torra, inflamed with a zeal for propagating his religion, had sent an embassy to Damel similar to that which he had sent to Kasson, as has been previously related. The ambassador on the present occasion was accompanied by two of the principal bushreens, who carried each a large knife fixed on the top of a long pole. As soon as he had procured admission into the presence of Damel, and announced the pleasure of his Sovereign, he ordered the bushreens to present the emblems of his mission. The two knives were accordingly laid before Damel, and the ambassador explained himself as follows:—“With this knife,” said he, “Abdulkader will condescend to shave the head of Damel, if Damel will embrace the Mohammedan faith; and with this other knife Abdulkader will cut the throat of Damel if Damel refuses to embrace it: take your choice.” Damel coolly told the ambassador that he had no choice to make; he neither chose to have his head shaved nor his throat cut; and with this answer the ambassador was civilly dismissed. Abdulkader took his measures accordingly, and with a powerful army invaded Damel’s country. The inhabitants of the towns and villages filled up their wells, destroyed their provisions, carried off their effects, and abandoned their dwellings as he approached. By this means he was led on from place to place, until he had advanced three days’ journey into the country of the Jaloffs. He had, indeed, met with no opposition, but his army had suffered so much from the scarcity of water that several of his men had died by the way. This induced him to direct his march towards a watering-place in the woods, where his men, having quenched their thirst and being overcome with fatigue, lay down carelessly to sleep among the bushes. In this situation they were attacked by Damel before daybreak and completely routed. Many of them were trampled to death as they lay asleep by the Jaloff horses; others were killed in attempting to make their escape; and a still greater number were taken prisoners. Among the latter was Abdulkader himself. This ambitious, or, rather, frantic prince, who but a month before had sent the threatening message to Damel, was now himself led into his presence as a miserable captive. The behaviour of Damel on this occasion is never mentioned by the singing men but in terms of the highest approbation; and it was indeed so extraordinary in an African prince that the reader may find it difficult to give credit to the recital. When his royal prisoner was brought before him in irons, and thrown upon the ground, the magnanimous Damel, instead of setting his foot upon his neck and stabbing him with his spear, according to custom in such cases, addressed him as follows:—“Abdulkader, answer me this question. If the chance of war had placed me in your situation, and you in mine, how would you have treated me?” “I would have thrust my spear into your heart,” returned Abdulkader, with great firmness; “and I know that a similar fate awaits me.” “Not so,” said Damel; “my spear is indeed red with the blood of your subjects, killed in battle, and I could now give it a deeper stain by dipping it in your own; but this would not build up my towns, nor bring to life the thousands who fell in the woods. I will not, therefore, kill you in cold blood, but I will retain you as my slave, until I perceive that your presence in your own kingdom will be no longer dangerous to your neighbours, and then I will consider of the proper way of disposing of you.” Abdulkader was accordingly retained, and worked as a slave for three months; at the end of which period Damel listened to the solicitations of the inhabitants of Foota-Torra, and restored to them their king. Strange as this story may appear, I have no doubt of the truth of it. It was told me at Malacotta by the negroes; it was afterwards related to me by the Europeans on the Gambia, by some of the French at Goree, and confirmed by nine slaves who were taken prisoners along with Abdulkader by the watering-place in the woods and carried in the same ship with me to the West Indies.
We arrived in Malacotta in the evening, where we were warmly welcomed. This town has no walls. Most of the huts are made from split cane, woven like wicker, and covered with mud. We stayed there for three days, and each day the schoolmaster provided us with a bullock. The townspeople also treated us well; they seem very hardworking and industrious. They make excellent soap by boiling ground nuts in water and adding a wood-ash solution. They also produce high-quality iron, which they take to Bondou to trade for salt. A group of locals had recently returned from a trading trip and brought news about a war between Almami Abdulkader, the king of Foota-Torra, and Damel, the king of the Jaloffs. The events of this war quickly became a popular topic among the singing men and a common conversation piece in all the kingdoms near the Senegal and Gambia; since the account is quite intriguing, I’ll summarize it for the reader’s understanding. The king of Foota-Torra, driven by a desire to spread his religion, had sent an embassy to Damel, similar to the one he had sent to Kasson, as previously mentioned. On this occasion, the ambassador was accompanied by two prominent bushreens, each carrying a large knife on a long pole. After he gained access to Damel's presence and expressed his king’s wishes, he instructed the bushreens to display the symbols of his mission. The two knives were presented to Damel, and the ambassador explained: “With this knife, Abdulkader will graciously shave your head if you convert to the Mohammedan faith; and with this other knife, Abdulkader will cut your throat if you refuse: it’s your choice.” Damel calmly responded that he didn’t have a choice; he didn’t want his head shaved or his throat cut, and with that, the ambassador was politely dismissed. Abdulkader then took action accordingly and invaded Damel’s territory with a powerful army. The residents of the towns and villages filled their wells, destroyed their food supplies, carried away their belongings, and fled their homes as he approached. This led him to move from place to place until he had traveled three days into the Jaloffs' land. Although he faced no resistance, his army suffered greatly from a lack of water, resulting in the deaths of several of his men along the way. This prompted him to head toward a watering spot in the woods, where his men, after quenching their thirst and being exhausted, carelessly fell asleep among the bushes. In this vulnerable state, they were attacked by Damel before dawn and were completely defeated. Many were trampled to death in their sleep by the horses of the Jaloffs; others were killed while trying to escape; and an even greater number were captured. Among the captured was Abdulkader himself. This ambitious, or rather reckless, prince, who had sent a threatening message to Damel just a month earlier, was now brought before him as a pitiful captive. Damel’s behavior at this moment is always described by the singing men with the highest praise; it was genuinely so remarkable for an African prince that readers might find it hard to believe. When Abdulkader was brought before him in chains and thrown on the ground, the noble Damel, instead of stepping on his neck and stabbing him with his spear as was customary in such cases, addressed him: “Abdulkader, answer me this question. If the roles were reversed, what would you have done?” “I would have stabbed you through the heart,” Abdulkader replied firmly; “and I know that’s the fate I deserve.” “Not so,” said Damel; “my spear is indeed stained with the blood of your subjects killed in battle, and I could easily add to that by killing you; but this wouldn’t restore my towns or bring back the thousands who died in the woods. Therefore, I will not kill you in cold blood, but I will keep you as my slave until I see that your presence in your own kingdom no longer poses a threat to your neighbors, and then I will decide what to do with you.” Abdulkader was held captive and worked as a slave for three months; at the end of that period, Damel listened to the pleas of the people of Foota-Torra and returned their king to them. As strange as this story may sound, I have no doubt about its truth. I was told it at Malacotta by the locals, later recounted by Europeans on the Gambia, shared by some French at Goree, and confirmed by nine slaves who were captured with Abdulkader at the watering place in the woods and transported with me to the West Indies.
CHAPTER XXVI.
MEETING WITH DR. LAIDLEY—BACK TO THE COAST—TRIP TO ENGLAND.
On the 7th of May we departed from Malacotta, and having crossed the Ba Lee (Honey River), a branch of the Senegal, we arrived in the evening at a walled town called Bintingala, where we rested two days. From thence, in one day more, we proceeded to Dindikoo, a small town situated at the bottom of a high ridge of hills, from which this district is named Konkodoo (the country of mountains). These hills are very productive of gold. I was shown a small quantity of this metal which had been lately collected: the grains were about the usual size, but much flatter than those of Manding, and were found in white quartz, which had been broken to pieces by hammers. At this town I met with a negro whose hair and skin were of a dull white colour. He was of that sort which are called in the Spanish West Indies albinos, or white negroes. The skin is cadaverous and unsightly, and the natives considered this complexion (I believe truly) as the effect of disease.
On May 7th, we left Malacotta and crossed the Ba Lee (Honey River), a branch of the Senegal. We arrived in the evening at a walled town called Bintingala, where we stayed for two days. From there, in another day's journey, we went to Dindikoo, a small town at the base of a high ridge of hills, which is why this area is called Konkodoo (the country of mountains). These hills are very rich in gold. I was shown a small amount of this metal that had recently been collected: the grains were roughly the usual size, but much flatter than those from Manding, and they were found in white quartz that had been broken into pieces with hammers. In this town, I met a man whose hair and skin were a dull white color. He belonged to what are referred to in the Spanish West Indies as albinos, or white negroes. His skin was pale and unattractive, and the locals thought (I believe correctly) that this complexion was a result of disease.
May 11.—At daybreak we departed from Dindikoo, and, after a toilsome day’s travel, arrived in the evening at Satadoo, the capital of a district of the same name. This town was formerly of considerable extent, but many families had left it in consequence of the predatory incursions of the Foulahs of Foota-Jalla, who made it a practice to come secretly through the woods and carry off people from the cornfields and even from the wells near the town. In the afternoon of the 12th we crossed the Falemé River, the same which I had formerly crossed at Bondou in my journey eastward. This river, at this season of the year, is easily forded at this place, the stream being only about two feet deep. The water is very pure, and flows rapidly over a bed of sand and gravel. We lodged for the night at a small village called Medina, the sole property of a Mandingo merchant who, by a long intercourse with Europeans, has been induced to adopt some of their customs. His victuals were served up in pewter dishes, and even his houses were built after the fashion of the English houses on the Gambia.
May 11.—At dawn, we left Dindikoo, and after a long day of travel, we arrived in the evening at Satadoo, the capital of a district with the same name. This town used to be quite large, but many families had left due to the raiding activities of the Foulahs from Foota-Jalla, who would sneak through the woods to capture people from the fields and even from the wells nearby. In the afternoon of the 12th, we crossed the Falemé River, the same one I had crossed before at Bondou during my eastward journey. At this time of year, the river is easy to ford here, with the water being only about two feet deep. The water is very clear and flows quickly over a bed of sand and gravel. We spent the night in a small village called Medina, which is owned entirely by a Mandingo merchant who, through long interactions with Europeans, has adopted some of their customs. His food was served on pewter dishes, and even his houses were built in the style of English houses along the Gambia.
May 13.—In the morning, as we were preparing to depart, a coffle of slaves belonging to some Serawoolli traders crossed the river, and agreed to proceed with us to Baniserile, the capital of Dentila—a very long day’s journey from this place. We accordingly set out together, and travelled with great expedition through the woods until noon, when one of the Serawoolli slaves dropped the load from his head, for which he was smartly whipped. The load was replaced, but he had not proceeded above a mile before he let it fall a second time, for which he received the same punishment. After this he travelled in great pain until about two o’clock, when we stopped to breathe a little by a pool of water, the day being remarkably hot. The poor slave was now so completely exhausted that his master was obliged to release him from the rope, for he lay motionless on the ground. A Serawoolli, therefore, undertook to remain with him and endeavour to bring him to the town during the cool of the night; in the meanwhile we continued our route, and after a very hard day’s travel, arrived at Baniserile late in the evening.
May 13.—In the morning, as we were getting ready to leave, a group of slaves owned by some Serawoolli traders crossed the river and agreed to travel with us to Baniserile, the capital of Dentila—a very long day’s journey from here. So we set out together and moved quickly through the woods until noon, when one of the Serawoolli slaves dropped the load from his head and got sharply whipped for it. The load was put back on, but he hadn’t gone more than a mile before he dropped it again, earning him the same punishment. After that, he struggled to walk in pain until around two o’clock, when we stopped to take a breather by a pool of water, as it was extremely hot. The poor slave was so exhausted that his master had to untie him from the rope, as he lay motionless on the ground. A Serawoolli then took it upon himself to stay with him and try to get him to town during the cooler night. Meanwhile, we continued on our journey, and after a very grueling day of travel, we arrived in Baniserile late in the evening.
One of our slatees was a native of this place, from which he had been absent three years. This man invited me to go with him to his house, at the gate of which his friends met him with many expressions of joy, shaking hands with him, embracing him, and singing and dancing before him. As soon as he had seated himself upon a mat by the threshold of his door, a young woman (his intended bride) brought a little water in a calabash, and, kneeling down before him, desired him to wash his hands; when he had done this the girl, with a tear of joy sparkling in her eyes, drank the water—this being considered as the greatest proof she could possibly give him of her fidelity and attachment. About eight o’clock the same evening the Serawoolli who had been left in the woods to take care of the fatigued slave returned and told us that he was dead; the general opinion, however, was that he himself had killed him or left him to perish on the road, for the Serawoollies are said to be infinitely more cruel in their treatment of slaves than the Mandingoes. We remained at Baniserile two days, in order to purchase native iron, shea-butter, and some other articles for sale on the Gambia; and here the slatee who had invited me to his house, and who possessed three slaves, part of the coffle, having obtained information that the price on the coast was very low, determined to separate from us and remain with his slaves where he was until an opportunity should offer of disposing of them to advantage—giving us to understand that he should complete his nuptials with the young woman before mentioned in the meantime.
One of our slatees was from this area and had been away for three years. This man invited me to his house, where his friends greeted him with joy, shaking hands, hugging him, and singing and dancing in celebration. Once he sat down on a mat by the door, a young woman (his future bride) brought a little water in a calabash. She knelt before him and asked him to wash his hands; after he did this, the girl, with tears of joy in her eyes, drank the water—this was seen as the strongest sign of her loyalty and love for him. Later that evening, around eight o'clock, the Serawoolli who had stayed behind to look after the tired slave came back and told us that he was dead. However, the general belief was that he had either killed him or left him to die on the road, as Serawoollies are said to be much harsher in their treatment of slaves than Mandingoes. We stayed in Baniserile for two days to buy native iron, shea butter, and other goods to sell in Gambia. During this time, the slatee who had invited me to his house and owned three slaves from the coffle learned that the prices on the coast were very low. He decided to separate from us and stay with his slaves until he could find a better opportunity to sell them—indicating that he planned to marry the young woman mentioned earlier in the meantime.
May 16.—We departed from Baniserile and travelled through thick woods until noon, when we saw at a distance the town of Julifunda, but did not approach it, as we proposed to rest for the night at a large town called Kirwani, which we reached about four o’clock in the afternoon. This town stands in a valley, and the country for more than a mile round it is cleared of wood and well cultivated. The inhabitants appear to be very active and industrious, and seem to have carried the system of agriculture to some degree of perfection, for they collect the dung of their cattle into large heaps during the dry season for the purpose of manuring their land with it at the proper time. I saw nothing like this in any other part of Africa. Near the town are several smelting furnaces, from which the natives obtain very good iron. They afterwards hammer the metal into small bars, about a foot in length and two inches in breadth, one of which bars is sufficient to make two Mandingo corn-hoes. On the morning after our arrival we were visited by a slatee of this place, who informed Karfa that among some slaves he had lately purchased was a native of Foota-Jalla, and as that country was at no great distance he could not safely employ him in the labours of the field, lest he should effect his escape. The slatee was therefore desirous of exchanging this slave for one of Karfa’s, and offered some cloth and shea-butter to induce Karfa to comply with the proposal, which was accepted. The slatee thereupon sent a boy to order the slave in question to bring him a few ground-nuts. The poor creature soon afterwards entered the court in which we were sitting, having no suspicion of what was negotiating, until the master caused the gate to be shut, and told him to sit down. The slave now saw his danger, and, perceiving the gate to be shut upon him, threw down the nuts and jumped over the fence. He was immediately pursued and overtaken by the slatees, who brought him back and secured him in irons, after which one of Karfa’s slaves was released and delivered in exchange. The unfortunate captive was at first very much dejected, but in the course of a few days his melancholy gradually subsided, and he became at length as cheerful as any of his companions.
May 16.—We left Baniserile and traveled through thick woods until noon, when we spotted the town of Julifunda in the distance but didn’t approach it, as we planned to stay for the night at a larger town called Kirwani, which we reached around four o’clock in the afternoon. This town is situated in a valley, and the land for more than a mile around it is cleared of trees and well-farmed. The locals seem very active and hardworking, and they have advanced their agricultural practices—collecting animal dung into large piles during the dry season to use as fertilizer at the right time. I didn’t see anything like this in any other part of Africa. Close to the town are several smelting furnaces, from which the locals produce high-quality iron. They then forge the metal into small bars about a foot long and two inches wide, with one of these bars being enough to make two Mandingo corn-hoes. The morning after we arrived, a local slatee visited us and informed Karfa that among some slaves he had recently bought was someone from Foota-Jalla. Since that area was not far away, he couldn’t safely use him for field labor, fearing he might escape. The slatee wanted to trade this slave for one of Karfa’s and offered some cloth and shea butter to persuade him, which Karfa accepted. The slatee then sent a boy to tell the slave to bring him some ground nuts. The poor man soon entered the courtyard where we were sitting, unaware of the negotiations happening until the master closed the gate and told him to sit down. The slave then realized his predicament, saw that the gate was shut, dropped the nuts, and jumped over the fence. He was quickly chased down and captured by the slatees, who brought him back and secured him in chains, after which one of Karfa’s slaves was freed and given in exchange. The unfortunate captive was initially very downcast, but over the next few days, his sadness gradually faded, and he eventually became as cheerful as his companions.
Departing from Kirwani on the morning of the 20th we entered the Tenda Wilderness, of two days’ journey. The woods were very thick, and the country shelved towards the south-west. About ten o’clock we met a coffle of twenty-six people and seven loaded asses returning from the Gambia. Most of the men were armed with muskets, and had broad belts of scarlet cloth over their shoulders and European hats upon their heads. They informed us that there was very little demand for slaves on the coast, as no vessel had arrived for some months past. On hearing this the Serawoollies, who had travelled with us from the Falemé River, separated themselves and their slaves from the coffle. They had not, they said, the means of maintaining their slaves in Gambia until a vessel should arrive, and were unwilling to sell them to disadvantage; they therefore departed to the northward for Kajaaga. We continued our route through the wilderness, and travelled all day through a rugged country covered with extensive thickets of bamboo. At sunset, to our great joy, we arrived at a pool of water near a large tabba-tree, whence the place is called Tabbagee, and here we rested a few hours. The water at this season of the year is by no means plentiful in these woods, and as the days were insufferably hot Karfa proposed to travel in the night. Accordingly about eleven o’clock the slaves were taken out of their irons, and the people of the coffle received orders to keep close together, as well to prevent the slaves from attempting to escape as on account of the wild beasts. We travelled with great alacrity until daybreak, when it was discovered that a free woman had parted from the coffle in the night; her name was called until the woods resounded, but, no answer being given, we conjectured that she had either mistaken the road or that a lion had seized her unperceived. At length it was agreed that four people should go back a few miles to a small rivulet, where some of the coffle had stopped to drink as we passed it in the night, and that the coffle should wait for their return. The sun was about an hour high before the people came back with the woman, whom they found lying fast asleep by the stream. We now resumed our journey, and about eleven o’clock reached a walled town called Tambacunda, where we were well received. Here we remained four days on account of a palaver which was held on the following occasion:—Modi Lemina, one of the slatees belonging to the coffle, had formerly married a woman of this town, who had borne him two children; he afterwards went to Manding, and remained there eight years without sending any account of himself during all that time to his deserted wife, who, seeing no prospect of his return, at the end of three years had married another man, to whom she had likewise borne two children. Lemina now claimed his wife; but the second husband refused to deliver her up, insisting that by the laws of Africa when a man has been three years absent from his wife, without giving her notice of his being alive, the woman is at liberty to marry again. After all the circumstances had been fully investigated in an assembly of the chief men, it was determined that the wife should make her choice, and be at liberty either to return to the first husband, or continue with the second, as she alone should think proper. Favourable as this determination was to the lady, she found it a difficult matter to make up her mind, and requested time for consideration; but I think I could perceive that first love would carry the day. Lemina was indeed somewhat older than his rival, but he was also much richer. What weight this circumstance had in the scale of his wife’s affections I pretend not to say.
Departing from Kirwani on the morning of the 20th, we entered the Tenda Wilderness, a two-day journey. The woods were very dense, and the land sloped towards the southwest. Around ten o'clock, we met a group of twenty-six people and seven loaded donkeys returning from the Gambia. Most of the men were armed with muskets, wearing broad scarlet belts slung over their shoulders and European hats on their heads. They told us that there was very little demand for slaves on the coast, as no ships had arrived for several months. Upon hearing this, the Serawoollies, who had traveled with us from the Falemé River, separated themselves and their slaves from the group. They said they couldn't afford to keep their slaves in Gambia until a ship arrived and were unwilling to sell them at a loss; they then headed north towards Kajaaga. We continued our journey through the wilderness, traveling all day through a rugged area filled with thick bamboo thickets. At sunset, to our great relief, we arrived at a pool of water near a large tabba tree, hence the place is called Tabbagee, and we rested there for a few hours. Water is scarce in these woods at this time of year, and since the days were unbearably hot, Karfa suggested we travel at night. So around eleven o'clock, the slaves were released from their chains, and the members of the group were instructed to stay close together, both to prevent the slaves from escaping and to protect against wild animals. We traveled eagerly until dawn, when we discovered that a free woman had left the group during the night. We called her name until the woods echoed, but when there was no response, we guessed that she had either lost her way or that a lion had taken her without us noticing. Eventually, it was decided that four people would go back a few miles to a small stream where some of the group had stopped to drink as we passed it in the night, and that the rest should wait for their return. The sun was about an hour high when they returned with the woman, who they found fast asleep by the stream. We resumed our journey and reached a walled town called Tambacunda around eleven o'clock, where we were warmly welcomed. We stayed for four days because of a dispute that arose on the following occasion: Modi Lemina, one of the slatees in our group, had previously married a woman from this town, with whom he had two children. He later went to Manding and stayed there for eight years without any word to his abandoned wife, who, seeing no chance of his return, married another man after three years, with whom she also had two children. Lemina now claimed his wife, but the second husband refused to let her go, asserting that according to African law, after a man has been absent for three years without notifying his wife of his whereabouts, she is free to remarry. After a full investigation of the circumstances by an assembly of the town's leaders, it was decided that the wife should choose whether to return to her first husband or stay with her second husband, depending on her preference. Although this decision favored the woman, she found it difficult to decide and asked for time to think; however, I suspect that first love would win out in the end. Lemina was indeed somewhat older than his rival, but he was also much wealthier. How much this influenced his wife's feelings, I can't say.
On the morning of the 26th, as we departed from Tambacunda, Karfa observed to me that there were no shea-trees farther to the westward than this town. I had collected and brought with me from Manding the leaves and flowers of this tree, but they were so greatly bruised on the road that I thought it best to gather another specimen at this place. The appearance of the fruit evidently places the shea-tree in the natural order of Sapotæ, and it has some resemblance to the mudhuca tree described by Lieutenant Charles Hamilton in the “Asiatic Researches,” vol. i., p. 300.
On the morning of the 26th, as we left Tambacunda, Karfa pointed out to me that there were no shea trees any farther west than this town. I had collected leaves and flowers from this tree in Manding, but they were so badly bruised on the journey that I decided it would be better to gather a fresh sample here. The fruit’s appearance clearly places the shea tree in the natural order of Sapotæ, and it looks somewhat like the mudhuca tree described by Lieutenant Charles Hamilton in the “Asiatic Researches,” vol. i., p. 300.
About one o’clock on the morning of the 26th we reached Sibikillin, a walled village; but the inhabitants having the character of inhospitality towards strangers, and of being much addicted to theft, we did not think proper to enter the gate. We rested a short time under a tree, and then continued our route until it was dark, when we halted for the night by a small stream running towards the Gambia. Next day the road led over a wild and rocky country, everywhere rising into hills and abounding with monkeys and wild beasts. In the rivulets among the hills we found great plenty of fish. This was a very hard day’s journey; and it was not until sunset that we reached the village of Koomboo, near to which are the ruins of a large town formerly destroyed by war. The inhabitants of Koomboo, like those of Sibikillin, have so bad a reputation that strangers seldom lodge in the village; we accordingly rested for the night in the fields, where we erected temporary huts for our protection, there being great appearance of rain.
About one o’clock in the morning on the 26th, we arrived at Sibikillin, a walled village. However, since the residents were known for being unfriendly to strangers and prone to theft, we decided not to enter through the gate. We rested briefly under a tree and then continued on our way until it got dark, at which point we stopped for the night by a small stream flowing toward the Gambia. The next day, the road took us over wild, rocky terrain, filled with hills and abundant with monkeys and wild animals. In the streams among the hills, we found plenty of fish. This was a tough day of travel, and it wasn’t until sunset that we reached the village of Koomboo, near the ruins of a large town that had been destroyed by war. The people of Koomboo, much like those in Sibikillin, had such a poor reputation that strangers rarely stayed in the village; so we decided to sleep in the fields, where we built temporary huts for shelter, as there were signs of impending rain.
May 28.—We departed from Koomboo, and slept at a Foulah town, about seven miles to the westward; from which, on the day following, having crossed a considerable branch of the Gambia, called Neola Koba, we reached a well-inhabited part of the country. Here are several towns within sight of each other, collectively called Tenda, but each is distinguished also by its particular name. We lodged at one of them, called Koba Tenda, where we remained the day following, in order to procure provisions for our support in crossing the Simbani woods. On the 30th we reached Jallacotta, a considerable town, but much infested by Foulah banditti, who come through the woods from Bondou and steal everything they can lay their hands on. A few days before our arrival they had stolen twenty head of cattle, and on the day following made a second attempt, but were beaten off and one of them was taken prisoner. Here one of the slaves belonging to the coffle, who had travelled with great difficulty for the last three days, was found unable to proceed any farther: his master (a singing man) proposed therefore to exchange him for a young slave girl belonging to one of the townspeople. The poor girl was ignorant of her fate until the bundles were all tied up in the morning, and the coffle ready to depart, when, coming with some other young women to see the coffle set out, her master took her by the hand, and delivered her to the singing man. Never was a face of serenity more suddenly changed into one of the deepest distress; the terror she manifested on having the load put upon her head and the rope fastened round her neck, and the sorrow with which she bade adieu to her companions, were truly affecting. About nine o’clock we crossed a large plain covered with ciboa-trees (a species of palm), and came to the river Nerico, a branch of the Gambia. This was but a small river at this time, but in the rainy season it is often dangerous to travellers. As soon as we had crossed this river, the singing men began to vociferate a particular song, expressive of their joy at having got safe into the west country, or, as they expressed it, the land of the setting sun. The country was found to be very level, and the soil a mixture of clay and sand. In the afternoon it rained hard, and we had recourse to the common negro umbrella, a large ciboa-leaf, which, being placed upon the head, completely defends the whole body from the rain. We lodged for the night under the shade of a large tabba-tree, near the ruins of a village. On the morning following we crossed a stream called Noulico, and about two o’clock, to my infinite joy, I saw myself once more on the banks of the Gambia, which at this place, being deep and smooth, is navigable; but the people told me that a little lower down the stream is so shallow that the coffles frequently cross it on foot.
May 28.—We left Koomboo and spent the night in a Foulah town, about seven miles to the west. The next day, after crossing a significant branch of the Gambia called Neola Koba, we arrived in a well-populated area. Here, several towns are visible from one another and are collectively called Tenda, but each has its own unique name. We stayed in one of them called Koba Tenda, where we remained the following day to gather supplies for our journey through the Simbani woods. On the 30th, we reached Jallacotta, a sizable town, but it was heavily plagued by Foulah bandits who would come through the woods from Bondou and steal whatever they could find. A few days before we arrived, they had stolen twenty cattle, and the next day they attempted to steal again but were driven off, and one of them was captured. Here, one of the slaves traveling with us, who had struggled greatly for the last three days, was unable to continue. His master, a singer, proposed to trade him for a young slave girl from one of the local residents. The poor girl was unaware of her fate until the bundles were all tied up the next morning, right as the coffle was getting ready to leave. When she came with some other young women to see us off, her master took her by the hand and gave her to the singer. Never has a face of calmness transformed so suddenly into one of deep distress; the fear she showed when the load was placed on her head and the rope was tied around her neck, along with the sorrow she felt saying goodbye to her friends, was truly heartbreaking. Around nine o’clock, we crossed a large plain filled with ciboa trees (a type of palm) and arrived at the Nerico River, a branch of the Gambia. At that time, it was a small river, but during the rainy season, it can become hazardous for travelers. Once we crossed the river, the singing men began to shout a specific song, celebrating their safe arrival in the western region, which they called the land of the setting sun. The land was quite flat, with soil that was a mix of clay and sand. In the afternoon, it rained heavily, and we used the typical African umbrella, a large ciboa leaf, which served to shield our entire body from the rain when held over the head. We spent the night under the shade of a large tabba tree, close to the ruins of a village. The following morning, we crossed a stream called Noulico, and around two o’clock, to my immense joy, I found myself once again on the banks of the Gambia, which at this point is deep and smooth enough for navigation; however, locals told me that just a bit downstream, the water gets so shallow that the coffles often have to cross it on foot.
June 2.—We departed from Seesukunda and passed a number of villages, at none of which was the coffle permitted to stop, although we were all very much fatigued. It was four o’clock in the afternoon before we reached Baraconda, where we rested one day. Departing from Baraconda on the morning of the 4th, we reached in a few hours Medina, the capital of the king of Woolli’s dominions, from whom the reader may recollect I received an hospitable reception in the beginning of December, 1795, in my journey eastward. I immediately inquired concerning the health of my good old benefactor, and learned with great concern that he was dangerously ill. As Karfa would not allow the coffle to stop, I could not present my respects to the king in person, but I sent him word by the officer to whom we paid customs that his prayers for my safety had not been unavailing. We continued our route until sunset, when we lodged at a small village a little to the westward of Kootacunda, and on the day following arrived at Jindey, where, eighteen months before, I had parted from my friend Dr. Laidley—an interval during which I had not beheld the face of a Christian, nor once heard the delightful sound of my native language.
June 2.—We left Seesukunda and passed several villages, where the group wasn't allowed to stop, even though we were all really tired. It was four o’clock in the afternoon when we finally got to Baraconda, where we took a day to rest. We set off from Baraconda on the morning of the 4th and reached Medina, the capital of the king of Woolli, within a few hours. You might remember that I received a warm welcome from him back in early December 1795 during my journey eastward. I immediately asked about the health of my kind old benefactor and was disheartened to learn that he was seriously ill. Since Karfa wouldn’t permit the group to stop, I couldn't deliver my respects to the king in person, but I sent word through the officer we paid customs to, letting him know that his prayers for my safety had been effective. We continued on our route until sunset, when we stayed overnight at a small village slightly west of Kootacunda. The next day, we arrived in Jindey, where, eighteen months earlier, I had said goodbye to my friend Dr. Laidley—during which time I hadn’t seen a Christian or heard the sweet sound of my native language even once.
Being now arrived within a short distance of Pisania, from whence my journey originally commenced, and learning that my friend Karfa was not likely to meet with an immediate opportunity of selling his slaves on the Gambia, it occurred to me to suggest to him that he would find it for his interest to leave them at Jindey until a market should offer. Karfa agreed with me in this opinion, and hired from the chief man of the town huts for their accommodation, and a piece of land on which to employ them in raising corn and other provisions for their maintenance. With regard to himself, he declared that he would not quit me until my departure from Africa. We set out accordingly—Karfa, myself, and one of the Foulahs belonging to the coffle—early on the morning of the 9th; but although I was now approaching the end of my tedious and toilsome journey, and expected in another day to meet with countrymen and friends, I could not part for the last time with my unfortunate fellow-travellers—doomed, as I knew most of them to be, to a life of captivity and slavery in a foreign land—without great emotion. During a wearisome peregrination of more than five hundred British miles, exposed to the burning rays of a tropical sun, these poor slaves, amidst their own infinitely greater sufferings, would commiserate mine, and, frequently of their own accord, bring water to quench my thirst, and at night collect branches and leaves to prepare me a bed in the wilderness. We parted with reciprocal expressions of regret and benediction. My good wishes and prayers were all I could bestow upon them, and it afforded me some consolation to be told that they were sensible I had no more to give.
Now that I was close to Pisania, where my journey originally began, and realizing that my friend Karfa probably wouldn't have a chance to sell his slaves right away in the Gambia, I suggested that he leave them at Jindey until a market opened up. Karfa agreed and rented huts from the town's chief for their shelter, as well as a piece of land to help them grow corn and other supplies for their upkeep. He said he wouldn't leave my side until I departed from Africa. So, on the morning of the 9th, we set out—Karfa, myself, and one of the Foulahs from the group. Even though I was nearing the end of my long and exhausting journey and expected to meet fellow countrymen and friends in just another day, I couldn't say goodbye for the last time to my unfortunate fellow travelers—doomed, as I knew many of them were, to a life of captivity and slavery in a foreign land—without feeling deep emotion. During my exhausting trek of over five hundred British miles, despite their own much greater suffering, these poor slaves would feel for me; they often brought me water to ease my thirst, and at night, would gather branches and leaves to make me a bed in the wilderness. We parted with mutual expressions of sorrow and good wishes. My kind thoughts and prayers were all I could offer them, and it brought me some comfort to know they understood I had nothing more to give.
My anxiety to get forward admitting of no delay on the road, we reached Tendacunda in the evening, and were hospitably received at the house of an aged black female called Seniora Camilla, a person who resided many years at the English factory and spoke our language. I was known to her before I had left the Gambia at the outset of my journey, but my dress and figure were now so different from the usual appearance of a European that she was very excusable in mistaking me for a Moor. When I told her my name and country she surveyed me with great astonishment, and seemed unwilling to give credit to the testimony of her senses. She assured me that none of the traders on the Gambia ever expected to see me again, having been informed long ago that the Moors of Ludamar had murdered me, as they had murdered Major Houghton. I inquired for my two attendants, Johnson and Demba, and learnt with great sorrow that neither of them was returned. Karfa, who had never before heard people converse in English, listened to us with great attention. Everything he saw seemed wonderful. The furniture of the house, the chairs, &c., and particularly beds with curtains, were objects of his great admiration, and he asked me a thousand questions concerning the utility and necessity of different articles, to some of which I found it difficult to give satisfactory answers.
My eagerness to move forward without any delays on the road drove us to reach Tendacunda by evening, where we were warmly welcomed at the home of an elderly black woman named Seniora Camilla, who had lived for many years at the English factory and spoke our language. I had known her before I left the Gambia at the start of my journey, but my clothing and appearance were so different from what a typical European looked like that it was understandable for her to mistake me for a Moor. When I told her my name and where I was from, she looked at me in shock and seemed reluctant to believe her eyes. She told me that none of the traders on the Gambia ever expected to see me again, having been informed long ago that the Moors of Ludamar had killed me, just like they had Major Houghton. I asked about my two companions, Johnson and Demba, and learned with great sadness that neither had returned. Karfa, who had never heard anyone speak in English before, listened to us with great interest. Everything he saw seemed incredible. The furniture in the house, the chairs, etc., especially the beds with curtains, amazed him, and he asked me countless questions about the purpose and necessity of different items, some of which I found hard to answer satisfactorily.
On the morning of the 10th Mr. Robert Ainsley, having learned that I was at Tendacunda, came to meet me, and politely offered me the use of his horse. He informed me that Dr. Laidley had removed all his property to a place called Kayee, a little farther down the river, and that he was then gone to Doomasansa with his vessel to purchase rice, but would return in a day or two. He therefore invited me to stay with him at Pisania until the doctor’s return. I accepted the invitation, and being accompanied by my friend Karfa, reached Pisania about ten o’clock. Mr. Ainsley’s schooner was lying at anchor before the place. This was the most surprising object which Karfa had yet seen. He could not easily comprehend the use of the masts, sails, and rigging; nor did he conceive that it was possible, by any sort of contrivance, to make so large a body move forwards by the common force of the wind. The manner of fastening together the different planks which composed the vessel, and filling up the seams so as to exclude the water, was perfectly new to him; and I found that the schooner, with her cable and anchor, kept Karfa in deep meditation the greater part of the day.
On the morning of the 10th, Mr. Robert Ainsley, having learned that I was at Tendacunda, came to meet me and kindly offered me the use of his horse. He told me that Dr. Laidley had moved all his belongings to a place called Kayee, a little further down the river, and that he had gone to Doomasansa with his boat to buy rice but would be back in a day or two. He then invited me to stay with him at Pisania until the doctor returned. I accepted the invitation, and accompanied by my friend Karfa, we reached Pisania around ten o’clock. Mr. Ainsley’s schooner was anchored in front of the place. This was the most astonishing sight Karfa had seen so far. He couldn’t easily understand the purpose of the masts, sails, and rigging; nor could he believe that it was possible to move such a large object forward using just the wind. The way the different planks of the vessel were fastened together and the seams sealed to keep out water was completely new to him; I found that the schooner, along with its cable and anchor, kept Karfa deep in thought for most of the day.
About noon on the 12th Dr. Laidley returned from Doomasansa and received me with great joy and satisfaction, as one risen from the dead. Finding that the wearing apparel which I had left under his care was not sold or sent to England, I lost no time in resuming the English dress and disrobing my chin of its venerable encumbrance. Karfa surveyed me in my British apparel with great delight, but regretted exceedingly that I had taken off my beard, the loss of which, he said, had converted me from a man into a boy. Dr. Laidley readily undertook to discharge all the pecuniary engagements which I had entered into since my departure from the Gambia, and took my draft upon the association for the amount. My agreement with Karfa (as I have already related) was to pay him the value of one prime slave, for which I had given him my bill upon Dr. Laidley before we departed from Kamalia; for in case of my death on the road I was unwilling that my benefactor should be a loser. But this good creature had continued to manifest towards me so much kindness that I thought I made him but an inadequate recompense when I told him that he was now to receive double the sum I had originally promised; and Dr. Laidley assured him that he was ready to deliver the goods to that amount whenever he thought proper to send for them. Karfa was overpowered by this unexpected token of my gratitude, and still more so when he heard that I intended to send a handsome present to the good old schoolmaster, Fankooma, at Malacotta. He promised to carry up the goods along with his own; and Dr. Laidley assured him that he would exert himself in assisting him to dispose of his slaves to the best advantage the moment a slave vessel should arrive. These and other instances of attention and kindness shown him by Dr. Laidley were not lost upon Karfa. He would often say to me, “My journey has indeed been prosperous!” But observing the improved state of our manufactures and our manifest superiority in the arts of civilised life, he would sometimes appear pensive, and exclaim, with an involuntary sigh, Fato fing inta feng (“Black men are nothing”)! At other times he would ask me, with great seriousness, what could possibly have induced me, who was no trader, to think of exploring so miserable a country as Africa. He meant by this to signify that, after what I must have witnessed in my own country, nothing in Africa could in his opinion deserve a moment’s attention. I have preserved these little traits of character in this worthy negro, not only from regard to the man, but also because they appear to me to demonstrate that he possessed a mind above his condition. And to such of my readers as love to contemplate human nature in all its varieties, and to trace its progress from rudeness to refinement, I hope the account I have given of this poor African will not be unacceptable.
Around noon on the 12th, Dr. Laidley returned from Doomasansa and greeted me with great joy and satisfaction, like someone who had come back from the dead. Seeing that the clothes I had left in his care were neither sold nor sent to England, I quickly changed back into my English attire and removed my beard. Karfa looked at me in my British outfit with great delight but was very sorry that I had shaved, saying that it made me look more like a boy than a man. Dr. Laidley willingly agreed to take care of all the financial obligations I had incurred since leaving the Gambia and accepted my draft on the association for the amount. My agreement with Karfa (as I mentioned before) was to pay him the equivalent of one prime slave, for which I had given him my bill on Dr. Laidley before we left Kamalia; I didn’t want my benefactor to lose out in case I died on the journey. But this wonderful person had shown me so much kindness that I felt I was offering him too little when I told him he would now receive double the amount I originally promised; Dr. Laidley assured him he would be ready to deliver the goods for that amount whenever Karfa wanted to claim them. Karfa was overwhelmed by this unexpected sign of my gratitude, especially when he heard I planned to send a nice gift to the kind old schoolmaster, Fankooma, in Malacotta. He promised to take the goods along with his own, and Dr. Laidley assured him he would do everything possible to help him sell his slaves as profitably as possible as soon as a slave ship arrived. These and other acts of kindness shown to him by Dr. Laidley did not go unnoticed by Karfa. He often said to me, “My journey has indeed been successful!” But noticing the improved state of our manufacturing and our clear superiority in civilized arts, he sometimes seemed thoughtful and would involuntarily sigh, Fato fing inta feng (“Black men are nothing”)! At other times, he would seriously ask me what could possibly have motivated me, who wasn’t a trader, to explore such a poor country as Africa. He meant to suggest that, after what I must have seen in my own country, nothing in Africa, in his opinion, was worthy of any attention. I have noted these small traits of character in this admirable man, not just out of respect for him, but also because they show that he had a mind above his condition. To those readers who enjoy reflecting on human nature in all its forms and tracing its journey from primitiveness to refinement, I hope my account of this poor African will be appreciated.
No European vessel had arrived at Gambia for many months previous to my return from the interior, and as the rainy season was now setting in I persuaded Karfa to return to his people at Jindey. He parted with me on the 14th with great tenderness; but as I had little hopes of being able to quit Africa for the remainder of the year, I told him, as the fact was, that I expected to see him again before my departure. In this, however, I was luckily disappointed, and my narrative now hastens to its conclusion; for on the 15th, the ship Charlestown, an American vessel, commanded by Mr. Charles Harris, entered the river. She came for slaves, intending to touch at Goree to fill up, and to proceed from thence to South Carolina. As the European merchants on the Gambia had at this time a great many slaves on hand, they agreed with the captain to purchase the whole of his cargo, consisting chiefly of rum and tobacco, and deliver him slaves to the amount in the course of two days. This afforded me such an opportunity of returning, though by a circuitous route, to my native country as I thought was not to be neglected. I therefore immediately engaged my passage in this vessel for America; and having taken leave of Dr. Laidley, to whose kindness I was so largely indebted, and my other friends on the river, I embarked at Kayee on the 17th day of June.
No European ship had arrived in Gambia for many months before I returned from the interior, and since the rainy season was starting, I convinced Karfa to go back to his people at Jindey. He said goodbye to me on the 14th with great affection; however, since I had little hope of leaving Africa for the rest of the year, I told him honestly that I expected to see him again before I left. Fortunately, I was proven wrong about that, and my story now moves toward its end; on the 15th, the ship Charlestown, an American vessel captained by Mr. Charles Harris, came into the river. It came for slaves, planning to stop at Goree to load up before heading to South Carolina. At that time, the European merchants in Gambia had a surplus of slaves, so they agreed with the captain to buy all of his cargo, mainly rum and tobacco, and deliver him slaves to match his cargo in about two days. This gave me a chance to return to my homeland, even if it was via an indirect route, that I thought I shouldn’t pass up. So, I immediately booked my passage on this ship to America; after saying goodbye to Dr. Laidley, to whose kindness I owed so much, and my other friends along the river, I boarded at Kayee on June 17th.
Our passage down the river was tedious and fatiguing; and the weather was so hot, moist, and unhealthy, that before our arrival at Goree four of the seamen, the surgeon, and three of the slaves had died of fevers. At Goree we were detained, for want of provisions, until the beginning of October.
Our trip down the river was boring and exhausting; the weather was so hot, humid, and unhealthy that by the time we got to Goree, four of the sailors, the doctor, and three of the slaves had died from fevers. At Goree, we were held up because we lacked supplies until early October.
The number of slaves received on board this vessel, both on the Gambia and at Goree, was one hundred and thirty, of whom about twenty-five had been, I suppose, of free condition in Africa, as most of those, being bushreens, could write a little Arabic. Nine of them had become captives in the religious war between Abdulkader and Damel, mentioned in the latter part of the preceding chapter. Two of the others had seen me as I passed through Bondou, and many of them had heard of me in the interior countries. My conversation with them, in their native language, gave them great comfort; and as the surgeon was dead I consented to act in a medical capacity in his room for the remainder of the voyage. They had in truth need of every consolation in my power to bestow; not that I observed any wanton acts of cruelty practised either by the master or the seamen towards them, but the mode of confining and securing negroes in the American slave-ships (owing chiefly to the weakness of their crews) being abundantly more rigid and severe than in British vessels employed in the same traffic, made these poor creatures to suffer greatly, and a general sickness prevailed amongst them. Besides the three who died on the Gambia, and six or eight while we remained at Goree, eleven perished at sea, and many of the survivors were reduced to a very weak and emaciated condition.
The number of slaves brought on this ship, both in Gambia and at Goree, was one hundred and thirty, about twenty-five of whom were likely free in Africa, as most of them, being bushreens, could write a little Arabic. Nine of them had been captured in the religious war between Abdulkader and Damel, mentioned in the last part of the previous chapter. Two of the others had seen me as I passed through Bondou, and many had heard of me in the interior countries. My conversation with them in their native language provided them with great comfort; and since the surgeon had died, I agreed to take on medical duties for the rest of the voyage. They truly needed every bit of consolation I could offer; although I did not witness any cruel acts by the captain or the crew towards them, the way they confined and secured the enslaved people on American slave ships (mainly due to the inadequacy of their crews) was far more harsh and severe than on British vessels involved in the same trade, causing these poor individuals to suffer greatly, and a widespread illness took hold among them. In addition to the three who died in Gambia, and six or eight while we were at Goree, eleven died at sea, and many of the survivors were left in a very weak and emaciated state.
In the midst of these distresses the vessel, after having been three weeks at sea, became so extremely leaky as to require constant exertion at the pumps. It was found necessary therefore to take some of the ablest of the negro men out of irons and employ them in this labour, in which they were often worked beyond their strength. This produced a complication of miseries not easily to be described. We were, however, relieved much sooner than I expected, for, the leak continuing to gain upon us, notwithstanding our utmost exertions to clear the vessel, the seamen insisted on bearing away for the West Indies, as affording the only chance of saving our lives. Accordingly, after some objections on the part of the master, we directed our course for Antigua, and fortunately made that island in about thirty-five days after our departure from Goree. Yet even at this juncture we narrowly escaped destruction, for on approaching the north-west side of the island we struck on the Diamond Rock and got into St. John’s Harbour with great difficulty. The vessel was afterwards condemned as unfit for sea, and the slaves, as I have heard, were ordered to be sold for the benefit of the owners.
In the middle of these troubles, the ship, after being at sea for three weeks, became so leaky that we had to constantly work the pumps. It became necessary to take some of the strongest of the enslaved men out of chains and use them for this task, often pushing them beyond their limits. This created a mix of suffering that’s hard to describe. However, we were relieved much sooner than I expected. As the leak continued to worsen despite our best efforts to fix it, the crew insisted on changing course for the West Indies, as that was our only chance of survival. After some hesitation from the captain, we set our course for Antigua and luckily reached that island about thirty-five days after leaving Goree. Even then, we narrowly avoided disaster, as we struck the Diamond Rock when approaching the north-west side of the island and made it into St. John’s Harbour with great difficulty. The ship was later deemed unfit for sea, and I’ve heard that the enslaved people were ordered to be sold for the owners' benefit.
At this island I remained ten days, when the Chesterfield packet, homeward bound from the Leeward Islands, touching at St. John’s for the Antigua mail, I took my passage in that vessel. We sailed on the 24th of November, and after a short but tempestuous voyage arrived at Falmouth on the 22nd of December, from whence I immediately set out for London; having been absent from England two years and seven months.
At this island, I stayed for ten days, when the Chesterfield packet, which was heading home from the Leeward Islands and stopped at St. John’s for the Antigua mail, I booked a ticket on that ship. We set sail on November 24th, and after a brief but stormy voyage, we arrived at Falmouth on December 22nd, from where I immediately headed to London, having been away from England for two years and seven months.
NOTE.
The following passage from James Montgomery’s poem, “The West Indies,” published in 1810, was inspired by “Mungo Park’s Travels in the Interior of Africa.” It enshrines in English verse the beautiful incident of the negro woman’s song of “Charity” (on page 190 of the first of these two volumes), and closes with the poet’s blessing upon Mungo Park himself, who had sailed five years before upon the second journey, from which he had not returned, and whose fate did not become known until five years later.
The following passage from James Montgomery’s poem, “The West Indies,” published in 1810, was inspired by “Mungo Park’s Travels in the Interior of Africa.” It captures in English verse the touching moment of the Black woman’s song of “Charity” (on page 190 of the first of these two volumes), and ends with the poet’s blessing for Mungo Park himself, who had embarked five years earlier on his second journey, from which he had not returned, and whose fate wasn’t revealed until five years later.
Man, through all ages of revolving time,
Unchanging man, in every varying clime,
Deems his own land of every land the pride,
Beloved by Heaven o’er all the world beside;
His home the spot of earth supremely blest,
A dearer, sweeter spot than all the rest.Throughout all ages of changing times,
Unchanging man, in every different place,
Always thinks his land is the best of all,
Blessed by Heaven more than anywhere else in the world;
His home is the most cherished spot on earth,
A more precious, sweeter place than any other.And is the Negro outlawed from his birth?
Is he alone a stranger on the earth?
Is there no shed whose peeping roof appears
So lovely that it fills his eyes with tears?
No land, whose name, in exile heard, will dart
Ice through his veins and lightning through his heart?
Ah! yes; beneath the beams of brighter skies
His home amidst his father’s country lies;
There with the partner of his soul he shares
Love-mingled pleasures, love-divided cares;
There, as with nature’s warmest filial fire,
He soothes his blind and feeds his helpless sire;
His children, sporting round his hut, behold
How they shall cherish him when he is old,
Trained by example from their tenderest youth
To deeds of charity and words of truth.
Is he not blest? Behold, at closing day,
The Negro village swarms abroad to play;
He treads the dance, through all its rapturous rounds,
To the wild music of barbarian sounds;
Or, stretched at ease where broad palmettos shower
Delicious coolness in his shadowy bower,
He feasts on tales of witchcraft, that give birth
To breathless wonder or ecstatic mirth:
Yet most delighted when, in rudest rhymes,
The minstrel wakes the song of elder times,
When men were heroes, slaves to Beauty’s charms,
And all the joys of life were love and arms.
Is not the Negro blest? His generous soil
With harvest plenty crowns his simple toil;
More than his wants his flocks and fields afford:
He loves to greet a stranger at his board:
“The winds were roaring and the White Man fled;
The rains of night descended on his head;
The poor White Man sat down beneath our tree:
Weary and faint and far from home was he:
For him no mother fills with milk the bowl,
No wife prepares the bread to cheer his soul.
Pity the poor White Man, who sought our tree;
No wife, no mother, and no home has he.”
Thus sung the Negro’s daughters;—once again,
O that the poor White Man might hear that strain!
Whether the victim of the treacherous Moor,
Or from the Negro’s hospitable door
Spurned as a spy from Europe’s hateful clime,
And left to perish for thy country’s crime,
Or destined still, when all thy wanderings cease,
On Albion’s lovely lap to rest in peace,
Pilgrim! in heaven or earth, where’er thou be,
Angels of mercy guide and comfort thee!So, is the Black person cast out from birth?
Is he the only outsider on this earth?
Is there no place, with a roof peeking through,
So beautiful that it moves him to tears too?
No land, whose name from exile will ignite
Chills through his veins and spark light in his heart?
Ah! yes; under brighter skies, he finds
His home in his father's land, intertwined;
There, with the partner of his soul, he shares
Joyful moments and burdens he bears;
There, with nature's warmest embrace,
He cares for his blind father, fulfilling his grace;
His children, playing around his hut, can see
How they’ll support him when he’s old, you see,
Taught by his example from the time they’re small
To acts of kindness and truths they recall.
Is he not blessed? Look, as the day ends,
The Black village gathers to enjoy with friends;
He dances through all the joyful moves,
To the wild beats of ancient grooves;
Or, relaxing where the palmettos provide
A cool retreat in their shade as a guide,
He enjoys stories of magic that spark
Amazement and joyous remarks:
Yet he’s most thrilled when, in rough rhymes,
The singer brings back the songs of old times,
When men were heroes, bound by love's charms,
And life’s delights were all about love and arms.
Is not the Black person blessed? His rich land
Reaps abundant harvests from his hard work's hand;
More than he needs, his flocks and fields supply:
He loves to welcome strangers to his pie:
“The winds were howling and the White man fled;
The night’s rains pelted down on his head;
The poor White man sat down beneath our tree:
Weary and weak, far from home was he:
For him, no mother fills the bowl with milk,
No wife bakes bread to comfort him with warmth like silk.
Feel for the poor White man, who sought our tree;
No wife, no mother, and no home has he.”
Thus sang the daughters of the Black man;—once more,
Oh, that the poor White man might hear that score!
Whether a victim of the deceitful Moor,
Or pushed away from the Black man's welcoming door
As a spy from Europe’s unfriendly shore,
And left to die because of your country’s war,
Or destined still, when all your travels cease,
On the lovely lap of Albion to find peace,
Pilgrim! in heaven or earth, wherever you roam,
May angels of mercy guide and comfort you home!
A note to the same poem gives the following record of facts, substantiated in a court of justice, in which there can be only one answer to the question, “Which were the savages?”
A note to the same poem provides the following account of facts, proven in a court of law, where there is only one answer to the question, “Who were the savages?”
“In this year (1783) certain underwriters desired to be heard against Gregson and others of Liverpool, in the case of the ship Zong, Captain Collingwood, alleging that the captain and officers of the said vessel threw overboard one hundred and thirty-two slaves alive into the sea, in order to defraud them by claiming the value of the said slaves, as if they had been lost in a natural way. In the course of the trial which afterwards came on, it appeared that the slaves on board the Zong were very sickly; that sixty of them had already died, and several were ill and likely to die, when the captain proposed to James Kelsal, the mate, and others to throw several of them overboard, stating that ‘if they died a natural death, the loss would fall upon the owners of the ship, but that if they were thrown into the sea, it would fall upon the underwriters.’ He selected accordingly one hundred and thirty-two of the most sickly of the slaves. Fifty-four of these were immediately thrown overboard, and forty-two were made to be partakers of their fate on the succeeding day. In the course of three days afterwards the remaining twenty-six were brought upon deck to complete the number of victims. The first sixteen submitted to be thrown into the sea, but the rest, with a noble resolution, would not suffer the offices to touch them, but leaped after their companions and shared their fate.
“In this year (1783), some underwriters wanted to make their case against Gregson and others from Liverpool regarding the ship Zong, captained by Collingwood. They alleged that the captain and crew threw one hundred thirty-two living slaves overboard to cheat them by claiming compensation for the slaves as if they had been lost due to natural causes. During the subsequent trial, it was revealed that the slaves on board the Zong were in very poor health; sixty had already died, and several others were sick and likely to die when the captain suggested to James Kelsal, the mate, and others that they should throw some of them overboard. He argued that ‘if they died of natural causes, the ship owners would suffer the loss, but if they were thrown into the sea, the loss would fall on the underwriters.’ He chose one hundred thirty-two of the sickest slaves. Fifty-four were thrown overboard immediately, and forty-two faced the same fate the next day. Three days later, the remaining twenty-six were brought on deck to reach the total number of victims. The first sixteen willingly went into the sea, but the others, with admirable determination, refused to let the crew touch them and jumped after their companions, sharing their fate.”
“The plea which was set up in behalf of this atrocious and unparalleled act of wickedness was that the captain discovered, when he made the proposal, that he had only two hundred gallons of water on board, and that he had missed his port. It was proved, however, in answer to this, that no one had been put upon short allowance; and that, as if Providence had determined to afford an unequivocal proof of the guilt, a shower of rain fell, and continued for three days, immediately after the second lot of slaves had been destroyed, by means of which they might have filled many of their vessels with water, and thus have prevented all necessity for the destruction of the third.
“The argument presented in defense of this horrific and unparalleled act of evil was that the captain realized, when he proposed it, that he only had two hundred gallons of water on board and that he had missed his port. However, it was proven in response to this that no one had been put on short rations; and as if fate had decided to provide clear evidence of guilt, it rained for three days right after the second group of slaves had been killed, which could have allowed them to fill many of their containers with water, thereby eliminating the need to destroy the third group.”
“Mr. Granville Sharp (who after many years of struggle first obtained the decision of a court of justice that there are no slaves in England) was present at this trial, and procured the attendance of a shorthand writer to take down the facts which should come out in the course of it. These he gave to the public afterwards. He communicated them also, with a copy of the trial, to the Lords of the Admiralty, as the guardians of justice upon the seas, and to the Duke of Portland, as principal Minister of state. No notice, however, was taken by any of these of the information which had been thus sent them.”
“Mr. Granville Sharp (who, after many years of advocacy, was the first to get a court to declare that there are no slaves in England) attended this trial and arranged for a shorthand writer to document the facts that arose during the proceedings. He later shared these with the public. He also sent them, along with a copy of the trial, to the Lords of the Admiralty, who are responsible for justice at sea, and to the Duke of Portland, the main Minister of State. However, none of them acknowledged the information he sent.”
Another incident of the Middle Passage suggested to James Montgomery a poem called “The Voyage of the Blind.”
Another incident of the Middle Passage reminded James Montgomery of a poem called “The Voyage of the Blind.”
“It was that fatal and perfidious bark,
Built in the eclipse, and rigged with curses dark.”“It was that dangerous and treacherous ship,
Constructed during the eclipse and fitted with dark curses.”Milton’s Lycidas.
Milton’s Lycidas.
The ship Le Rodeur, Captain B., of 200 tons burthen, left Havre on the 24th of January, 1819, for the coast of Africa, and reached her destination on the 14th of March following, anchoring at Bonny, on the river Calabar. The crew, consisting of twenty-two men, enjoyed good health during the outward voyage and during their stay at Bonny, where they continued till the 6th of April. They had observed no trace of ophthalmia among the natives; and it was not until fifteen days after they had set sail on the return voyage, and the vessel was near the equator, that they perceived the first symptoms of this frightful malady. It was then remarked that the negroes, who to the number of 160 were crowded together in the hold and between the decks, had contracted a considerable redness of the eyes, which spread with singular rapidity. No great attention was at first paid to these symptoms, which were thought to be caused only by the want of air in the hold, and by the scarcity of water, which had already begun to be felt. At this time they were limited to eight ounces of water a day for each person, which quantity was afterwards reduced to the half of a wine-glass. By the advice of M. Maugnan, the surgeon of the ship, the negroes, who had hitherto remained shut up in the hold, were brought upon deck in succession, in order that they might breathe a purer air. But it became necessary to abandon this expedient, salutary as it was, because many of the negroes, affected with nostalgia (a passionate longing to return to their native land), threw themselves into the sea, locked in each other’s arms.
The ship Le Rodeur, Captain B., with a capacity of 200 tons, left Havre on January 24, 1819, heading for the coast of Africa, and arrived at its destination on March 14, anchoring at Bonny on the Calabar River. The crew of twenty-two men stayed healthy during the outward journey and while at Bonny, where they remained until April 6. They noticed no signs of ophthalmia among the natives, but fifteen days into their return voyage, near the equator, they began to see the first signs of this terrible illness. It was observed that the 160 Africans packed into the hold and between the decks had developed significant redness in their eyes, which spread rapidly. Initially, not much attention was paid to these symptoms, as they were thought to be due to the lack of air in the hold and the beginning shortage of water. At that time, they were limited to eight ounces of water per person each day, which was later cut down to half a wine glass. Following the advice of M. Maugnan, the ship's surgeon, the Africans, who had been kept below deck, were gradually brought up to the deck to breathe fresher air. However, this approach had to be abandoned, despite its benefits, because many of the Africans, suffering from nostalgia (a deep longing to go back to their homeland), jumped into the sea, holding onto each other.
The disease, which had spread itself so rapidly and frightfully among the Africans, soon began to infect all on board. The danger also was greatly increased by a malignant dysentery which prevailed at the time. The first of the crew who caught it was a sailor who slept under the deck near the grated hatch which communicated with the hold. The next day a landsman was seized with ophthalmia; and in three days more the captain and the whole ship’s company, except one sailor, who remained at the helm, were blinded by the disorder.
The disease, which had spread so quickly and terrifyingly among the Africans, soon started to infect everyone on board. The danger was made even worse by a severe dysentery that was common at the time. The first crew member to get it was a sailor who slept under the deck near the grated hatch that connected to the hold. The next day, a landsman was struck with ophthalmia; and in three more days, the captain and the entire ship's company, except for one sailor who stayed at the helm, were blinded by the illness.
All means of cure which the surgeon employed, while he was able to act, proved ineffectual. The sufferings of the crew, which were otherwise intense, were aggravated by apprehension of revolt among the negroes, and the dread of not being able to reach the West Indies, if the only sailor who had hitherto escaped the contagion, and on whom their whole hope rested, should lose his sight, like the rest. This calamity had actually befallen the Leon, a Spanish vessel which the Rodeur met on her passage, and the whole of whose crew, having become blind, were under the necessity of altogether abandoning the direction of their ship. These unhappy creatures, as they passed, earnestly entreated the charitable interference of the seamen of the Rodeur; but these, under their own affliction, could neither quit their vessel to go on board the Leon, nor receive the crew of the latter into the Rodeur, where, on account of the cargo of negroes, there was scarcely room for themselves. The vessels therefore soon parted company, and the Leon was never seen nor heard of again, so far as could be traced at the publication of this narrative. In all probability, then, it was lost. On the fate of this vessel the poem is founded.
All the treatments the surgeon used, while he was still able to act, were ineffective. The crew's suffering, which was already intense, was made worse by their fear of a revolt among the Black crew members and the worry that they wouldn't make it to the West Indies if the only sailor who had so far avoided the illness, and on whom they depended, lost his sight like the others. This disaster actually happened to the Leon, a Spanish ship that the Rodeur encountered on its journey, whose entire crew had gone blind and had to completely abandon the steering of their ship. These unfortunate individuals, as they passed by, urgently requested the help of the Rodeur's sailors; however, due to their own suffering, they could neither leave their ship to board the Leon nor take in the crew from the latter vessel into the Rodeur, where, because of the cargo of Black people, there was barely enough room for themselves. Therefore, the ships soon separated, and the Leon was never seen or heard from again, at least as far as could be known when this narrative was published. Most likely, it was lost. The poem is based on the fate of this vessel.
The Rodeur reached Guadaloupe on the 21st of June, 1819, her crew being in a most deplorable condition. Of the negroes, thirty-seven had become perfectly blind, twelve had lost each an eye, and fourteen remained otherwise blemished by the disease. Of the crew, twelve, including the surgeon, had entirely lost their sight; five escaped with an eye each, and four were partially injured.
The Rodeur arrived in Guadalupe on June 21, 1819, with her crew in terrible shape. Out of the black crew members, thirty-seven were completely blind, twelve had lost one eye each, and fourteen had other ailments affecting their sight. Among the crew, twelve, including the surgeon, were fully blind; five had lost one eye each, and four had suffered partial injuries.
FOOTNOTES.
[7] I should have before observed that I found the language of Bambarra a sort of corrupted Mandingo. After a little practice, I understood and spoke it without difficulty.
[7] I should have mentioned earlier that I found the language of Bambarra to be a kind of broken Mandingo. After some practice, I was able to understand and speak it easily.
[35] There is another town of this name hereafter to be mentioned.
[35] There is another town with this name that will be mentioned later.
[58] From a plant called kabba, that climbs like a vine upon the trees.
[58] From a plant called kabba, that grows like a vine on trees.
[80] Soon after baptism the children are marked in different parts of the skin, in a manner resembling what is called tattooing in the South Sea Islands.
[80] Soon after baptism, the children are marked in various places on their skin, similar to what is known as tattooing in the South Sea Islands.
[82] Chap. xxxi. vv. 26–28.
[92] Poisoned arrows are used chiefly in war. The poison, which is said to be very deadly, is prepared from a shrub called koono (a species of echites), which is very common in the woods. The leaves of this shrub, when boiled with a small quantity of water, yield a thick black juice, into which the negroes dip a cotton thread: this thread they fasten round the iron of the arrow in such a manner that it is almost impossible to extract the arrow, when it has sunk beyond the barbs, without leaving the iron point and the poisoned thread in the wound.
[92] Poisoned arrows are mainly used in warfare. The poison, which is extremely lethal, comes from a shrub known as koono (a type of echites), which is very common in the forests. The leaves of this shrub, when boiled with a small amount of water, produce a thick black liquid. The locals dip a cotton thread in this liquid and wrap it around the arrowhead in such a way that it’s nearly impossible to remove the arrow once it's embedded past the barbs without leaving both the arrowhead and the poisoned thread in the wound.
[93] A minkalli is a quantity of gold nearly equal in value to ten shillings sterling.
[93] A minkalli is an amount of gold that's almost worth ten shillings sterling.
[104] This is a large, spreading tree (a species of sterculia) under which the bentang is commonly placed.
[104] This is a big, sprawling tree (a type of sterculia) where the bentang is often found.
[109] When a negro takes up goods on credit from any of the Europeans on the coast, and does not make payment at the time appointed, the European is authorised by the laws of the country to seize upon the debtor himself, if he can find him, or, if he cannot be found, on any person of his family; or, in the last resort, on any native of the same kingdom. The person thus seized on is detained, while his friends are sent in quest of the debtor. When he is found, a meeting is called of the chief people of the place, and the debtor is compelled to ransom his friend by fulfilling his engagements. If he is unable to do this, his person is immediately secured and sent down to the coast, and the other released. If the debtor cannot be found, the person seized on is obliged to pay double the amount of the debt, or is himself sold into slavery. I was given to understand, however, that this part of the law is seldom enforced.
[109] When a Black person buys goods on credit from any of the Europeans on the coast and doesn't make the payment by the agreed time, the European is allowed by the laws of the country to seize the debtor if he can find him. If the debtor can't be found, any member of his family can be taken, or, as a last resort, any native of the same kingdom. The person taken is held while his friends look for the debtor. When the debtor is found, a meeting is held with the local leaders, and the debtor is forced to pay for his friend’s release by fulfilling his obligations. If he can't do that, he is immediately taken and sent to the coast, and the other person is set free. If the debtor can't be located, the person seized must either pay double the debt or is sold into slavery. I was told, however, that this part of the law is rarely enforced.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!